Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 2 Answer Key

Engage NY Eureka Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 2 Answer Key

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Answer Key

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 2 Pattern Sheet Answer Key

Multiply.
Engage NY Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 2 Pattern Set Answer Key 1
multiply by 3 (6–10)
Answer:
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-1-Answer-Key-Eureka Math 3 Module 7 Lesson 1-Pattern Sheet Answer Key

Explanation:
Explanation:
3 × 1 = 3
3 × 2 = 6
3 × 3 = 9
3 × 4 = 12
3 × 5 = 15
3 × 6 = 18
3 × 7 = 21
3 × 8 = 24
3 × 9 = 27
3 × 10 = 30.

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 2 Problem Set Answer Key

Use the RDW process to solve. Use a letter to represent the unknown in each problem.
Question 1.
Leanne needs 120 tiles for an art project. She has 56 tiles. If tiles are sold in boxes of 8, how many more boxes of tiles does Leanne need to buy?
Answer:
Number of boxes of 8 tiles needed to buy more = 8.

Explanation:
Number of tiles needed for an project = 120
Number of tiles Leanne has = 56
Number of more tiles needed to buy by Leanne = Number of tiles needed for an project – Number of tiles Leanne has
= 120 – 56
= 64.
If tiles are sold in boxes of 8.
=>Number of tiles a box consist = 8
Number of boxes of 8 tiles needed to buy more = Number of more tiles needed to buy by Leanne ÷ Number of tiles a box consist
= 64 ÷ 8
= 8.

Question 2.
Gwen pours 236 milliliters of water into Ravi’s beaker. Henry pours 189 milliliters of water into Ravi’s beaker. Ravi’s beaker now contains 800 milliliters of water. How much water was in Ravi’s beaker to begin with?

Answer:
Total number of milliliters of water was in Ravi’s beaker to begin with = 425.

Explanation:
Number of  milliliters of water Gwen pours  into Ravi’s beaker = 236
Number of  milliliters of water Henry pours  into Ravi’s beaker = 189
Ravi’s beaker now contains 800 milliliters of water.
Total number of milliliters of water was in Ravi’s beaker to begin with = Number of  milliliters of water Gwen pours  into Ravi’s beaker + Number of  milliliters of water Henry pours  into Ravi’s beaker
= 236 + 189
= 425.

Question 3.
Maude hung 3 pictures on her wall. Each picture measures 8 inches by 10 inches. What is the total area of the wall covered by the pictures?
Answer:
Total area of the wall covered by the pictures = 240  inches.

Explanation:
Maude hung 3 pictures on her wall.
=> Number of pictures hung on the wall = 3
Length of the each picture = 10 inches
Width of the each picture = 8 inches
Area of the each picture = Length of the each picture  × Width of the each picture
= 10 × 8
= 80 inches.
Total area of the wall covered by the pictures = Area of the each picture ×Number of pictures hung on the wall
= 80 × 3
= 240  inches.

Question 4.
Kami scored a total of 21 points during her basketball game. She made 6 two-point shots, and the rest were three-point shots. How many three-point shots did Kami make?

Answer:
Number of three-point shots she made = 15.

Explanation:
Total score point of Kami during her basketball game = 21
Number of two-point shots she made = 6
Number of three-point shots she made = Total score point of Kami during her basketball game – Number of two-point shots she made
= 21 – 6
= 15.

Question 5.
An orange weighs 198 grams. A kiwi weighs 85 grams less than the orange. What is the total weight of the fruit?
Answer:
Total weight of the fruits = 311 grams.

Explanation:
Weight of Orange fruit = 198 grams
A kiwi weighs 85 grams less than the orange.
=> Weight of Kiwi fruit =  Weight of Orange fruit  – 85
=> Weight of Kiwi fruit = 198 – 85
=> Weight of Kiwi fruit =  113 grams
Total weight of the fruits = Weight of Orange fruit + Weight of Kiwi fruit
=  198 + 113
= 311 grams.

Question 6.
The total amount of rain that fell in New York City in two years was 282 centimeters. In the first year, 185 centimeters of rain fell. How many more centimeters of rain fell in the first year than in the second year?

Answer:
Amount of Rain fell in the first year than in the second year = 88 centimeters.

Explanation:
Total amount of rain that fell in New York City in two years = 282 centimeters
Amount of rain fell in the First year = 185 centimeters
Amount of rain fell in the Second year = Total amount of rain that fell in New York City in two years – Amount of rain fell in the First year
= 282 – 185
= 97 centimeters.
Amount of Rain fell in the first year than in the second year = Amount of rain fell in the First year – Amount of rain fell in the Second year
= 185 – 97
= 88 centimeters.

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 2 Exit Ticket Answer Key

Use the RDW process to solve the problem below. Use a letter to represent the unknown.
Jaden’s bottle contains 750 milliliters of water. He drinks 520 milliliters at practice and then another 190 milliliters on his way home. How many milliliters of water are left in Jaden’s bottle when he gets home?

Answer:
Amount of water left in Jaden’s bottle when he gets home = 40 milliliters.

Explanation:
Total amount of water Jaden’s bottle contains = 750 milliliters
Amount of water he drinks at practice = 520 milliliters
Amount of water he drinks on his way home = 190 milliliters
Amount of water left in Jaden’s bottle when he gets home = Total amount of water Jaden’s bottle contains  – ( Amount of water he drinks at practice  + Amount of water he drinks on his way home)
= 750 – ( 520 + 190)
= 750 – 710
= 40 milliliters.

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 2 Homework Answer Key

Use the RDW process to solve. Use a letter to represent the unknown in each problem.
Question 1.
A box containing 3 small bags of flour weighs 950 grams. Each bag of flour weighs 300 grams. How much does the empty box weigh?
Answer:
Weight of the empty box = 50 grams.

Explanation:
Weight of a box containing 3 small bags of flour weighs = 950 grams
Weight of each bag of flour = 300 grams
Weight of 3 bag of flour = 300 × 3 = 900 grams
Weight of the empty box = Weight of a box containing 3 small bags of flour weighs – Weight of 3 bag of flour
= 950 – 900
= 50 grams.

Question 2.
Mr. Cullen needs 91 carpet squares. He has 49 carpet squares. If the squares are sold in boxes of 6, how many more boxes of carpet squares does Mr. Cullen need to buy?
Answer:
Number of squares boxes of 6  he needs to buy more = 7.

Explanation:
Number of carpet square Mr. Cullen needs = 91
Number of carpet square he has = 49
Number of carpet square he needs more = Number of carpet square Mr. Cullen needs – Number of carpet square he has
= 91 – 49
= 42.
Number of squares in the box = 6
Number of squares boxes of 6  he needs to buy more = Number of carpet square he needs more ÷ Number of squares in the box
= 42 ÷ 6
= 7.

Question 3.
Erica makes a banner using 4 sheets of paper. Each paper measures 9 inches by 10 inches. What is the total area of Erica’s banner?
Answer:
Total area of Erica’s banner = 360 inches.

Explanation:
Number of sheets of paper Erica makes a banner = 4
Length of the each paper = 10 inches
Width of the each paper = 9 inches
Area of the each paper = Length of the each paper × Width of the each paper
= 10 × 9
= 90 inches.
Total area of Erica’s banner = Area of the each paper  × Number of sheets of paper Erica makes a banner
= 90 × 4
= 360 inches.

Question 4.
Monica scored 32 points for her team at the Science Bowl. She got 5 four-point questions correct, and the rest of her points came from answering three-point questions. How many three-point questions did she get correct?
Answer:
Number of points scored by her for answering three-point questions correct = 27.

Explanation:
Number of points scored by Monica  for her team at the Science Bowl = 32
Number of points scored by her for four-point questions correct = 5
Number of points scored by her for answering three-point questions correct = Number of points scored by Monica  for her team at the Science Bowl  – Number of points scored by her for four-point questions correct
= 32 – 5
= 27.

Question 5.
Kim’s black kitten weighs 175 grams. Her gray kitten weighs 43 grams less than the black kitten. What is the total weight of the two kittens?
Answer:
Total weight of Kim’s black kitten and gray kitten = 307 grams.

Explanation:
Weight of the Kim’s black kitten = 175 grams
Her gray kitten weighs 43 grams less than the black kitten.
=> Weight of the Kim’s gray kitten = Weight of the Kim’s black kitten – 43
= 175 – 43
= 132 grams.
Total weight of Kim’s black kitten and gray kitten = Weight of the Kim’s black kitten + Weight of the Kim’s gray kitten
= 175 + 132
= 307 grams.

Question 6.
Cassias and Javier’s combined height is 267 centimeters. Cassias is 128 centimeters tall. How much taller is Javier than Cassias?
Answer:
Height of Javier’s more than Cassias height = 11 centimeters.

Explanation:
Height of Cassias and Javier’s combined = 267 centimeters.
Height of Cassias = 128 centimeters
Height of Javier = Height of Cassias and Javier’s combined – Height of Cassias
= 267 – 128
= 139.
Height of Javier’s more than Cassias height = Height of Javier  – Height of Cassias
= 139 – 128
= 11 centimeters.

 

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 3 Answer Key

Engage NY Eureka Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 3 Answer Key

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Answer Key

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 3 Pattern Sheet Answer Key

Multiply.
Engage NY Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 3 Pattern Set Answer Key 1
multiply by 4 (1–5)

Answer:
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-3-Answer-Key-Pattern-Sheet-Answer-Key

Explanation:
4 × 1 = 4
4 × 2 = 8
4 × 3 = 12
4 × 4 = 16
4 × 5 = 20

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson3 Problem Set Answer Key

Use the RDW process to solve the problems below. Use a letter to represent the unknown in each problem. When you are finished, share your solutions with a partner. Discuss and compare your strategies with your partner’s strategies.

Question 1.
Monica measures 91 milliliters of water into 9 tiny beakers. She measures an equal amount of water into the first 8 beakers. She pours the remaining water into the ninth beaker. It measures 19 milliliters. How many milliliters of water are in each of the first 8 beakers?

Answer:
Amount of water Monica pours into each of the first 8 beakers = 9 milliliters.

Explanation:
Amount of water Monica measures into 9 tiny beakers = 91 milliliters
Amount of water in ninth beaker = 19 milliliters
Amount of water Monica measures into 8 tiny beakers = Amount of water Monica measures into 9 tiny beakers – Amount of water in ninth beaker
= 91 – 19
= 72 milliliters.
Amount of water Monica pours into each of the first 8 beakers = Amount of water Monica measures into 8 tiny beakers  ÷ 8
= 72 ÷ 8
= 9 milliliters.

 

Question 2.
Matthew and his dad put up 8 six-foot lengths of fence on Monday and 9 six-foot lengths on Tuesday. What is the total length of the fence?

Answer:
Total Length of the six-foot fence Matthew and his dad put up on Monday and Tuesday = 17.

Explanation:
Length of the six-foot fence Matthew and his dad put up on Monday = 8
Length of the six-foot fence Matthew and his dad put up on Tuesday = 9
Total Length of the six-foot fence Matthew and his dad put up on Monday and Tuesday = Length of the six-foot fence Matthew and his dad put up on Monday + Length of the six-foot fence Matthew and his dad put up on Tuesday
= 8 + 9
= 17.

Question 3.
The total weight of Laura’s new pencils is 112 grams. One pencil rolls off the scale. Now the scale reads 105 grams. What is the total weight of 7 new pencils?

Answer:
Total weight of 7 new pencils = 98 grams.

Explanation:
Total weight of Laura’s new pencils = 112 grams
Weight of the pencils scale reads now = 105 grams
Weight of One pencil rolls off the scale = Total weight of Laura’s new pencils – Weight of the pencils scale reads now
= 112 – 105
= 7 grams.
Total weight of 7 new pencils = Weight of the pencils scale reads now – Weight of One pencil rolls off the scale
= 105 – 7
= 98 grams.

Question 4.
Mrs. Ford’s math class starts at 8:15. They do 3 fluency activities that each last 4 minutes. Just when they finish all of the fluency activities, the fire alarm goes off. When they return to the room after the drill, it is 8:46. How many minutes did the fire drill last?

Answer:
Time taken for the fire drill last = 19 minutes.

Explanation:
Time of the Mrs. Ford’s math class starts = 8:15.
Time of the Mrs. Ford’s returning to the room after the drill = 8:46
They do 3 fluency activities that each last 4 minutes.
=> Time taken for 3 fluency activities = 4 × 3 = 12 minutes.
Time taken for the Mrs. Ford’s math class to end = Time of the Mrs. Ford’s math class starts + Time taken for 3 fluency activities
= 8:15 + 0:12
= 8:27.
Time taken for the fire drill last = Time of the Mrs. Ford’s returning to the room after the drill  – Time taken for the Mrs. Ford’s math class to end
= 8:46 -8:27
= 19 minutes.

Question 5.
On Saturday, the baker bought a total of 150 pounds of flour in five-pound bags. By Tuesday, he had 115 pounds of flour left. How many five-pound bags of flour did the baker use?

Answer:
Amount of five-pound bags of flour used by the baker = 35 pounds.

Explanation:
Amount of total flour bought on Saturday in five-pound bags = 150 pounds.
Amount of flour left by Tuesday = 115 pounds
Amount of five-pound bags of flour used by the baker = Amount of total flour bought on Saturday in five-pound bags  – Amount of flour left by Tuesday
= 150 – 115
= 35 pounds.

 

Question 6.
Fred cut an 84-centimeter rope into 2 parts and gave his sister 1 part. Fred’s part is 56 centimeters long. His sister cut her rope into 4 equal pieces. How long is 1 of his sister’s pieces of rope?

Answer:
Length of each piece of rope Fred’s sister makes = 7 centimeters.

Explanation:
Total length of the Fred rope had= 84 centimeter
Length of Fred’s rope part= 56 centimeters
Length of Fred’s sister part rope = Total length of the Fred rope had – Length of Fred’s rope part
= 84 – 56
= 28.
His sister cut her rope into 4 equal pieces.
=> Number of pieces of rope Fred’s sister makes = 4
=> Length of each piece of rope Fred’s sister makes = Length of Fred’s sister part rope  ÷ Number of pieces of rope Fred’s sister makes
= 28 ÷ 4
= 7 centimeters.

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 3 Exit Ticket Answer Key

Use the RDW process to solve the problem below. Use a letter to represent the unknown.
Twenty packs of fruit snacks come in a box. Each pack weighs 6 ounces. Students eat some. There are 48 ounces of fruit snacks left in the box. How many ounces of fruit snacks did the students eat?

Answer:
Weight of packs of fruit snacks students ate = 72 ounces.

Explanation:
Weight of each pack = 6 ounces.
Number of fruit snacks come in a box = 20
Weight of 20 pack of fruit snacks = 20 × 6 = 120 ounces.
Weight of packs of fruit snacks left over in the box = 48 ounces
Weight of packs of fruit snacks students ate = Weight of 20 pack of fruit snacks + Weight of packs of fruit snacks left over in the box
= 120 – 48
= 72 ounces.

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 3 Homework Answer Key

Use the RDW process to solve the problems below. Use a letter to represent the unknown in each problem.
Question 1.
Jerry pours 86 milliliters of water into 8 tiny beakers. He measures an equal amount of water into the first 7 beakers. He pours the remaining water into the eighth beaker. It measures 16 milliliters. How many milliliters of water are in each of the first 7 beakers?

Answer:
Amount of water he pours equally into the each first seven beakers = 10 milliliters.

Explanation:
Amount of water Jerry pours into 8 tiny beakers = 86 milliliters
Amount of water he pours into the eighth beaker = 16 milliliters
Amount of water he pours  into the first seven beakers = Amount of water Jerry pours into 8 tiny beakers  – Amount of water he pours into the eighth beaker
= 86 – 16
= 70 milliliters.
Number of first beakers = 7
Amount of water he pours equally into the each first seven beakers = Amount of water he pours  into the first seven beakers  ÷ Number of beakers
= 70 ÷ 7
= 10 milliliters.

Question 2.
Mr. Chavez’s third graders go to gym class at 11:15. Students rotate through three activities for 8 minutes each. Lunch begins at 12:00. How many minutes are there between the end of gym activities and the beginning of lunch?

Answer:
Time taken between the end of gym activities and the beginning of lunch = 21 minutes.

Explanation:
Time of Mr. Chavez’s third graders go to gym class = 11:15
Time of they Lunch begins = 12:00
Students rotate through three activities for 8 minutes each.
=> Time taken for three activities = 8 × 3 = 24 minutes.
Time totally taken for the gym activities = Time of Mr. Chavez’s third graders go to gym class + Time taken for three activities
= 11:15 + 24
= 11:39.
Time taken between the end of gym activities and the beginning of lunch =  Time of they Lunch begins  – Time totally taken for the gym activities
=12:00 – 11.39
= 21 minutes.

Question 3.
A box contains 100 pens. In each box there are 38 black pens and 42 blue pens. The rest are green pens. Mr. Cane buys 6 boxes of pens. How many green pens does he have in total?

Answer:
Number of Green pens Mr. Cane  has = 120.

Explanation:
Number of pens a box contains = 100
Number of Black pens present in each box = 38
Number of Blue pens present in each box = 42
Number of Green pens present in each box = Number of pens a box contains  – ( Number of Black pens present in each + Number of Blue pens present in each box )
= 100 – ( 38 + 42)
= 100 – 80
= 20.
Number of boxes of pens Mr. Cane buys = 6
Number of Green pens Mr. Cane  has = Number of Green pens present in each box  × Number of boxes of pens Mr. Cane buys
= 20 × 6
= 120.

Question 4.
Greg has $56. Tom has $17 more than Greg. Jason has $8 less than Tom.
a. How much money does Jason have?
b. How much money do the 3 boys have in total?

Answer:
a. Amount of money Jason has = $65.
b. Total amount of money 3 boys have =  $194.

Explanation:
Amount of money Greg has = $56
Tom has $17 more than Greg.
=> Amount of money Tom has = Amount of money Greg has + $17
= $56 + $17
= $73.
a)    Jason has $8 less than Tom.
=> Amount of money Jason has = Amount of money Tom has  – $8
= $73 – $8
= $65.

b)    Amount of money Greg has = $56
Amount of money Tom has = $73
Amount of money Jason has = $65.
Total amount of money 3 boys have = Amount of money Greg has + Amount of money Tom has + Amount of money Jason has
= $56 + $73 + $65
= $129 + $ 65
= $194.

Question 5.
Laura cuts 64 inches of ribbon into two parts and gives her mom one part. Laura’s part is 28 inches long. Her mom cuts her ribbon into 6 equal pieces. How long is one of her mom’s pieces of ribbon?

Answer:
Length of the each pieces her moms cut her ribbon part  = 6 inches.

Explanation:
Total Length of ribbon Laura has = 64 inches
Length of Ribbon Laura’s part = 28 inches
Length of Ribbon Laura’s mom’s part = Total Length of ribbon Laura has – Length of Ribbon Laura’s part
= 64 – 28
= 36
Number of equal pieces her moms cut her ribbon part = 6
Length of the each pieces her moms cut her ribbon part  = Length of Ribbon Laura’s mom’s part ÷ Number of equal pieces her moms cut her ribbon part
= 36 ÷ 6
= 6 inches.

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 4 Answer Key

Engage NY Eureka Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 4 Answer Key

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Answer Key

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 4 Pattern Sheet Answer Key

Multiply.
Engage NY Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 4 Pattern Set Answer Key ps 1
multiply by 4 (6─10)

Answer:
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-4-Answer-Key-Pattern-Sheet-Answer-Key

Explanation:
4 × 1 = 4
4 × 2 = 8
4 × 3 = 12
4 × 4 = 16
4 × 5 = 20
4 × 6 = 24
4 × 7 = 28
4 × 8 = 32
4 × 9 = 36
4 × 10 = 40.

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 4 Problem Set Answer Key

Question 1.
Cut out all the polygons (A–L) in the Template. Then, use the polygons to complete the following chart.
Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 4 Problem Set Answer Key pr 1.1
Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 4 Problem Set Answer Key pr 1.2

Answer:
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-3-Answer-Key-Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 4 Problem Set Answer Key-1

Explanation:

Question 2.
Write the letters of the polygons that are quadrilaterals. Explain how you know these polygons are quadrilaterals.
Answer:
ABCD are the letters of the polygons that are quadrilaterals because they are straight and are four-sided figure.

Explanation:
Quadrilateral means a four-sided figure.
A polygon is any shape made up of straight lines that can be drawn on a flat surface, like a piece of paper.

 

Question 3.
Sketch a polygon below from the group that has 2 sets of parallel sides. Trace 1 pair of parallel sides red. Trace the other pair of parallel sides blue. What makes parallel sides different from sides that are not parallel?
Answer:
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-3-Answer-Key-Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 4 Problem Set Answer Key.3

Explanation:
Parallel sides are different from sides that are not parallel because the parallel sides will never meet each other whereas sides meet each other.

 

Question 4.
Draw a diagonal line from one corner to the opposite corner of each polygon you drew in the chart using a straight edge. What new polygon(s) did you make by drawing the diagonal lines?
Answer:
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-3-Answer-Key-Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 4 Problem Set Answer Key-4

 

Explanation:
By drawing the diagonal lines, to the polygons in the chart it is observed that the figures are divided into two-semi part polygons.

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 4 Exit Ticket Answer Key

List as many attributes as you can to describe each polygon below.
Question 1.
Engage NY Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 4 Exit Ticket Answer Key t 1
Answer:
Attributes of the given polygon are as below:
Square.
Two sets parallel sides.
Polygon with all equal sides.
4 right angles.
Rhombus.

Question 2.
Engage NY Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 4 Exit Ticket Answer Key t 2
Answer:
Attributes of the given polygon are as below:
1 sets of parallel sides.
Quadrilateral.
4 Angles.
2 sets of sides.

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 4 Homework Answer Key

Question 1.
Complete the chart by answering true or false.
Eureka Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 4 Homework Answer Key h 1
Eureka Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 4 Homework Answer Key h 2
Answer:
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-3-Answer-Key-Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 4 Homework Answer Key..

 

Question 2.
a. Each quadrilateral below has at least 1 set of parallel sides. Trace each set of parallel sides with a colored pencil.
Eureka Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 4 Homework Answer Key h 3
Answer:
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-3-Answer-Key-Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 4 Homework Answer Key-2

b. Using a straightedge, sketch a different quadrilateral with at least 1 set of parallel sides.
Answer:
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-3-Answer-Key-Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 4 Homework Answer Key-2b
Explanation:
Answers may differ.
WXYZ is a polygon with four sides.
WXYZ is a Quadrilateral.

 

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 5 Answer Key

Engage NY Eureka Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 5 Answer Key

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Answer Key

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 5 Pattern Sheet Answer Key

Multiply.
Engage NY Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 5 Pattern Set Answer Key p 1
multiply by 5 (1─5)
Answer:

Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-5-Answer-Key-Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 5 Pattern Sheet Answer Key

Explanation:
5  × 1 = 5
5  ×  2 = 10
5  × 4 = 20
5  ×  5 = 25.

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 5 Problem Set Answer Key

Question 1.
Cut out all the polygons (M–X) in the Template. Then, use the polygons to complete the following chart.
Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 5 Problem Set Answer Key pr 1
Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 5 Problem Set Answer Key pr 2
Answer:
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-5-Answer-Key-Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 5 Problem Set Answer Key-1

 

Question 2.
Compare Polygon M and Polygon X. What is the same? What is different?
Answer:
Polygon M and Polygon X are same as they have same number of sides and are different has they does not same angles.

Explanation:
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-5-Answer-Key-shapeX

 

Question 3.
Jenny says, “Polygon N, Polygon R, and Polygon S are all regular quadrilaterals!” Is she correct? Why or why not?
Answer:
No, Jenny is not correct because polygon N, polygon R nor polygon S are not having four equal sides nor 4 equal angles to be said as regular quadrilaterals.

Explanation:
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-5-Answer-Key-shapeN
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-5-Answer-Key-shapeREngage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-5-Answer-Key-shapeS

 

Question 4.
“I have six equal sides and six equal angles. I have three sets of parallel lines. I have no right angles.”
a. Write the letter and the name of the polygon described above.
b. Estimate to draw the same type of polygon as in part (a), but with no equal sides.
Answer:
a) ‘I have six equal sides and six equal angles. I have three sets of parallel lines. I have no right angles.”
Polygon U is said to be a regular hexagon.

Explanation:
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-1-Answer-Key-Eureka Math 3 Module 7 Lesson 1 Pattern Sheet Answer Key-4

b) Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-5-Answer-Key-Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 5 Problem Set Answer Key-4b

Explanation:
In part a, the figure is having six sides of equal length of sides.
The figure drawn, is having six sides of different lengths of sides.

 

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 5 Exit Ticket Answer Key

Jonah draws the polygon below. Use your ruler and right angle tool to measure his polygon. Then, answer the questions below.
Engage NY Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 5 Exit Ticket Answer Key t 1

Question 1.
Is Jonah’s polygon a regular polygon? Explain how you know.
Answer:
No, its not a regular polygon because does not have all sides equal nor the angles are same.

Explanation:
A polygon having equal sides and equal angles is called as a regular polygon.

Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-5-Answer-Key-Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 5 Exit Ticket Answer Key-1

 

Question 2.
How many right angles does his polygon have? Circle the right angles on his polygon.
Answer:
The polygon given in the figure has 2 right angles.

Explanation:
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-5-Answer-Key-Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 5 Exit Ticket Answer Key-2

 

Question 3.
How many sets of parallel lines does his polygon have?
Answer:
The polygon given in the figure has 1 set of parallel lines.

Explanation:

Engage NY Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 5 Exit Ticket Answer Key t 1

Question 4.
What is the name of Jonah’s polygon?
Answer:
The name of Jonah’s polygon is Pentagon.

Explanation:
Jonah’s figure is having five sides. A figure with five sides is called as Pentagon.

Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 5 Homework Answer Key

Question 1.
Match the polygons with their appropriate clouds. A polygon can match to more than 1 cloud.
Eureka Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 5 Homework Answer Key h 1
Eureka Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 5 Homework Answer Key h 2
Answer:
Engage-NY-Eureka-Math-3rd-Grade-Module-7-Lesson-5-Answer-Key-Eureka Math Grade 3 Module 7 Lesson 5 Homework Answer Key-1
Explanation:
Every figure has its own attributes, which are different.
Every polygon is matched according to its attributes.

 

Question 2.
The two polygons below are regular polygons. How are these polygons the same? How are they different?
Eureka Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 5 Homework Answer Key h 3
Answer:
They are same because each polygon drawn is made up of same sides.
They are different because they have different angles.

Explanation:
Eureka Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 5 Homework Answer Key h 3

Given figures are Hexagon and Triangle.

 

Question 4.
Lucia drew the polygons below. Are any of the polygons she drew regular polygons? Explain how you know.
Eureka Math 3rd Grade Module 7 Lesson 5 Homework Answer Key h 4
Answer:
Figure Pentagon which Lucia drawn is regular polygon because a regular polygon is a polygon that is equiangular (all angles are equal in measure) and equilateral (all sides have the same length).

Explanation:
Figures given are different in terms of sides and angles.
First and Second figures drawn are having different lengths of sides.
Third figure drawn is having same sides of equal lengths. It is said as regular polygon.

 

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes

Big Ideas Math Book Answers has created a sequence of lessons in all the chapters. Get Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes on this. This pdf link will make understanding concepts of 3-Dimensional shapes so easy. The 3-D shapes are cone, cylinder, cube, cuboid, etc. So following the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes is necessary to get notified of the topics. So it will be easy for you to understand the concepts behind each and every lesson.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes

The topics covered in this chapter are Vocabulary, Two- and Three-Dimensional Shapes, Cubes and Spheres etc. So, Download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes PDF for free. For more practice questions simply go to the performance task and cumulative practice which is given at the end of the chapter. Just click on the below-attached links and start your preparation from now.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Two- and Three-Dimensional Shapes

Lesson: 2 Describe Three-Dimensional Shapes

Lesson: 3 Cubes and Spheres

Lesson: 4 Cones and Cylinders

Lesson: 5 Build Three-Dimensional Shapes

Lesson: 6 Positions of Solid Shapes

Chapter 12: Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes

Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes Vocabulary

Directions:
Circle each can. Draw a square around each box. Count and write how many of each two-dimensional shape you draw.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes v 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Vocabulary

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes v 2

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes v 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Vocabulary-1

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes v 6

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes v 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Vocabulary-2

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes v 10

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes v 12

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Vocabulary-3

Lesson 12.1 Two- and Three-Dimensional Shapes

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Circle any triangles, rectangles, squares, hexagons, and circles you see in the picture. Use another color to circle any objects in the picture that match the blue shapes shown. Tell what you notice about each shape.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.1 1
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.1-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Explore-and-Grow
two-dimensional
rectangle
circle
triangle
hexagon
Total11 shapes
three-dimensional
cylinder
sphere
cube
cone
Total 8 shapes
Explanation:
A two-dimensional shape is a shape that has length and width but no depth. … A circle is one example of a two-dimensional shape. Example Two. A rectangle is another example of a two-dimensional shape.

Triangles, Rectangles, Squares, Hexagons, and Circles all these shapes are all 2-D shapes.
A three-dimensional shape can be defined as a solid figure or an object or shape that has three dimensions – length, width, and height. Unlike two-dimensional shapes, three-dimensional shapes have thickness or depth.
All the objects in the picture represent the 3-D shapes so, they are circled with a different color.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Circle any three-dimensional shapes. Draw rectangles around any two-dimensional shapes. Tell why your answers are correct.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.1 2

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.1 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.1-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Think-and-Grow
two-dimensional
rectangle
circle
three-dimensional
cylinder
sphere
cuboid
cone
Explanation:
A two-dimensional shape is a shape that has length and width but no depth.
Examples: Circle, Triangle, Rectangle, Squares, Hexagons.
2-D shapes have been shaped with rectangle
A three-dimensional shape can be defined as a solid figure or an object or shape that has three dimensions – length, width and height. Unlike two-dimensional shapes, three-dimensional shapes have thickness or depth.
Examples: Sphere, Torus, Cylinder, Cone, Cube, Cuboid, Triangular Pyramid, Square Pyramid.
3-D shapes have been shaped with circle.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 4 Circle any three-dimensional shapes. Draw rectangles around any two-dimensional shapes. Tell why your answers are correct.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.1 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.1-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Directions-Question-1
two-dimensional
rectangle
circle
three-dimensional
cylinder
cube
Explanation:
A two-dimensional shape is a shape that has length and width but no depth.
Examples: Circle, Triangle, Rectangle, Squares, Hexagons.
2-D shapes have been shaped with rectangles.
A three-dimensional shape can be defined as a solid figure or an object or shape that has three dimensions – length, width and height. Unlike two-dimensional shapes, three-dimensional shapes have thickness or depth.
Examples: Sphere, Torus, Cylinder, Cone, Cube, Cuboid, Triangular Pyramid, Square Pyramid.
3-D shapes have been shaped with circle.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.1 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.1-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Directions-Question-2
two-dimensional
circle
square
hexagon
three-dimensional
sphere
Explanation:
A two-dimensional shape is a shape that has length and width but no depth.
Examples: Circle, Triangle, Rectangle, Squares, Hexagons.
2-D shapes have been shaped with rectangle.
A three-dimensional shape can be defined as a solid figure or an object or shape that has three dimensions – length, width and height. Unlike two-dimensional shapes, three-dimensional shapes have thickness or depth.
Examples: Sphere, Torus, Cylinder, Cone, Cube, Cuboid, Triangular Pyramid, Square Pyramid.
3-D shapes have been shaped with circle.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.1 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.1-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Directions-Question-3
two-dimensional
Triangle
three-dimensional
Cuboid
Triangle prism
Cone
Explanation:
A two-dimensional shape is a shape that has length and width but no depth.
Examples: Circle, Triangle, Rectangle, Squares, Hexagons.
2-D shapes have been shaped with rectangle.
A three-dimensional shape can be defined as a solid figure or an object or shape that has three dimensions – length, width and height. Unlike two-dimensional shapes, three-dimensional shapes have thickness or depth.
Examples: Sphere, Torus, Cylinder, Cone, Cube, Cuboid, Triangular Pyramid, Square Pyramid.
3-D shapes have been shaped with circle.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.1 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.1-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Directions-Question-4
two-dimensional
0
three-dimensional
Cylinder
Sphere
Cone

Explanation:
A two-dimensional shape is a shape that has length and width but no depth.
Examples: Circle, Triangle, Rectangle, Squares, Hexagons.
2-D shapes have been shaped with rectangle.
A three-dimensional shape can be defined as a solid figure or an object or shape that has three dimensions – length, width and height. Unlike two-dimensional shapes, three-dimensional shapes have thickness or depth.
Examples: Sphere, Torus, Cylinder, Cone, Cube, Cuboid, Triangular Pyramid, Square Pyramid.
3-D shapes have been shaped with circle.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Circle any shapes in the picture that are solids. Draw rectangles around any shapes in the picture that are flats. Count and write how many solids and flats you find.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.1 8
three-Dimensional
________
– – – – – – – –
________

two-dimensional
________
– – – – – – – –
________

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.1-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Think-and-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life

two-dimensional
Rectangles
Total 7 flat surfaces
three-dimensional
Cubes
Sphere
Cone
Cylinder
Total 8 solids
Explanation:
Solid figures are three-dimensional. A face is a flat surface of a solid.

Two- and Three-Dimensional Shapes Homework & Practice 12.1

Directions:
1 – 3 Circle any three-dimensional shapes. Draw rectangles around any two-dimensional shapes. Tell why your answers are correct.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.1 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Homework -Practice-12.1-Question-1
two-dimensional
Triangle
Square
three-dimensional
Cylinder
Sphere
Explanation:
A two-dimensional shape is a shape that has length and width but no depth.
Examples: Circle, Triangle, Rectangle, Squares, Hexagons.
2-D shapes have been shaped with rectangle.
A three-dimensional shape can be defined as a solid figure or an object or shape that has three dimensions – length, width and height. Unlike two-dimensional shapes, three-dimensional shapes have thickness or depth.
Examples: Sphere, Torus, Cylinder, Cone, Cube, Cuboid, Triangular Pyramid, Square Pyramid.
3-D shapes have been shaped with circle.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.1 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Homework -Practice-12.1-Question-2
two-dimensional
Hexagon
Circle
three-dimensional
Cube
Cone
Explanation:
A two-dimensional shape is a shape that has length and width but no depth.
Examples: Circle, Triangle, Rectangle, Squares, Hexagons.
2-D shapes have been shaped with rectangle.
A three-dimensional shape can be defined as a solid figure or an object or shape that has three dimensions – length, width and height. Unlike two-dimensional shapes, three-dimensional shapes have thickness or depth.
Examples: Sphere, Torus, Cylinder, Cone, Cube, Cuboid, Triangular Pyramid, Square Pyramid.
3-D shapes have been shaped with circle.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.1 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Homework -Practice-12.1-Question-3
two-dimensional
Rectangle
Square
three-dimensional
Cube
Explanation:
A two-dimensional shape is a shape that has length and width but no depth.
Examples: Circle, Triangle, Rectangle, Squares, Hexagons.
2-D shapes have been shaped with rectangle.
A three-dimensional shape can be defined as a solid figure or an object or shape that has three dimensions – length, width and height. Unlike two-dimensional shapes, three-dimensional shapes have thickness or depth.
Examples: Sphere, Torus, Cylinder, Cone, Cube, Cuboid, Triangular Pyramid, Square Pyramid.
3-D shapes have been shaped with circle.

Directions:
4 and 5 Circle any three-dimensional shapes. Draw rectangles around any two-dimensional shapes. Tell why your answers are correct. 6 Circle any three-dimensional shapes in the picture. Count and write the number. Draw rectangles around any two-dimensional shapes in the picture. Count and write the number.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.1 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Homework -Practice-12.1-Question-4
two-dimensional
Circle
three-dimensional
Cylinder
Sphere
Cone
Explanation:
A two-dimensional shape is a shape that has length and width but no depth.
Examples: Circle, Triangle, Rectangle, Squares, Hexagons.
2-D shapes have been shaped with rectangle.
A three-dimensional shape can be defined as a solid figure or an object or shape that has three dimensions – length, width and height. Unlike two-dimensional shapes, three-dimensional shapes have thickness or depth.
Examples: Sphere, Torus, Cylinder, Cone, Cube, Cuboid, Triangular Pyramid, Square Pyramid.
3-D shapes have been shaped with circle.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.1 13
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Homework -Practice-12.1-Question-5
two-dimensional
Rectangle
Circle
Triangle
three-dimensional
Cube
Explanation:
A two-dimensional shape is a shape that has length and width but no depth.
Examples: Circle, Triangle, Rectangle, Squares, Hexagons.
2-D shapes have been shaped with rectangle.
A three-dimensional shape can be defined as a solid figure or an object or shape that has three dimensions – length, width and height. Unlike two-dimensional shapes, three-dimensional shapes have thickness or depth.
Examples: Sphere, Torus, Cylinder, Cone, Cube, Cuboid, Triangular Pyramid, Square Pyramid.
3-D shapes have been shaped with circle.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.1 14
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Homework -Practice-12.1-Question-6
Explanation:
A two-dimensional shape is a shape that has length and width but no depth.
Examples: Circle, Triangle, Rectangle, Squares, Hexagons.
2-D shapes have been shaped with rectangle.
A three-dimensional shape can be defined as a solid figure or an object or shape that has three dimensions – length, width and height. Unlike two-dimensional shapes, three-dimensional shapes have thickness or depth.
Examples: Sphere, Torus, Cylinder, Cone, Cube, Cuboid, Triangular Pyramid, Square Pyramid.
3-D shapes have been shaped with circle.

Lesson 12.2 Describe Three-Dimensional Shapes

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Cut out the Roll, Stack, Slide Sort Cards. Sort the cards into the categories shown.

rolls

stacks

slides

Answer:

Think and Grow

Directions:

  • Look at the solid shape on the left that rolls. Circle the other solid shapes that roll.
  • Look at the solid shapes on the left that stack. Circle the other solid shapes that stack.
  • Look at the solid shape on the left that slides. Circle the other solid shapes that slide.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.2 1

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.2 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.2-Describe-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Explore-and-Grow
Explanation:
Solid shapes that can roll are circled with Brown.
Solid shapes that can slide are circled with Yellow.
Solid shapes that can stack are circled with Blue.

The object which has a flat surface can slide. Example Rectangle, cube, cuboid, cylinder shapes.
Shapes with a flat face can stack. Example Cube, Rectangle, Cylinder shape.
Shapes with a curved face can roll. Example sphere , cylinder , cone shape.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Look at the solid shape on the left that rolls. Circle the other solid shapes that roll. 2 Circle the solid shapes that roll and slide. 3 Circle the solid shapes that stack and slide. 4 Circle the solid shape that does not stack or slide.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.2 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.2-Describe-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-1

Given:
The cylinder can roll,roll and slide, stack and slide
The cube can slide and stack.
The sphere can only roll.

Explanation:
The object which has a flat surface can slide. Example Rectangle, cube, cuboid, cylinder shapes.
Shapes with a flat face can stack. Example Cube, Rectangle, Cylinder shape.
Shapes with a curved face can roll. Example sphere, cylinder, cone shape.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.2 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.2-Describe-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-2
Given:
The cylinder can roll, stack and slide, roll and slide
Cone can roll, roll and slide.
The cube can slide and stack.
Explanation:
Solid shapes that can roll are circled with Brown.
Solid shapes that can slide are circled with Yellow.
Solid shapes that can stack are circled with Blue.

The object which has a flat surface can slide. Example Rectangle, cube, cuboid, cylinder shapes.
Shapes with a flat face can stack. Example Cube, Rectangle, Cylinder shape.
Shapes with a curved face can roll. Example sphere, cylinder, cone shape.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.2 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.2-Describe-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-3
Given:
A ball that represents a Sphere. The ball can only roll.
A wooden log which represent cylinder. Log can roll, roll and slide, stack and slide.
The wooden box which represents cube. The box can slide and stack.
Hat represent cone. hat can roll, roll and slide.

Explanation:
Solid shapes that can roll are circled with Brown.
Solid shapes that can slide are circled with Yellow.
Solid shapes that can stack are circled with Blue.
The object which has a flat surface can slide. Example Rectangle, cube, cuboid, cylinder shapes.
Shapes with a flat face can stack. Example Cube, Rectangle, Cylinder shape.
Shapes with a curved face can roll. Example sphere, cylinder, cone shape.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.2 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.2-Describe-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-4
Given:
The ball which represents Sphere. The ball can only roll.
Glue stick which represents cylinder. Glue stick can roll,roll and slide, stack and slide.
The box which represents cube. Box can slide and stack.
Birthday Hat represents cone. Birthday hat can roll, roll and slide.

Explanation:
Solid shapes that can roll are circled with Brown.
Solid shapes that can slide are circled with Yellow.
Solid shapes that can stack are circled with Blue.
The object which has a flat surface can slide. Example Rectangle, cube, cuboid, cylinder shapes.
Shapes with a flat face can stack. Example Cube, Rectangle, Cylinder shape.
Shapes with a curved face can roll. Example sphere, cylinder, cone shape.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
You stack the 3 objects shown. Write 1 below the object you place at the bottom of the stack, write 2 below the object you stack next, and write 3 below the object you stack last. Tell why you chose this order.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.2 7

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.2 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.2-Describe-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Think-and-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life

Given:
cylinder shaped Oats box and piggy bank. Oats box and piggy bank can roll, roll and slide, stack and slide.
cube shaped Cardboard box and a Wooden box . A cardboard box and a Wooden Box can slide and stack.
cone shaped Party hats. Party hats can roll, roll and slide.

Explanation:
The object which has a flat surface can slide. Example Rectangle, cube, cuboid, cylinder shapes.
Shapes with a flat face can stack. Example Cube, Rectangle, Cylinder shape.
Shapes with a curved face can roll. Example sphere , cylinder , cone shape.

Describe Three-Dimensional Shapes Homework & Practice 12.2

Directions:
1 Look at the solid shapes on the left that stack. Circle the other solid shapes that stack. 2 Look at the solid shape on the left that rolls. Circle the other solid shapes that roll. 3 Look at the solid shape on the left that slides. Circle the other solid shapes that slide.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.2 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Describe-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Homework-Practice-12.2-Question-1
Explanation:
Shapes with a flat face can stack. Example Cube, Rectangle, Cylinder shape.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.2 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Describe-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Homework-Practice-12.2-Question-2
Explanation:
Shapes with a curved face can roll. Example sphere, cylinder, cone shape.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.2 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Describe-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Homework-Practice-12.2-Question-3
Explanation:
The object which has a flat surface can slide. Example Rectangle, cube, cuboid, cylinder shapes.

Directions:
4 Circle the solid shapes that roll and stack. 5 Circle the solid shapes that stack and slide. 6 Circle the solid shape that does not roll. 7 You stack the 3 objects shown. Write 1 below the object you place at the bottom of the stack, write 2 below the object you stack next, and write 3 below the object you stack last. Tell why you chose this order.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.2 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Describe-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Homework-Practice-12.2-Question-4
Cylinder shaped objects can roll and slide.

Explanation:
Shapes with a flat face can stack. Example Cube, Rectangle, Cylinder shape.
Shapes with a curved face can roll. Example sphere, cylinder, cone shape.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.2 13
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Describe-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Homework-Practice-12.2-Question-5

Given:
Cube shaped objects can slide and stake.
Cylinder shaped objects can roll and slide.

Explanation:
The object which has a flat surface can slide. Example Rectangle, cube, cuboid, cylinder shapes.
Shapes with a flat face can stack. Example Cube, Rectangle, Cylinder shape.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.2 14
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Describe-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Homework-Practice-12.2-Question-6
Given:
Cube shaped objects can slide and stake. Cube shaped solids that does not roll.

Explanation:
The object which has a flat surface can slide. Example Rectangle, cube, cuboid, cylinder shapes.
Shapes with a flat face can stack. Example Cube, Rectangle, Cylinder shape.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.2 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Describe-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Homework-Practice-12.2-Question-7

Explanation:
In the figure given we have 2 cylinder shaped objects and 1 cone shaped object.
Cylinders can stack, slide and roll. So, I used both the cylinder shaped objects at the bottom.
Cone can roll and slide. As cones shaped figures can not be stacked I used at the top.

Lesson 12.3 Cubes and Spheres

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Cut out the Cube and Sphere Sort Cards. Sort the cards into the categories shown.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 1
Answer:

Think and Grow

Directions:
Circle the cube. Draw a rectangle around the sphere. Tell why your answers are correct.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 2

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 3

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.3-Cubes-and-Spheres-Think-and-Grow
Explanation:
A sphere is a round, ball-shaped solid. It has one continuous surface with no edges or vertices.
A cube is a region of space formed by six identical square faces joined along their edges.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Circle the cube. Draw a rectangle around the sphere. Tell why your answers are correct. 2 – 4 Circle any object that looks like a cube. Draw a rectangle around any object that looks like a sphere. Tell why your answers are correct.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.3-Cubes-and-Spheres-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-1

Explanation:
A sphere is a round, ball-shaped solid. It has one continuous surface with no edges or vertices.
A cube is a region of space formed by six identical square faces joined along their edges.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.3-Cubes-and-Spheres-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-2
Explanation:
A sphere is a round, ball-shaped solid. It has one continuous surface with no edges or vertices.
A cube is a region of space formed by six identical square faces joined along their edges.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.3-Cubes-and-Spheres-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-3
Explanation:
A sphere is a round, ball-shaped solid. It has one continuous surface with no edges or vertices.
A cube is a region of space formed by six identical square faces joined along their edges.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.3-Cubes-and-Spheres-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-4
Explanation:
A sphere is a round, ball-shaped solid. It has one continuous surface with no edges or vertices.
A cube is a region of space formed by six identical square faces joined along their edges.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Use Make a Cube to build your own number cube. Draw the shape of the flat surfaces of your cube. Count and write the number of flat surfaces.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 9
________
– – – – – – – –
________ flat surfaces
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes- Lesson-12.3-Cubes-and-Spheres- Think-and-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life

Cubes and Spheres Homework & Practice 12.3

Directions:
1 – 3 Circle the cube. Draw a rectangle around the sphere. Tell why your answers are correct.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Cubes-and-Spheres-Homework-&-Practice-12.3-Question-1
Explanation:
A sphere is a round, ball-shaped solid. It has one continuous surface with no edges or vertices.
A cube is a region of space formed by six identical square faces joined along their edges

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Cubes-and-Spheres-Homework-&-Practice-12.3-Question-2
Explanation:
A sphere is a round, ball-shaped solid. It has one continuous surface with no edges or vertices.
A cube is a region of space formed by six identical square faces joined along their edges

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Cubes-and-Spheres-Homework-&-Practice-12.3-Question-3
Explanation:
A sphere is a round, ball-shaped solid. It has one continuous surface with no edges or vertices.
A cube is a region of space formed by six identical square faces joined along their edges

Directions:
4 – 6 Circle any object that looks like a cube. Draw a rectangle around any object that looks like a sphere. Tell why your answers are correct. 7 Draw the shape of the flat surfaces of a die. Count and write the number of flat surfaces.

Question 4.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 13
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Cubes-and-Spheres-Homework-&-Practice-12.3-Question-4
Explanation:
A sphere is a round, ball-shaped solid. It has one continuous surface with no edges or vertices.
A cube is a region of space formed by six identical square faces joined along their edges

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 14
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Cubes-and-Spheres-Homework-&-Practice-12.3-Question-5
Explanation:
A sphere is a round, ball-shaped solid. It has one continuous surface with no edges or vertices.
A cube is a region of space formed by six identical square faces joined along their edges

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Cubes-and-Spheres-Homework-&-Practice-12.3-Question-6
Explanation:
A sphere is a round, ball-shaped solid. It has one continuous surface with no edges or vertices.
A cube is a region of space formed by six identical square faces joined along their edges.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.3 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Cubes-and-Spheres-Homework-&-Practice-12.3-Question-7
Explanation:
Dice is similar to a cube.
A cube is a region of space formed by six identical square faces joined along their edges.

Lesson 12.4 Cones and Cylinders

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Cut out the Cone and Cylinder Sort Cards. Sort the cards into the categories shown.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 1
Answer:

Think and Grow

Directions:
Circle the cone. Draw a rectangle around the cylinder. Tell why your answers are correct.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 2

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 3

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.4-Cones-and-Cylinders-Think-and-Grow
Explanation:
A Cone is a distinctive three-dimensional geometric figure that has a flat surface and a curved surface, pointed towards the top. The pointed end of the cone is called the apex, whereas the flat surface is called the base.

A Cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that holds two parallel bases joined by a curved surface, at a fixed distance.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Circle the cone. Draw a rectangle around the cylinder. Tell why your answers are correct. 2 – 4 Circle any object that looks like a cone. Draw a rectangle around any object that looks like a cylinder. Tell why your answers are correct.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.4-Cones-and-Cylinders-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-1

Explanation:
A Cone is a distinctive three-dimensional geometric figure that has a flat surface and a curved surface, pointed towards the top. The pointed end of the cone is called the apex, whereas the flat surface is called the base.

A Cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that holds two parallel bases joined by a curved surface, at a fixed distance.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.4-Cones-and-Cylinders-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-2

Explanation:
A Cone is a distinctive three-dimensional geometric figure that has a flat surface and a curved surface, pointed towards the top. The pointed end of the cone is called the apex, whereas the flat surface is called the base.

A Cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that holds two parallel bases joined by a curved surface, at a fixed distance.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.4-Cones-and-Cylinders-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-3

Explanation:
A Cone is a distinctive three-dimensional geometric figure that has a flat surface and a curved surface, pointed towards the top. The pointed end of the cone is called the apex, whereas the flat surface is called the base.

A Cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that holds two parallel bases joined by a curved surface, at a fixed distance.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.4-Cones-and-Cylinders-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-4

Explanation:
A Cone is a distinctive three-dimensional geometric figure that has a flat surface and a curved surface, pointed towards the top. The pointed end of the cone is called the apex, whereas the flat surface is called the base.

A Cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that holds two parallel bases joined by a curved surface, at a fixed distance.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Use Make a Cylinder to build a can of vegetables. Draw the shape of the flat surfaces of your can. Count and write the number of flat surfaces.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 9
__________
– – – – – – – – – –
__________ flat surfaces
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Lesson-12.4-Cones-and-Cylinders-Think-and-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life

Cones and Cylinders Homework & Practice 12.4

Directions:
1 – 3 Circle the cone. Draw a rectangle around the cylinder. Tell why your answers are correct.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Cones-and-Cylinders-Homework-&-Practice-12.4- Directions-Question-1

Explanation:
A Cone is a distinctive three-dimensional geometric figure that has a flat surface and a curved surface, pointed towards the top. The pointed end of the cone is called the apex, whereas the flat surface is called the base.

A Cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that holds two parallel bases joined by a curved surface, at a fixed distance.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Cones-and-Cylinders-Homework-&-Practice-12.4- Directions-Question-2

Explanation:
A Cone is a distinctive three-dimensional geometric figure that has a flat surface and a curved surface, pointed towards the top. The pointed end of the cone is called the apex, whereas the flat surface is called the base.

A Cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that holds two parallel bases joined by a curved surface, at a fixed distance.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Cones-and-Cylinders-Homework-&-Practice-12.4- Directions-Question-3

Explanation:
A Cone is a distinctive three-dimensional geometric figure that has a flat surface and a curved surface, pointed towards the top. The pointed end of the cone is called the apex, whereas the flat surface is called the base.

A Cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that holds two parallel bases joined by a curved surface, at a fixed distance.

Directions:
4 – 6 Circle any object that looks like a cone. Draw a rectangle around any object that looks like a cylinder. Tell why your answers are correct. 7 Draw the shape of the flat surface of a cone. Count and write the number of flat surfaces.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 13
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Cones-and-Cylinders-Homework-&-Practice-12.4- Directions-Question-4

Explanation:
A Cone is a distinctive three-dimensional geometric figure that has a flat surface and a curved surface, pointed towards the top. The pointed end of the cone is called the apex, whereas the flat surface is called the base.

A Cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that holds two parallel bases joined by a curved surface, at a fixed distance.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 14
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Cones-and-Cylinders-Homework-&-Practice-12.4- Directions-Question-5

Explanation:
A Cone is a distinctive three-dimensional geometric figure that has a flat surface and a curved surface, pointed towards the top. The pointed end of the cone is called the apex, whereas the flat surface is called the base.

A Cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that holds two parallel bases joined by a curved surface, at a fixed distance.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Cones-and-Cylinders-Homework-&-Practice-12.4- Directions-Question-6

Explanation:
A Cone is a distinctive three-dimensional geometric figure that has a flat surface and a curved surface, pointed towards the top. The pointed end of the cone is called the apex, whereas the flat surface is called the base.

A Cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that holds two parallel bases joined by a curved surface, at a fixed distance.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.4 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional Shapes-Cones-and-Cylinders-Homework-&-Practice-12.4- Directions-Question-7
Explanation:
A Cone is a distinctive three-dimensional geometric figure that has a flat surface and a curved surface, pointed towards the top. The pointed end of the cone is called the apex, whereas the flat surface is called the base.

Lesson 12.5 Build Three-Dimensional Shapes

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Use your materials to build one of the three-dimensional shapes shown. Circle the three-dimensional shape that you build.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.5 1
Answer:

Think and Grow

Directions:

  • Use your materials to build the 2 shapes shown.
  • Connect the 2 shapes that you build, as shown.
  • Tell what solid shape you build.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.5 2
Answer:
Cube

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 3 Use your materials to build the solid shape shown. 4 Use your materials to build a solid shape that has 6 square, flat surfaces. Circle the shape you build.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.5 3
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.5 4
Answer:

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.5 5
Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.5 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.5-Build-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Apply-Grow-Question-1-4

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:

  • Use your materials to build the castle tower in the picture.
  • Circle the solid shapes that you use to build the tower.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.5 7

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.5 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.5-Build-Three-Dimensional-Shapes- Think-Grow-Modeling Real-Life
Explanation
The above figure represent a cylinder base with cone on the top.

Build Three-Dimensional Shapes Homework & Practice 12.5

Directions:
1 and 2 Use your materials to build the solid shape shown. 3 Use your materials to build the solid shape that has a curved surface and only 1 flat surface. Circle the shape you build. 4 Use your materials to build a solid shape that has no flat surfaces. Circle the shape you build.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.5 9
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.5 10
Answer:

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.5 11
Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.5 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Build-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Homework-Practice-12.5-Question-1-4

Directions:
5 Use your materials to build the totem pole in the picture. Circle the solid shapes that you use to make the totem pole.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.5 13

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Build-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Homework-Practice-12.5-Question-5

Explanation:
The above totem is a stack of three shapes. The bottom is in the shape of a Cube. The middle is in the shape of a Cylinder. The top is in the shape of a Cone.

Lesson 12.6 Positions of Solid Shapes

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Place a counter beside the bench. Place a counter in front of the tree. Place a counter next to below the stairs. Place a counter the baby swing.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.6 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.6-Positions –of-Solid-Shapes

Think and Grow

Directions:

  • Circle the object that looks like a cylinder that is next to the table. Draw a line through the object that looks like a cone that is below the shelf. Draw a rectangle around the object that looks like a sphere that is above the table.
  • Circle the object that looks like a cube that is behind the shovel. Draw a line through the object that looks like a cylinder that is beside the tree. Draw a rectangle around the object that looks like a sphere that is in front of the tree.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.6 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.6-Positions –of-Solid-Shapes-Think-and-Grow

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Circle the object that looks like a cylinder that is behind a paper cup. Draw a line through the object that looks like a sphere that is above the napkin dispenser. Draw a rectangle around the object that looks like a cone that is below a glass cup. 2 Circle the object that looks like a cone that is beside the log. Draw a line through the object that looks like a sphere that is above the log. Draw a rectangle around the object that looks like a cone that is in front of the log.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.6 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.6-Positions –of-Solid-Shapes-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.6 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.6-Positions –of-Solid-Shapes-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-Question-2

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: Use the City Scene Cards to place the objects on the picture.

  • Place a dog in front of the boy crossing the street.
  • Place a tree beside the building that looks like a cube.
  • Place an object that looks like a sphere above the buildings. Place that object behind a cloud.
  • Place an object that looks like a cone below the traffic light.
  • Place a streetlight next to the girl on the sidewalk.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.6 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.6-Positions-of-Solid-Shapes-Think-and-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life

Positions of Solid Shapes Homework & Practice 12.6

Directions:
1 Circle the object that looks like a sphere that is beside the pool. Draw a line through the object that looks like a cone that is next to the ball. Draw a rectangle around the object that looks like a cylinder that is behind the block.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.6 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Positions-of-Solid-Shapes-Homework-&-Practice-12.6-Question-1

Directions:
2 Circle the object that looks like a cone that is above the stuffed animal. Draw a line through the object that looks like a cylinder that is in front of the stuffed animal. Draw a rectangle around the object that looks like a cube that is below the stuffed animal. 3 Use the Construction Scene Cards to place the objects on the picture. Place a building below the object that is shaped like a cube. Place a tree beside that building. Place a blimp the traffic cone. Place a truck in front of the traffic cone.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.6 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Positions-of-Solid-Shapes-Homework-&-Practice-12.6-Question-2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 12.6 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Positions-Solid-Shapes-Homework-Practice-12.6-Question-3

Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes Performance Task

Directions: 1 You pick up trash in the park. Draw lines to match each item with its correct recycling bin.

  • The object that rolls but does not stack that is in front of the lamppost goes in the yellow bin.
  • The object below the bench that does not roll goes in the blue bin.
  • The object that has 1 flat surface that is behind an object that looks like a cylinder goes in the green bin.
  • The object that stacks, slides, and rolls that are above an object that looks like a cube goes in the orange bin.
  • The object in front of the tree that rolls and has 2 flat surfaces goes in the green bin.
  • The object next to the tree that stacks and slides and has only flat surfaces goes in the green bin.
  • The object that has a curved surface that does not stack that is beside the tree goes in the blue bin.
  • The object that slides and rolls that is next to an object that has 6 flat surfaces goes in the blue bin.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Performance-Task

Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes Activity

Solid Shapes: Spin and Cover
Directions:
Take turns using the spinner to find which type of three-dimensional shape to cover. Use a counter to cover an object on the page. Repeat this process until you have covered all of the objects.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes 2
Answer:

Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Circle any three-dimensional shapes. Draw rectangles around any two-dimensional shapes. Tell why your answers are correct. 3 Look at the solid shape on the left that rolls. Circle the other solid shapes that roll. 4 Circle the solid shapes that stack and slide.

12.1 Two- and Three-Dimensional Shapes

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes chp 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes- Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice-12.1-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Question 1
two-dimensional
rectangle
circle
three-dimensional
Sphere
cube
Explanation:
A two-dimensional shape is a shape that has length and width but no depth.
Examples: Circle, Triangle, Rectangle, Squares, Hexagons.
2-D shapes have been shaped with rectangle.
A three-dimensional shape can be defined as a solid figure or an object or shape that has three dimensions – length, width and height. Unlike two-dimensional shapes, three-dimensional shapes have thickness or depth.
Examples: Sphere, Torus, Cylinder, Cone, Cube, Cuboid, Triangular Pyramid, Square Pyramid.
3-D shapes have been shaped with circle.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes chp 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes- Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice-12.1-Two-and-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Question-2
two-dimensional
Triangle
three-dimensional
Cylinder
Cone
Explanation:
A two-dimensional shape is a shape that has length and width but no depth.
Examples: Circle, Triangle, Rectangle, Squares, Hexagons.
2-D shapes have been shaped with rectangle.
A three-dimensional shape can be defined as a solid figure or an object or shape that has three dimensions – length, width and height. Unlike two-dimensional shapes, three-dimensional shapes have thickness or depth.
Examples: Sphere, Torus, Cylinder, Cone, Cube, Cuboid, Triangular Pyramid, Square Pyramid.
3-D shapes have been shaped with circle.

12.2 Describe Three-Dimensional Shapes

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes chp 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes- Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice-12.2-Describe-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Question-3
Explanation:
Shapes with a curved face can roll. Example sphere , cylinder , cone shape

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes chp 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes- Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice-12.2-Describe-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Question-4
Explanation:
The object which has a flat surface can slide. Example Rectangle, cube, cuboid, cylinder shapes.
Shapes with a flat face can stack. Example Cube, Rectangle, Cylinder shape.

Directions:
5 Circle the cube. Draw a rectangle around the sphere. Tell why your answers are correct. 6 Circle any object that looks like a cube. Draw a rectangle around any object that looks like a sphere. Tell why your answers are correct. 7 and 8 Circle any object that looks like a cone. Draw a rectangle around any object that looks like a cylinder. Tell why your answers are correct.

12.3 Cubes and Spheres

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes chp 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes- Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice-12.3-Cubes-and-Spheres-Question-5
Explanation:
A sphere is a round, ball-shaped solid. It has one continuous surface with no edges or vertices.
A cube is a region of space formed by six identical square faces joined along their edges.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes chp 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes- Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice-12.3-Cubes-and-Spheres-Question-6
Explanation:
A sphere is a round, ball-shaped solid. It has one continuous surface with no edges or vertices.
A cube is a region of space formed by six identical square faces joined along their edges.

12.4 Cones and Cylinders

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes chp 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes- Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice-12.4-Cones-and-Cylinders-Question-7

Explanation:
A Cone is a distinctive three-dimensional geometric figure that has a flat surface and a curved surface, pointed towards the top. The pointed end of the cone is called the apex, whereas the flat surface is called the base.

A Cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that holds two parallel bases joined by a curved surface, at a fixed distance.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes chp 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes- Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice-12.4-Cones-and-Cylinders-Question-8

Explanation:
A Cone is a distinctive three-dimensional geometric figure that has a flat surface and a curved surface, pointed towards the top. The pointed end of the cone is called the apex, whereas the flat surface is called the base.

A Cylinder is a three-dimensional solid that holds two parallel bases joined by a curved surface, at a fixed distance.

Directions:
9 Use your materials to build the solid shape shown. 10 Use your materials to build a shape that has a curved surface and 2 flat surfaces. Circle the shape you build. 11 Use your materials to build the elf in the picture. Circle the solid shapes that you use to make the elf.

12.5 Build Three-Dimensional Shapes

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes chp 9

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes chp 10
Answer 9 – 10 :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.5-Build-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Question-9-10

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes chp 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Lesson-12.5-Build-Three-Dimensional-Shapes-Question-11

Directions:
12 Circle the object that looks like a cylinder that is below the hat. Draw a line through the object that looks like a cone that is beside the cooler. Draw a rectangle around the object that looks like a cylinder that is in front of the hat. 13 Circle the object that looks like a sphere that is above the cone. Draw a line through the object that looks like a cylinder that is next to the cone. Draw a rectangle around the object that looks like a sphere that is behind the cone.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes chp 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes- Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice-Question-12

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 12 Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes chp 13
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-12- Identify-Three-Dimensional-Shapes- Identify Three-Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice-Question-13

Final Words:

You can learn the difference between 2-D and 3-D shapes from here. Write your new ideas on your book and solve the problems in own way. Also create questions on your own and try to understand the concepts in depth. We hope the given info is helpful for all the students of Grade K. If you have any doubts regarding the concept you can post the comments in the below-mentioned comment box. Hope this Big Ideas Math Grade K Solution Key helps you to score good marks in the exams.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12

Are you feeling difficulty while preparing for the 12th Chapter Solve Length Problems? Then stay tuned to this page. Here we are giving the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems. Students can download the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems pdf for free of cost.

Big Ideas Math Book 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems

Students can check out the topic-wise questions and solutions of Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems. The different lessons of BIM Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems are Solve Length Problems Vocabulary, Use a Number Line to Add and Subtract Lengths, Problem Solving: Length, Problem Solving: Missing Measurement, and Practice Measurement Problems.

Make use of Big Ideas Math 2nd Grade 12th Chapter Solve Length Problems Answer Key during your practice sessions. Make the most out of them and score better grades in your exams. Students can access whichever topic they feel like preparing by click on the quick links listed below. You will be directed to the chosen link.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Use a Number Line to Add and Subtract Lengths

Lesson: 2 Problem Solving: Length

Lesson: 3 Problem Solving: Missing Measurement

Lesson: 4 Practice Measurement Problems

Chapter: 12 – Solve Length Problems

Solve Length Problems Vocabulary

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems v 1
Organize It
Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems v 2
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Solve-Length-Problems-Vocabulary-Organize-It
Explanation :
Bar model can be defined as a pictorial representation of a number in the form of bars or boxes used to solve number problems.

Define It
Match the review word to its model.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems v 3
Answer :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Solve-Length-Problems-Vocabulary-Define-It

Lesson 12.1 Use a Number Line to Add and Subtract Lengths

Explore and Grow

Your goldfish is 4 centimetres long. It grows 6 more centimetres. Use the number line and your ruler to show how long the goldfish is now.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 1

Answer :
Length of the gold fish = 4 centimetres
Increased length of gold fish = 6 centimetres
Length of gold fish now = 4 + 6 = 10 centimetres  .

Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 4 to represent 4. Then draw an arrow 6 units to the right representing adding +6.
So, 4 + 6 =0

What is the same about your ruler and the number line? What is different?
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
Answer:
A number line is just that – a straight, horizontal line with numbers placed at even increments along the length. It’s not a ruler, so the space between each number doesn’t matter, but the numbers included on the line determine how it’s meant to be used.
Ruler a straight strip, typically marked at regular intervals and used to draw straight lines or measure distances.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
You swim 15 meters and take a break. Then you swim 10 meters. How many meters do you swim?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 2
Answer:
Distance covered while swimming = 15 meters
Distance covered while swimming after break = 10 metresters .
Therefore, 25 meters traveled in swimming
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.1-Use-a-Number-Line-to-Add-Subtract-Lengths-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to 10 to represent 10. Then draw an arrow 15 units to the right representing adding +15.
So, 10 + 15 = 25

Question 2.
A ribbon is 16 yards long. You cut off 7 yards. How long is the ribbon now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 3
Answer:
Length of the ribbon = 16 yards
Decreased in the length of the ribbon = 7 yards
Length of the ribbon now = 16 – 7 = 9 yards .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.1-Use-a-Number-Line-to-Add-Subtract-Lengths-Show-Grow-Question-2
Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to 16 to represent 16. Then draw an arrow 7 units to the left representing Subtracting -7.
So, 16  – 7 = 9

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
A snake is 24 inches long. It sheds 14 inches of its skin. How much skin does it not shed?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 4

Answer:
Length of the snake = 24
Length of snake sheds = 14
Length of the snake didn’t shed = Total Length – shed length = 24 – 14 = 10 inches
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.1-Use-a-Number-Line-to-Add-Subtract-Lengths-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-3
Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to 24 to represent 24. Then draw an arrow 14 units to the left representing Subtracting 10
So, 24 – 14 = 10 inches .

Question 4.
A photo is 15 centimetres long. You cut off 3 centimetres from the left and 3 centimetres from the right. How long is the photo now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 5
Answer:
Length of the photo = 15 centimetres
Length of the photo cut from left = 3 centimetres
Length of the photo cut from right = 3 centimetres
Length of the photo now = 15 – 3 – 3 = 15 – 6 = 9 centimetres
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.1-Use-a-Number-Line-to-Add-Subtract-Lengths-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-4

Question 5.
Structure
Write an equation that matches the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.1-Use-a-Number-Line-to-Add-Subtract-Lengths-Question-5

Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to 11 to represent 11. Then draw an arrow 6 units to the right representing adding 6 and draw an arrow 3 units to the left representing subtracting 3 .
So, 11 + 6 – 3 = 14 .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You want to make a bracelet that is 6 inches long. You make 4 inches before lunch. You make 2 inches after lunch. Did you finish the bracelet?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 7
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 8
Did you finish? Yes No
Answer:
Length of the bracelet = 6 inches
Length of the bracelet made before lunch = 4 inches.
Length of the bracelet made after lunch = 2 inches.
Total Length of the bracelet made = 4 + 2 = 6 inches .
Yes , it is finished
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.1-Use-a-Number-Line-to-Add-Subtract-Lengths-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life

Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to 4 to represent 4. Then draw an arrow 2 units to the right representing adding 2
So, 4 + 2 = 6 inches .

Show and Grow

Question 6.
You are painting a fence that is 24 feet long. You paint 10 feet on Saturday. You paint 13 feet on Sunday. Did you finish painting the fence?
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.1-Use-a-Number-Line-to-Add-Subtract-Lengths-Question-6
Answer:
Length of the total fencing = 24 feet
Length of the fence painted on Saturday = 10 feet
Length of the fence painted on Sunday = 13 feet
Total length of the fencing painted = 10 + 13 = 23 feet.
No painting of fencing is not finished as it is painted 23 feet . still 1 feet left to paint ( 24 – 23 = 1 feet )
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.1-Use-a-Number-Line-to-Add-Subtract-Lengths-Question-7

Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to 10 to represent 10. Then draw an arrow 13 units to the right representing adding 13
So, 10 + 13  = 23 feet .

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
You throw a disc 9 meters. On your second throw, the disc travels 3 meters more than your first throw. How many meters did the disc travel in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 10
______ meters
Answer:
Length of the first disc thrown = 9 metres
Length of the disc travels in second throw = 3 meters more than your first throw = 9 + 3 = 12
Total length the disc travels in first and second throw = 9 + 12 = 21 meters .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.1-Use-a-Number-Line-to-Add-Subtract-Lengths-Question-7
Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to 9 to represent 9. Then draw an arrow 12 units to the right representing adding 12
So, 9 + 12  = 21 meters .

Use a Number Line to Add and Subtract Lengths Homework & Practice 12.1

Question 1.
You kick a ball 13 yards. Your friend kicks it back 9 yards. How far is the ball from you now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 11
Answer:
Distance traveled by ball when i kicked the ball  = 13 yards
Distance traveled by ball when my friend kicked the ball = 9 yards back ward = -9 yards.
Distance of ball from me now = 13 yards – 9 yards = 4 yards.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Use-a-Number-Line-to-Add-Subtract-Lengths-Homework-Practice-12.1-Question-1
Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to 13 to represent 13. Then draw an arrow 9 units to the left representing Subtracting 9
So, 13- 9 = 4 yards .

Question 2.
Your shoelace is 20 inches long. Your friend’s is 4 inches longer than yours. How long is your friend’s shoelace?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 12
Answer:
Length of my shoelace = 20 inches
Length of my friend’s shoelace = 4 inches longer than me = 4 + 20 = 24 inches.

Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to 20 to represent 20. Then draw an arrow 4 units to the right representing adding 4
So, 20 + 4 = 24 inches .

Question 3.
Structure
One power cord is 7 feet long. Another power cord is 5 feet long. Use the number line to find the combined length of the power cords.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 13
Answer:
Length of power cord = 7 feet
Length of another power cord = 5 feet
Total length of both cords = 7 + 5 = 12 feet
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Use-a-Number-Line-to-Add-Subtract-Lengths-Homework-Practice-12.1-Question-3

Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to 7 to represent 7. Then draw an arrow 5 units to the right representing adding 5
So, 7 + 5  =12 feets .

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
A worker needs to pave a bike path that is 25 feet long. He completes 13 feet on Monday and 11 feet on Tuesday. Did he complete the paving?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 14
Answer:
Length of the bike path = 25 feet
length paved on Monday = 13 feet
Length paved on Tuesday = 11 feet
Total length paved on Monday and Tuesday = 13 + 11 = 24 feet
1 feet is less to complete the length of bike path . So, Paving is not completed .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Use-a-Number-Line-to-Add-Subtract-Lengths-Homework-Practice-12.1-Question-4

Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to 13 to represent 13. Then draw an arrow 11 units to the right representing adding 11
So, 13+ 11  = 24 feets .

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
You throw a baseball 5 yards. On your second throw, the baseball travels 2 yards more than your first throw. How many yards did the baseball travel in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 15
_______ yards
Answer:
Distance traveled by a base ball = 5 yards
Distance traveled by a base ball in second throw = 2 yards more than your first throw = 5 + 2 = 7 yards .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Use-a-Number-Line-to-Add-Subtract-Lengths-Homework-Practice-12.1-Question-5
Explanation :
Draw an arrow from 0 to 5 to represent 5. Then draw an arrow +2 units to the right representing adding 2
So, 5 + 2  = 7 yards .

Review & Refresh

Compare
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 16
Answer:
210 = 200 + 10

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.1 17
Answer:
532 = 500 + 20 + 3

Lesson 12.2 Problem Solving: Length

Explore and Grow

How much longer is the red ribbon than the blue ribbon?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.2 1
______ inches
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.2-Problem-Solving-Length-Explore-Grow

Show and Grow

Question 1.
An orange fish is 10 centimeters long. A yellow fish is 35 centimeters long. A red fish is 19 centimeters long. How much longer is the yellow fish than the red fish?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.2 2
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.2 3
Answer:
Length of Orange fish =  10 centimeters
Length of Yellow fish = 35 centimeters
Length of red fish  = 19 centimeters
length of yellow fish is how much longer than the red fish = 35 – 19 = 16 centimeters
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.2-Problem-Solving-Length-Show-Grow-Question-1

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
A green scarf is 60 inches long. An orange scarf is 45 inches long. A red scarf is 36 inches long. How much longer is the green scarf than the red scarf?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.2 4
______ inches
Answer:
Length of green scarf = 60 inches
Length of Orange scarf = 45 inches .
Length of Red scarf = 36 inches .
Length of green scarf is how much longer than red scarf = 60 – 36 = 24 inches .

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
A pink ribbon is 90 centimeters long. A purple ribbon is 35 centimeters long. A blue ribbon is46 centimeters long. How much longer is the pink ribbon than the total length of the purple and blue ribbons?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.2 5
_______ centimeters
Answer:
Length of pink ribbon = 90 centimeters
Length of purple ribbon = 35 centimeters
Length of blue ribbon = 46 centimeters
The total length of the purple and blue ribbons = 35 + 46 = 81  centimeters.
Length of pink ribbon is how much longer than the total length of the purple and blue ribbons = 90 – 81 = 9 centimeters

Question 4.
Structure
How much taller is Student 3 than the shortest student?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.2 6
________ inches
Answer:
Taller student is student 3 = 53 inches .
Shorter student is student 2 = 48 inches .
Taller Student is how much taller than shorter student = 53 – 48 = 5 inches .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You hop 27 inches and then 24 inches. Your friend hops 3 inches less than you. How far does your friend hop?
Think: What do you know? What do you need to find?
Model:
_______ inches
Answer:
Length hoped by me is 27 and 24 inches = 27 + 24 = 51 inches
Length hoped by my friend = 3 inches less than me = 51 – 3 = 48 inches .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.2-Problem-Solving-Length-Question-4

Show and Grow

Question 5.
You throw a ball 36 feet and then 41 feet. Your friend throws a ball 5 feet farther than you. How far does your friend throw the ball?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.2 7
______ feet
Answer:
Distance traveled by ball in first throw = 36 feet
Distance traveled by ball in Second throw = 41 feet
Total Distance traveled by balls = 36 + 41 = 77 feet
Distance traveled by ball when my friend throws = 5 feet farther than me = 77 + 5 = 82 feet .

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
A black horse runs 53 meters and then 45 meters. A brown horse runs 62 meters and then 31 meters. Which horse ran the longer distance in all? How many more meters did the horse run?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.2 8
Black horse Brown horse
_________ more meters
Answer:
Distance traveled by black horse is 53 meters and then 45 meters. = 53 + 45 = 98 meters
Distance traveled by Brown horse is 62 meters and then 31 meters = 62 + 31 = 93 meters
Black Horse runs longer distance than brown horse
Black horse travels 98 – 93 = 5 meters more than brown horse .

Problem Solving: Length Homework & Practice 12.2

Question 1.
The distance to the principal’s office is 24 yards. The distance to the bathroom is 15 yards. The distance to your teacher’s desk is 2 yards. How much farther away is the principal’s office than the bathroom?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.2 9
_______ yards
Answer:
The distance to the principal’s office = 24 yards
The distance to the bathroom = 15 yards
The distance to your teacher’s desk = 2 yards
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Problem-Solving-Length-Homework-Practice-12.2-Question-1
The principal’s office is 9 yards farther away than the bathroom .

Question 2.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
You launch a rocket 63 meters. Your friend launches it 28 meters, and your cousin launches it 86meters. Your cousin says that he launches the rocket 58 meters farther than you. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.2 10
Answer:
Distance traveled by my rocket = 63 meters
Distance traveled by my friend rocket = 28 meters
Distance traveled by my cousin’s rocket = 86 meters
Distance differences between my rocket and my cousins rocket = 86 – 63 = 23 meters .
My Rockets is 23 meters farther than my cousin rocket not 58 meters.
So above statement is wrong .
Explanation :
Distance differences between my rocket and my cousins rocket = 86 – 63 = 23 meters .
My Rockets is 23 meters farther than my cousin rocket not 58 meters.

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
You create a drawing that is 15 centimeters long and then add on 7 more centimeters. Your friend creates a drawing that is 3 centimeters longer than yours. How long is your friend’s drawing?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.2 11
_______ centimeters
Answer:
Length of my Drawing = 15 centimeters
Length of my drawing after adding 7 centimeters = 15 + 7 = 22 centimeters
Length of my Friends drawing = 3 centimeters longer than my drawing = 22 + 3 = 25 centimeters
Therefore length of my friend’s drawing = 25 centimeters .

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
A frog hops 36 inches and then 22 inches. A toad hops 14 inches and then 43 inches. Which animal hopped the longer distance in all? How many more inches did the animal hop?
Frog Toad
________ more inches
Answer:
Distance hopped by frog is 36 inches and then 22 inches. = 36 + 22 = 58 inches .
Distance hopped by toad is 14 inches and then 43 inches = 14 + 43 = 57 inches .
Frog hopped more distance than toad
Difference of distance hopped by frog and toad = 58 – 57 = 1 inch .

Review & Refresh 

Question 5.
635 + 10 = ______
635 + 100 = _____
Answer:
635 + 10 = 645
635 + 100 = 735
Explanation :
The ones digit remains the same when you add ten. The tens digit increases by 1 every time you add ten
The ones digit remains the same and the tens digit remains the same when you add hundred. The hundred digit increases by 1 every time you add hundred

Question 6.
824 + _____ = 924
824 + _____ = 834
Answer:
824 + 100 = 924
824 + 10 = 834
Explanation :
The ones digit remains the same when you add ten. The tens digit increases by 1 every time you add ten
The ones digit remains the same and the tens digit remains the same when you add hundred. The hundred digit increases by 1 every time you add hundred

Question 7.
309 + _____ = 409
309 + _____ = 319
Answer:
309 + 100 = 409
309 + 10 = 319
Explanation :
The ones digit remains the same when you add ten. The tens digit increases by 1 every time you add ten
The ones digit remains the same and the tens digit remains the same when you add hundred. The hundred digit increases by 1 every time you add hundred

Lesson 12.3 Problem Solving: Missing Measurement

Explore and Grow

You and your friend each have a piece of yarn. The total length of both pieces is 16 centimeters. Use a ruler to measure your yarn. Then draw your friend’s yarn.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.3 1
Answer:

Explain how you found the length of your friend’s yarn.
_______________________
_______________________
_______________________
Answer:
Total Length of the yarn  = 16 centimeters
Length of my yarn = 7.8 centimeters .
Length of my friend’s yarn = 16 – 7.8 =  8.2 centimeters
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.3-Problem-Solving-Missing-Measurement-Explore-Grow

Show and Grow

Question 1.
A rope is 31 meters long. You cut a piece off. Now the rope is 14 meters long. How much rope did you cut off?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.3 2
So, ? = ______.
______ inches
Answer:
Length of the rope = 31 meters
Length of the rope after cut off = 14 meters.
Length of the cut off rope = 31 – 14 = 17 meters .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.3-Problem-Solving-Missing-Measurement-Show-Grow-Question-1

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
A celery stalk is 20 centimeters long. You cut off the leaves. Now it is 13 centimeters long. How much did you cut off?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.3 3
______ centimeters
Answer:
Length of celery stalk = 20 centimeters
Length of celery stacking after chopping the leaves = 13 centimeters .
Length of the chopped leaves = 20 – 13 = 7 centimeters .

Question 3.
Descartes walked some and then ran 39 yards. He went a total of 75 yards. How far did he walk?
______ yards
Answer:
Total Distance traveled by Descartes = 75 yards
Distance traveled by running = 39 yards
Distance Traveled by walking = 75 – 39 = 36 yards

Question 4.
Your coat zipper is 18 inches long. The zipper gets stuck at 11 inches. How much of the zipper will not zip?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.3 4
_____ inches
Answer:
Length of coat zipper = 18 inches
Length of zipper got stuck = 11 inches
Length of zipper will not zip = 18 – 11 = 7 inches .

Question 5.
Number Sense
The path to school is 181 meters long in all. How long is the missing part of the path?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.3 5
_______ meters
Answer:
Total path to school = 181 meters
The path from the house to first turn = 74 meters
The path from the first turn to the second turn = 86 meters.
Path from second turn to school is missing = 181 – 74 – 86 = 181 – 160 = 21 meters

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You make a paper chain that is 8 feet long. You add 7 feet of chain to the end. Then 6 feet of the chain breaks off. How long is the chain now?
Think: What do you know? What do you need to find?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.3 6
_____ feet
Answer:
Length of paper chain = 8 feet
Length of chain added in the end = 7 feet .
Length of chain broken = 6 feet
Total length of the chain now = 8 + 7 – 6 = 15 – 6 = 9 feet .
Explanation :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.3-Problem-Solving-Missing-Measurement-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life

Show and Grow

Question 6.
You build a tower that is 48 centimeters tall. You add 34 centimeters to the tower height. Your tower breaks and 29 centimeters fall off. How tall is your tower now?
______ centimeters
Answer:
Height of the tower = 48 centimeters
Height added to the tower = 34 centimeters
Total Height of the tower now = 48 + 34 = 82 centimeters .
Height at which tower broken = 29 centimeters
Height of the tower after broken = 82 – 29 = 53 centimeters

Question 7.
A football team is 78 yards away from scoring. They gain 15 yards on the first play and 21 yards on the second play. How far is the team from scoring now?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.3 7
_______ yards
Answer:
The distance of foot ball team from scoring = 75 yards
Distance gain in first play = 15 yards
Distance gain in second play = 21 yards.
Distance of foot ball team from scoring now = 75 – 15 – 21 = 39 yards .

Problem Solving: Missing Measurement Homework & Practice 12.3

Question 1.
A piece of fabric is 36 inches long. Another piece is 18 inches long. What is the total length of both pieces of fabric?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.3 8
_____ inches
Answer:
Length of first fabric = 36 inches
Length of second fabric = 18 inches
Total length of both fabrics = 36 + 18 = 54 inches.

Question 2.
A rose is 61 centimeters long. You cut off some of the stem. Now it is 48 centimeters long. How much did you cut off?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.3 9
______ Centimeters
Answer:
Length of rose = 61 centimeters
Length of rose after chopping stem = 48 centimeters .
Length of chopped stem = 61 – 48 = 13 centimeters .

Question 3.
Number Sense
Newton’s balloon is 18 inches long. Descartes’s balloon is 23 inches long. Your friend’s balloon is 12 inches long. Which sentences are true?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.3 10
Newton’s balloon is 6 inches longer than your friend’s.
Your friend’s balloon is 11 inches longer than Descartes’s.
Descartes’s balloon is 5 inches longer than Newton’s.
Answer:
Statement 1 is true and Statement 3 is true
Length of Newton’s balloon =18 inches
Length of Descartes’s balloon = 23 inches .
Length of  my Friend’s balloon = 12 inches .
Explanation :
Statement 1 :
Newton balloon and my friends balloon difference in length = 18 – 12 = 6 inches.
It means Newton balloon is 6 inches longer than my friend balloon .
Statement 2 :
Descartes balloon and my friends balloon difference in length= 23 – 12 = 11 inches .
Descartes balloon is 11 inches longer than my friends balloon .
so statement is wrong .
Statement 3 :
Descartes balloon and newtons balloon difference in length = 23 – 18 = 5 inches.
Descartes balloon is 5 inches longer than newton balloon .
Statement is true .

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.3 11
Answer:
Equation 3 is true
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Problem-Solving-Missing-Measurement-Homework-Practice-12.3-Question-4

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
A piece of wood is 16 feet long. You cut off 6 feet, but it is still too long. You cut off 2 more feet. How long is the piece of wood now?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.3 12
______ feet
Answer:
Length of wood = 16 feet
Length of wood chopped = 6 feet
Length of wood chopped again = 2 feet
Length of wood after chopping = 16 – 6 – 2 = 16 – 8 = 8 feet .

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.3 13
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Problem-Solving-Missing-Measurement-Homework-Practice-12.3-Question-6

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.3 14
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Problem-Solving-Missing-Measurement-Homework-Practice-12.3-Question-7
Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.3 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Problem-Solving-Missing-Measurement-Homework-Practice-12.3-Question-8

Lesson 12.4 Practice Measurement Problems

Explore and Grow

Newton’s piece of string is 24 centimeters long. He gives Descartes 12 centimeters of the string. How long is the string that Newton has left? Draw a picture and write an equation to solve.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.4 1
______ cm
Answer:
Length of Newton’s peice of string = 24 centimeters
Length of string given to Descartes = 12 centimeters
Length of string left over with Newton = 24 – 12 = 12 centimeters .
24 – 12 = 12 is the equation .

Compare the lengths of string. Is one longer, or are they the same length? Explain.

__________________________
__________________________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Lesson-12.4-Practice-Measurement-Problems-Explore-Grow
Both the lengths are same
Newton’s length = Descarte’s length = 12 centimeters .

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Your blanket is 66 inches long. Your friend’s blanket is 9 inches longer than yours. How long is your friend’s blanket?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.4 2
So, ? = ______
_____ inches
Answer:
Length of my blanket = 66 inches
Length of my friend’s blanket = 9 inches longer than yours. = 66 + 9 = 75 inches
My friends blanket is 9 inches longer than my blanket .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
A blue whale is 31 meters long. A humpback whale is 16 meters long. How much longer is the blue whale than the humpback whale?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.4 3
_____ meters
Answer:
Length of blue whale = 31 meters
Length of hump back whale = 16 meters
Differences in the length of blue whale and hump back whale = 31 – 16 = 15 meters.
Length of blue whale is 15 meters longer than hump back whale .

Question 3.
Newton runs 450 meters. Descartes runs 25 meters less than Newton. How far do they run in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.4 4
______ meters
Answer:
Distance traveled by Newtons in running= 450 meters
Distance traveled by Descartes in running= 25 meters less than Newton = 450 – 25 = 425 meters .
Total Distance traveled by Newton and Descartes = 450 + 425 = 875 meters .

Question 4.
Reasoning
Solve the problem below two different ways.
You want to read 100 books during the school year. You read 25 books in the fall and 54 books in the winter. How many books do you still need to read?
______ books
Answer:
Total Number of books to read = 100 books
Number of books read in fall = 25 books
Number of books read in winter = 54 books
Number of books still needed to read = 100 – 25 – 54 = 100 – 79 = 21 books

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A yellow subway train is 18 meters longer than a blue subway train. The yellow subway train is 92 meters long. How long is the blue subway train?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.4 5
Equation:
______ meters
Answer :
Length of yellow subway tarin = 92 meters .
Length of yellow subway train = 18 meters longer than a blue subway train
Length of blue subway train = 92 – 18 = 74

Show and Grow

Question 5.
A brown rabbit hops 24 inches less than a white rabbit. The brown rabbit hops 48 inches. How many inches does the white rabbit hop?
_____ inches
Answer:
Distance traveled by brown rabbit by hopping = 24 inches less than a white rabbit
Distance traveled by brown rabbit = 48 inches .
Distance traveled by white rabbit = 48 + 24 = 72 inches

Question 6.
Your kite string is 47 yards long. You tie 6 yards of string to the end. Now your kite string is 21 yards longer than your friend’s kite string. How long is your friend’s kite string?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.4 6
_______ yards
Answer:
Length of the kite  string = 47 yards
Length attached to kite in the end = 6 yards
Length of my kite string now =47 + 6 = 53 yards
Length of my kite string= 21 yards longer than your friend’s kite string
Length of my friend’s kite string = 53 – 21 = 32 yards .

Practice Measurement Problems Homework & Practice 12.4

Question 1.
A swimming pool is 28 feet long. The pool cover is 32 feet long. How much longer is the pool cover?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.4 7
So, ? = ______
_____ feet
Answer:
Length of swimming pool = 28 feet
Length of pool cover = 32 feet
Difference of length in pool and pool cover = 32 – 28 = 4 feet
So, the pool cover is 4 feet longer than pool

Question 2.
Writing
Write and solve a word problem about the colored pencils.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.4 8
Answer:
Which color pencil is longer and how much centimetres it is longer from shorter pencil ?
Explanation :
The length of green pencil = 8 cm
The length of red pencil = 11 cm
The length of blue pencil = 15 cm
green pencil is the shorter pencil
Blue pencil is the longer pencil
Differences in the lengths of blue and green pencils = 15 – 8 = 7 cms
The blue pencil is 7 cms longer than green pencil .

Question 3.
Modeling Real Life
You cast out your fishing line 14 yards less than your friend. Your friend casts out her line 33 yards. How many yards do you cast out your fishing line?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.4 9
______ yards
Answer:
length of my friend’s fishing line = 33 yards
length of my fishing line= 14 yards less than my friend’s
Length of my fishing line= 33 – 14 = 19 yards

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
Your nightstand is 24 inches tall. You put a 20-inch lamp on it. Now your nightstand and lamp are 19 inches taller than your bed. How tall is your bed?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 12.4 10
______ inches
Answer:
Height of my nightstand = 24 inches
Height of the lamp = 20 inch
Height of nightstand and lamp = 24 + 20 = 42 inches.
Height of bed = nightstand and lamp are 19 inches taller than your bed.
Height of bed = 42 – 19 = 23 inches .

Review & Refresh

Question 5.
Write the number in expanded form and word form.
645
______ + ____ + ______ _________
Answer:
645 = 600 + 40 + 5
Explanation :
Six hundred and forty five represents six hundreds plus four tens and five ones
When numbers are separated into individual place values and decimal places is called expanded form

Question 6.
Write the number in standard form and word form.
800 + 60 + 2
_____ _______________________
Answer:
862
Explanation:
eight hundred and sixty two = 8 hundreds plus 6 tens and 2ones .
When numbers are separated into individual place values and decimal places is called expanded form

Solve Length Problems Performance Task

Question 1.
A recorder is 1 foot long. A clarinet is 24 inches long. Which instrument is longer? How much longer is the instrument?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 2
Recorder Clarinet
_____ inches
Answer:
Length of the Recorder = 1 foot = 12 inches
Length of the clarinet = 24 inches
Clarinet is longer
Difference in the length of clarinet and Recorder = 24 – 12 = 12 inches .
Clarinet is 12 inches longer than Recorder .

Question 2.
A piano has 27 more keys than a keyboard. There are 52 white keys and 36 black keys on a piano.
a. How many keys are on the keyboard?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 3
_____ keys
Answer :
Number of white keys on piano = 52
Number of black keys on piano = 36
Total Number of keys on piano = 52 + 36 = 88 keys
piano has 27 more keys than a keyboard
Number of keys on key board = 88 – 27 = 61 keys .

b. The number of black keys on the piano is equal to the number of white keys on the keyboard. How many black keys are on the keyboard?
______ black keys
Answer:
Number of black keys on piano = 36 = number of white keys on keyboard
Number of black keys on keyboard = 61 – 36 = 25 keys .

Question 3.
A drum set has drums and cymbals on stands.
a. The cymbals are 77 centimeters from the ground. You raise the stand 18 centimeters. The cymbals are now 23 centimeters higher than one of the drums. What is the height of the drum?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 4
_______ centimeters
Answer :
Length of cymbals from ground = 77 centimeters .
Length of the stand = 18 centimeters .
Length of cymbals now = 77 + 18 = 95 centimeters
cymbals are now 23 centimeters higher than one of the drums.
Height of the drums = 95 – 23 =72 centimeters .

b. Another drum is 60 centimeters from the ground. You raise it 12 centimeters. Are both drums the same height?
Yes No
Answer:
Height of the drum = 60 centimeters
Height of the drum raised = 12 centimeters.
Height of the drum now = 60 + 12 = 72 centimeters .
Both the drums are at equal heights of 72 centimeters
Yes, both drums have the same height .

Solve Length Problems Activity

Draw and Cover
To Play: Players take turns. On your turn, pick a Draw and Cover Card and solve. Then cover the sea turtle that has the answer. Continue playing until all sea turtles are covered.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems 5

Solve Length Problems Chapter Practice

12.1 Use a Number Line to Add and Subtract Lengths

Question 1.
You throw a ball 12 yards. Your friend throws it back 8 yards. How far is the ball from you now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems chp 1
Answer:
Distance traveled by ball when thrown by me= 12 yards
Distance traveled by my friend after throwing = – 8 yards. ( – represents back direction )
Distance of ball far from me  = 12 – 8 = 4 yards.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems- Solve-Length-Problems-Chapter-Practice-12.1-Use-Number-Line-Add-Subtract-Lengths-Question-1
Explanation:
Draw an arrow from 0 to 12 to represent 12. Then draw an arrow 4 units to the left representing subtracting 4.
So, 12 – 8 = 4 yards .

12.2 Problem Solving: Length

Question 2.
Your cat’s first collar was 6 inches long. Now your cat has a collar that is 13 inches long. Your puppy’s collar is 11 inches long. How much longer is your cat’s collar now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems chp 2
Answer:
Length of cat first collar = 6 inches
Length of cat collar now  = 13 inches .
Difference in cat collar now and first collar = 13 – 6 = 7 inches
Cat collar is 7 inches longer than first collar
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems- Solve-Length-Problems-Chapter-Practice-12.2-Problem-Solving-Length-Question-2

12.3 Problem Solving: Missing Measurement

Question 3.
You must be 54 inches tall to ride a roller coaster. At 8 years old, you were 48 inches tall. You grow 3 inches the next year. How much more do you still need to grow to be able to ride the roller coaster?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems chp 3
______ inches
Answer:
Required Height to ride a aroller coaster = 54
My Height at the age of 8 yaers = 48 inches.
Next year my height = 48 + 3 = 51 inches.
Height required more for me to ride a roller coaster = 51 – 48 = 3 inches

Question 4.
Number Sense
A car tire is 61 centimeters tall. A truck tire is 84 centimeters tall. A monster truck tire is167 centimeters tall. Which sentences are true?
The car tire is 23 centimeters taller than the truck tire.
The truck tire is 83 centimeters shorter than the monster truck tire.
The monster truck tire is 106 centimeters taller than the car tire.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems chp 4
Answer:
Statements 2 and 3 are true .
Length of car tire = 61 centimeters
Length of truck tire = 84 centimeters
Length of monster truck = 167 centimeters
Explanation:
Statement 1:
Car tire and truck tire difference in lengths = 84 – 61 = 23 centimeters
Truck tire is 23 centimeters  longer than car tire
Statement is false
Statement 2 :
Truck tire and monster tire lengths differences = 167 – 84 = 83 centimeters
The truck tire is 83 centimeters shorter than the monster truck tire.
Statement is true .
Statement 3 :
Monster truck and car tire lengths differences = 167 – 61 = 106 centimeters
The monster truck tire is 106 centimeters taller than the car tire.
Statement is true .

12.4 Practice Measurement Problems

Question 5.
A kangaroo jumps 24 feet. A frog jumps 19 feet less than the kangaroo. How far does the frog jump?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems chp 6
______ feet
Answer:
Height of kangaroo jump = 24 feet
Height of frog jump = 19 feet less than the kangaroo. = 24 – 19 = 5 feet

Question 6.
A store owner wants to add on to the parking lot to make it 38 meters long. It is currently 21 meters long. How many meters does the store owner want to add?
_____ meters
Answer:
Length of parking after adding parking = 38 meters
Current length = 21 meters
Increase in the length = 38 – 21 = 17 meters .

Solve Length Problems Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
Which expressions have a sum less than 12?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems cp 1
Answer:
Expressions : 5 + 3 , 1 +0 and 4 +6
Explanation :
5 + 3 = 8
4 + 6 = 10
1 + 0 = 1
7 + 8 = 15

Question 2.
Find each difference.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems cp 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Solve-Length-Problems-Cumulative-Practice-Question-2

Question 3.
A blue sailboat is 44 feet long. A white sailboat is 36 feet long. A green sailboat is 22 feet long. Which sentences are true?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems cp 3
Answer:
Statement 2 and 3 are true .
Length of blue sail boat = 44 feet
Length of white sail boat = 36 feet
Length of green sail boat = 22 feet
Explanation:
Statement 1 :
Difference of blue and green sail boat = 44 – 22 = 22 feet
The blue sail boat is 22 feet longer than green boat .
Statement 1 is wrong .
Statement 2 :
Difference of white and green sail boat = 36 – 22 = 14 feet.
The green sail boat is 14 feet shorter than white sail boat .
Statement 2 is true .
Statement 3 :
Difference of blue and green sail boat = 44 – 22 = 22 feet
The green sail boat is 22 feet shorter than blue boat .
Statement 3 is true .
Statement 4 :
Difference of blue and white sail boat = 44 – 36 = 8 feet
The blue sail boat is 8 feet longer than white sail boat .
Statement 4 is wrong .

Question 4.
What is the value of the underlined digit?
739
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems cp 4
Answer:
3 tens

Question 5.
Use mental math to solve.
403 – 10 = ______
898 – 100 = _____
640 – 10 = ______
204 – 10 = ______
843 – _____ = 833
_______ – 100 = 731
Answer:
403 – 10 = 393
898 – 100 = 798
640 – 10 = 630
204 – 10 = 194
843 – 10 = 833
831- 100 = 731

Question 6.
The cracker is about 2 inches long. What is the best estimate of the length of the cracker box?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems cp 6
Answer:
Length of cracker = 2 inches
The best estimate of the length of the cracker box = 3 inches

Question 7.
You take 14 pictures on Friday. You take 20 more on Saturday. Your friend takes 34 pictures in all on Friday and Saturday. How many pictures did you and your friend take in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems cp 7
Answer:
Number of pictures taken on Friday by me= 14 pictures
Number of pictures taken on Saturday by me= 20 more on Saturday = 20 pictures
Number of pictures taken by friend on Friday and Saturday = 34 pictures
Total Number of pictures taken by me and my friend = 14 + 20 + 34 = 68 pictures

Question 8.
Which expressions are equal to 245 + 386?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems cp 8
Answer:
245 + 386 = 631
Expression  are 631 and 200 + 300 + 40 + 80+ 5 + 6
Explanation :
631
500 + 130 + 11 = 630 + 11 = 641
200 + 300 + 40 + 80+ 5 + 6 = 500+120+11 = 620 +11 = 631
500 + 120 + 5 = 625

Question 9.
Newton runs 7 yards, takes a break, and runs 3 more yards. Which number line shows how many yards Newton runs?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems cp 9
Answer:
Distance traveled by Newton =7 yards
Distance traveled by newton after break = 3 yards
Total Distance Traveled by Newton = 7 + 3 = 10 yards
Picture 4 represents correct .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Solve-Length-Problems-Cumulative-Practice-Question-9
Explanation :
in picture 4 the distance traveled by newton will be shown where the arrow ends at 10 .

Question 10
Find the sum.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems cp 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-12-Solve-Length-Problems-Solve-Length-Problems-Cumulative-Practice-Question-10

Question 11.
Find each difference.
80 – 53 = ?
79 – 13 = ?
90 – 32 = ?
64 – 40 = ?
Answer:
80 – 53 = 27
79 – 13 = 66
90 – 32 = 58
64 – 40 = 24

Question 12.
Complete the sentences using centimeters or meters.
A teacher’s desk is about 2 ________ long.
A paper clip is about 8 ________ long.
A carrot is about 12 _________ long.
A boat is about 20 _______ long.
Answer:
A teacher’s desk is about 2 meters long.
A paper clip is about 8 centimeters long.
A carrot is about 12 centimeters long.
A boat is about 20 meters long.

Final Words:

We wish that the data mentioned here about Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems are helpful for the students. You can complete the homework and assignments easily by downloading Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 Chapter 12 Solve Length Problems Answer Key PDF. If you have any doubts, then please leave a comment below. Bookmark our site to get the solutions for other chapters of grade 2.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3

The download pdf link of Big Ideas Math Grade 1 Answer Key Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations is available on this page. This pdf includes the fundamentals of addition and subtraction in multiple methods. Thus, the students who want to improve their math skills must solve the questions given in the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Ch 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations.

Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations

As per the student’s understanding level, only these Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations are designed and helping them to learn all primary mathematical concepts in a simple way. Learn the basic concepts of addition and subtraction from our Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answers Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations. Check out the topics covered in this chapter from the below section.

Lesson 1: Solve Add To Problems with Start Unknown

Lesson 2: Solve Take From Problems with Change Unknown

Lesson 3: Solve Take From Problems with Start Unknown

Lesson 4: Compare Problems: Bigger Unknown

Lesson 5: Compare Problems: Smaller Unknown

Lesson 6: True or False Equations

Lesson 7: Find Numbers That Make 10

Lesson 8: Fact Families

Performance Task

More Addition and Subtraction Situations Vocabulary

Organize It

Review Words:
count on
number line

Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and -Subtraction-Situations-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations- Vocubulary

Define It

Use your vocabulary cards to identify the words.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and -Subtraction-Situations-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations- Vocubulary-Define-It

Lesson 3.1 Solve Add To Problems with Start Unknown

Explore and Grow

Use counters to model each problem.

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and -Subtraction-Situations-Lesson-3.1-Solve-Add-To-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Explore-and-Grow
Explaination:
Given Sum is 5 and a addend of 2. So, to get the sum 5 we need to count 3 more from 2.
2 + 3 = 5.

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and -Subtraction-Situations-Lesson-3.1-Solve-Add-To-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Explore-and-Grow-2
Explaination:
Given 5 as sum and an addend 2. To get the sum 5 we need to count 3 more from 2.
3 + 2 = 5

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 5
_______ + 5 = 8
Answer:
3 + 5 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and -Subtraction-Situations-Lesson-3.1-Solve-Add-To-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Show-and-Grow
Explaination:
Given: 8 as sum and an addend 5. To get the sum 8 we need to add 3 more to 5.
3 + 5 = 8

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 6
_______ + 2 = 8
Answer:
1 + 2 = 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and -Subtraction-Situations-Lesson-3.1-Solve-Add-To-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Show-and-Grow-2
Explaination:
Given: 3 as sum and an addend 2. To get the sum 3 we need to add 1 more to 2.
1 + 2 = 3

Apply and Grow: practice

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 7
_________ + 3 = 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.1-Solve-Add-To-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Apply-and-Grow-practice-question-3

Explaination:
Given: 7 as sum and an addend 3. To get the sum 7 we need to add 4 more to 3.
4 + 3 = 7

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 8
_______ + 8 = 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.1-Solve-Add-To-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Apply-and-Grow-practice-question-4

Explaination:
Given: 10 as sum and an addend 8.  We need to add 2 more to 8 to get 10 as sum.
2 + 8 = 10.

Question 5.
_______ + 4 = 9
Answer:
5 + 4 = 9
Explaination:
Given: 9 as sum and an addend 4. To get the sum 9 we need to add 5 more to 4.
5 + 4 = 9

Question 6.
_________ + 0 = 5
Answer:
5 + 0 = 5
Explaination:

Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself.
Given: 5 as sum and an addend 0.
so we add 5 to get the sum 5.

Question 7.
MP Structure
Circle the equation that matches the model.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 9
8 + 2 = 10            2 + 6 = 8
2 + 2 = 4             4 + 6 = 10
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.1-Solve-Add-To-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Apply-and-Grow-practice-question-7
Explaination :
There are 2 counters in 1st  box and 6 counters in 2nd box.
Total number of boxes = 2
Add the number of boxes=
2 + 6 = 8.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

There are some ladybugs. 2 more join them. Now there are 9. How many ladybugs were there to start?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 10
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 11
Addition equation:
______ ladybugs.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.1-Solve-Add-To-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Think-and-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
Addition equation: 7 + 2 = 9

There were 7 ladybugs at the start.
Explaination:

given

Show and Grow

Question 8.
You have some books. You get 4 more books. Now you have 10. How many books did you have to start?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 12
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 13
Addition equation:

_________ books
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.1-Solve-Add-To-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Apply-and-Grow-practice-question-8

Addition equation: 6 + 4 = 10

I have to start with 6 books.

Solve Add To Problems with Start Unknown Practice 3.1

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 14
________ + 5 = 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.1-Solve-Add-To-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Practice-3.1-question-1
5 + 5 = 10

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 15
_________ + 1 = 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.1-Solve-Add-To-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Practice-3.1-question-2
3 + 1 = 4

Question 3.
_________ + 2 = 7
Answer:
5 + 2 = 7

Question 4.
_________ + 3 = 9
Answer:
6 + 3 = 9

Question 5.
MP Structure
Circle the equations that match the model.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 16
6 + 1 = 7                      4 + 2 = 6
3 + 4 = 7                      1 + 5 = 6
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 16
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.1-Solve-Add-To-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Practice-3.1-question-5-MP-Structure

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
There are some hippos. 6 more join them. Now there are 9. How many hippos were there to start?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 17

___________ hippos
Answer:
Total number of hippos = 9
Number of hippos joined = 6
Number of hippos at the start are 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.1-Solve-Add-To-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Practice-3.1-question-6-Modeling-Real-Life

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
There are 8 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 18 on a free.
5 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 18 fall off.
How many Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 18 are left?

________ – ________ = _________ Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 18
Answer:
Number of leaf on the trees = 8
Number of fallen leafs = 5
Total number of leafs left on the tree=
8 – 5 = 3 leafs left.

Question 8.
You have 3 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 19.
You lose 1 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 19.
How many im – 19 do you have left?
________ – ________ = _________ Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 19
Answer:
Number of balls i have = 3
Number of balls i lose = 1
Total number of left with me =
3 – 1 = 2 balls left.

Lesson 3.2 Solve Take From Problems with Change Unknown

Explore and Grow

Use counters to model each problem.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 20
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.2-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change- Unknown-Explore-and-Grow-1

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 21
Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 22
7 – _____ = 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.2-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change- Unknown-Show-and-Grow-question-1
7 – 5 = 2

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 23
5 – ______ = .3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.2-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change- Unknown-Show-and-Grow-question-2
5 – 2 = 3

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 24
8 – ______ = 2
Answer:

8 – 6 = 2

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 25
9 – ______ = 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.2-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change- Unknown-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-question-4
9 – 3 = 6

Question 5.
3 – _______ = 0
Answer:
3 – 3 = 0

Question 6.
10 – ________ = 5
Answer:
10 – 5 = 5

Question 7.
MP Repeated Reasoning
Match each model with its correct equation.
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 26
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.2-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change- Unknown-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-question-7

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 9 coins. You toss some of them into a fountain. You have 5 left. How many coins did you toss?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 27
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 28
Subtraction equation

________ coins.
Answer:
Total number of coins i have = 9 coins
Number of coins left with me = 5 coins
Number of coins i tossed in fountain = 9 – 5 = 4 coins
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.2-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change- Unknown-Think-and-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life

Show and Grow

Question 8.
You have 8 crayons. You lose some of them. You have 2 left. How many crayons did you lose?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 29
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 30
Subtraction equation:

__________ crayons
Answer:
Total number of crayons = 8
Number of crayons left after loosing = 2
Number of crayons left = 8 – 2 = 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.2-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change- Unknown-question-8

Solve Take From Problems with Change Unknown Practice 3.2

Question 1.
8 – ? = 4
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 318 – ______ = 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change-Unknown-Practice-3.2-question-1

Question 2.
7 – ? = 3
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 32
7 – ______ = 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change-Unknown-Practice-3.2-question-2

Question 3.
5 – _______ = 4
Answer:
5 – 1 = 4

Question 4.
6 – ______ = 6
Answer:
6 – 0 = 6

Question 5.
MP Repeated Reasoning
Match each model with its correct equation.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 33
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change-Unknown-Practice-3.2-question-5

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
You have 10 toys. Your friend borrows some of them. You have 7 left. How many toys did your friend borrow?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 34

________ toys
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change-Unknown-Practice-3.2-question-6
Total number of toys = 10
Number of toys left after borrowing = 7
Number of toys my friend borrowed = 10 – 7 = 3 toys.

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
You have 6 Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 35
You buy 3 more Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 35.
How many Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 35 do you have now?
_______ + _______ = ______ Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 35
Answer:
Number of banana’s i have = 6
Number of banana’s bought = 3
Total number of banana’s= 6 + 3 = 9 banana’s.

Question 8.
You have Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 36.
You buy 1 more Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 36.
How many Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 36 do you have now?
_______ + _______ = ______ Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 36
Answer:
number of bat i have =1
number of more bat i bought = 1
total number of bat i have = 1 + 1 = 2 bats.

Lesson 3.3 Solve Take From Problems with Start Unknown

Explore and Grow

Use counters to model each problem.

3 + 4 = _______

_____ – 3 = 4

Answer:

3 + 4 = 7
7 – 3 = 4

Show and Grow

Question 1.
? – 2 = 4
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 37
Think 2 + 4 = _______.
So, ______ – 2 = 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.3-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Start- Unknown- Show-and-Grow-question-1
Think 2 + 4 = 6.
So, 6 – 2 = 4

Question 2.
? – 1 = 1
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 38
Think 1 + 1 = _______.
So, ______ – 1 = 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.3-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Start- Unknown- Show-and-Grow-question-2
Think 1 + 1 = 2.
So, 2 – 1 = 1.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
? – 2 = 5
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 39
Think 2 + 5 = _______.
So, ______ – 2 = 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.3-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Start- Unknown-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-question-3
Think 2 + 5 = 7.
So, 7 – 2 = 5

Question 4.
? – 3 = 6
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 40
Think 3 + 6 = _______.
So, ______ – 3 = 6.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.3-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Start- Unknown-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-question-4
Think 3 + 6 = 9.
So, 9 – 3 = 6.

Question 5.
? – 4 = 1
Think 4 + 1 = _______.
So, ______ – 4 = 1.
Answer:
Think 4 + 1 = 5.
So, 5 – 4 = 1.

Question 6.
? – 6 = 4
Think 6 + 4 = _______.
So, ______ – 6 = 4.
Answer:
Think 6 + 4 = 10.
So, 10 – 6 = 4.

Question 7.
MP Structure
Circle the equations that match the model.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 41
8 – 2 = 6                  8 + 2 = 10
6 – 2 = 4                  2 + 6 = 8
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 41
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.3-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Start- Unknown-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-question-7

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A group of students are at a playground. 2 of them leave. There are 8 left. How many students were there to start?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 42
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 43
Subtraction equation:

__________ students
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.3-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Start- Unknown-Think-and-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
Number of students leave = 2
Number of students remaining = 8
Total number of students = 8 + 2 = 10 students.
subtraction equation: 10 – 2 = 8.

Show and Grow

Question 8.
You have some strawberries. You eat 9 of them. You have 0 left. How many strawberries did you have to start?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 44
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 45
Subtraction equation:

_________ strawberries
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations-Lesson-3.3-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Start- Unknown-Show-and-Grow-question-8
Number of strawberries i ate = 9
Number of strawberries left after eating = 0
Total number of strawberries i had at the start = 9 + 0 = 9 strawberries.
Subtraction equation: 9 – 9 = 0.

Solve Take From Problems with Start Unknown Practice 3.3

Question 1.
? – 7 = 2
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 46
Think 7 + 2 = _______.
So, ______ – 7 = 2.
Answer:

Think 7 + 2 = 9.
So, 9 – 7 = 2.

Question 2.
? – 2 = 8
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 47
Think 2 + 8 = _______.
So, ______ – 2 = 8.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations- Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Practice-3.3-question-2
Think 2 + 8 = 10.
So, 10 – 2 = 8.

Question 3.
? – 3 = 0
Think 3 + 0 = _______.
So, ______ – 3 = 0.
Answer:
Think 3 + 0 = 3.
So, 3 – 3 = 0.

Question 4.
? – 2 = 0
Think 2 + 6 = _______.
So, ______ – 2 = 6.
Answer:
Think 2 + 6 = 8.
So, 8 – 2 = 6.

Question 5.
MP Structure
Circle the equations that match the model.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 48
8 – 1 = 7 9 + 1 = 10
9 – 8 = 1 8 + 1 = 9
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 48
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction -Situations- Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Practice-3.3-MP-Structure-question-5

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
There are some people on a trolley. 4 of them exit. There are 4 people left. How many people were on the trolley to start?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 49

__________ people
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Start-Unknown- Practice-3.3-Modeling-Real-Life-question-6
Number of people who exit the trolley = 4
Number of people left on trolley = 4
Total number of people on the trolley = 4 + 4 = 8

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
There are 5 blue balloons and 3 red balloons. How many more blue balloons are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 50
________ – _________ = ________ more blue balloons
Answer:
Given
Blue Balloons = 5
Red Balloons = 3
5 – 3 = 2 more blue balloons are there.

Lesson 3.4 Compare Problems: Bigger Unknown

Explore and Grow

Use counters to model the story.

Newton has 5 balls. Descartes has 2 more balls than Newton. How many balls does Descartes have?

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 51
Answer:
Number of balls with newton = 5
Number of balls with Descartes = 5 + 2 = 7.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Your friend has 7 trading cards. You have 3 more than your friend. How many trading cards do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 52
7 + _______ = _______ trading cards
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.4-Compare-Problems-Bigger-Unknown-Show-and-Grow-question-1
7 + 3 = 10 trading cards.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
Your friend has I soccer ball. You have 2 more than your friend. How many soccer balls do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 53
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 54
1 + _______ = _______ soccer balls
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.4-Compare-Problems-Bigger-Unknown-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-question-2
1 + 2 = 3 soccer balls

Question 3.
Your friend swims 4 more laps than you. You swim 3 laps. How many laps does your friend swim?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 55
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 56
_______ + _______ = _______ laps
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.4-Compare-Problems-Bigger-Unknown-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-question-3

Question 4.
MP Precision
Your friend catches 5 more fish than you. You catch 2 fish. How many fish does your friend catch? Circle the bar model that matches the problem.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 57
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.4-Compare-Problems-Bigger-Unknown-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-MP-Precision-question-4

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your friend has 1 yellow flower and 2 red flowers. You have 3 more flowers than your friend. How many flowers do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 58
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 59
Addition equation:

________ flowers
Answer:
Model:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.4-Compare-Problems-Bigger-Unknown-Think-and-Grow- Modeling-Real-Life
Addition equation: 3 + 3 = 6 flowers.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
Your friend has 6 gray shirts and 2 blue shirts. You have 2 more shirts than your friend. How many shirts do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 60
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 61
Addition equation:

_________ shirts
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.4-Compare-Problems-Bigger-Unknown-Show-and-Grow-question-5
Addition equation: 8 + 2 = 10 shirts

Compare Problems: Bigger Unknown Practice 3.4

Question 1.
You have 3 key chains. Your friend has 5 more than you. How many key chains does your friend have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 62
3 + ______ = ______ key chains
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Compare-Problems-Bigger-Unknown-Practice-3.4-question-1
3 + 5 = 8 key chains

Question 2.
You have 8 more bracelets than your friend. Your friend has 2 bracelets. How many bracelets do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 63
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 64
_______ + ______ = ______ bracelets
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Compare-Problems-Bigger-Unknown-Practice-3.4-question-2
2 + 8 = 10 bracelets.

Question 3.
MP Precision
You have 1 seashell. Your friend has 8 more than you. How many seashells does your friend have? Circle the bar model that matches the problem.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 65
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Compare-Problems-Bigger-Unknown-Practice-3.4-MP-Precision-question-3

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
Your friend has 2 comic books and 2 mystery books. You have 3 more books than your friend. How many books do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 66

_________ books
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Compare-Problems-Bigger-Unknown-Practice-3.4-Modeling-Real-Life-question-4
4 + 3 = 7 books.

Review & Refresh

Question 5.
There are 2 blue crayons and 6 red crayons. How many fewer blue crayons are there?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 67
_______ – ______ = _______ fewer blue crayons
Answer:
Number of red crayons = 6
Number of blue crayons = 2
Number of fewer blue crayons = 6 – 2 = 4 blue crayons.

Lesson 3.5 Compare Problems: Smaller Unknown

Explore and Grow

Use counters to model the story.

Newton has 5 treats. Descartes has 2 fewer treats than Newton. How many treats does Descartes have?

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 68
Answer:
Number of treats with newton = 5
Number of treats with Descartes = 5 – 2 = 3.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Your friend has 8 stones. You have I fewer than your friend. How many stones do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 69
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 70
_______ – _______ = ________ stones
_______ + _______ = ________ stones
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.5-Compare-Problems-Smaller-Unknown-Show-and-Grow-question-1
8 – 1 = 7 stones
7 + 1 = 8 stones

Apply and Grow Practice

Question 2.
You blow 5 bubbles. Your friend blows 2 fewer than you. How many bubbles does your friend blow?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 71
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 72
_______ – _______ = ________ bubbles
_______ + _______ = ________ bubbles
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.5-Compare-Problems-Smaller-Unknown-Apply-and-Grow- Practice-question-2
5 – 2 = 3 bubbles
3 + 2 = 5 bubbles.

Question 3.
You have 3 fewer oranges than your friend. Your friend has 9 oranges. How many oranges do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 73
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 74
_______ ○ ______ = _______ oranges
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.5-Compare-Problems-Smaller-Unknown-Apply-and-Grow- Practice-question-3
9 – 3 = 6 oranges

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
Complete the bar model. Do both equations match the bar model?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 75
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.5-Compare-Problems-Smaller-Unknown-Apply-and-Grow- Practice-DIG-DEEPER-question-4
Both the equations matches.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your friend has 2 blue markers and 7 yellow I markers. You have 5 fewer markers than your friend. How many markers do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 76
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 77
Equation:

_________ markers
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.5-Compare-Problems-Smaller-Unknown-Think-and-Grow- Modeling-Real-Life

Equation: 9 – 5 = 4
I have 4 markers

Show and Grow

Question 5.
Your friend has 6 tennis balls and I baseball. You have 2 fewer balls than your friend. How many balls do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 78
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 79
Equation:

_________ balls
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.5-Compare-Problems-Smaller-Unknown-Show-and-Grow-question-5

Equation: 7 – 2 = 5

I have 5 balls

Compare Problems: Smaller Unknown Practice 3.5

Question 1.
Your friend has 9 awards. You have 5 fewer than your friend. How many awards do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 80
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 81
______ – _____ = _____ awards
______ + _____ = _____ awards
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.5-Compare-Problems-Smaller-Unknown-Think-and-Grow- Modeling-Real-Life
9 – 5 = 4 awards
4 + 5 = 9 awards

Question 2.
Your friend finds 2 fewer bugs than you. You find 4 bugs. How many bugs does your friend find?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 82
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 83
_______ ○ ______ = _______ bugs
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Compare-Problems-Smaller-Unknown-Practice-3.5-question-2
4 – 2 = 2 bugs
My friend found 2 bugs.

Question 3.
MP Reasoning
Complete the bar model. Circle the equation that matches the bar model.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 84
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Compare-Problems-Smaller-Unknown-Practice-3.5-MP-Reasoning-question-3

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
Your friend has 8 black cats and 2 orange cats. You have 7 fewer cats than your friend. How many cats do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 85

_______ cats
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Compare-Problems-Smaller-Unknown-Practice-3.5-Modeling Real Life-question-4
Number of cats my friend have= 8 + 2 = 10 cats
Number of cats i have = 10 – 7 = 3

Review & Refresh

Question 5.
Write the numbers of shirts and shorts. Are the numbers equal? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Compare-Problems-Smaller-Unknown-Practice-3.5-Review-&-Refresh-question-5

Lesson 3.6 True or False Equations

Explore and Grow

Color the flowers that have a sum or difference of 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 87
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.6-True-or-False-Equations-Explor-and-Grow

Show and Grow

Is the equation true or false?

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 88
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.6-True-or-False-Equations-Show-and-Grow-question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 89
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.6-True-or-False-Equations-Show-and-Grow-question-2

Apply and Grow: Practice

Is the equation true or false?

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 90
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.6-True-or-False-Equations-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-question-3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 91
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.6-True-or-False-Equations-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-question-4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 92
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.6-True-or-False-Equations-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-question-5
10 – 4 = 6
6 – 0 = 6

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 93
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.6-True-or-False-Equations-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-question-6
5- 2 = 3
7 – 4 = 3

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 94
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.6-True-or-False-Equations-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-question-7

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 95
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.6-True-or-False-Equations-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-question-8

Question 9.
MP Number Sense
Circle all of the equations that are true.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 96
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.6-True-or-False-Equations-Apply-and-Grow-Practice- MP-Number-Sense-question-9

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 7 marbles. You lose 2 of them. Your friend has 4 marbles and finds 3 more. Do you and your friend have the same number of marbles?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 97
Equation:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 98
Answer:
Number of marbles I have = 7 – 2 = 5
Number of marbles my friend have = 4 + 3 = 7
Equation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.6-True-or-False-Equations-Think-and-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life

Show and Grow

Question 10.
You have I balloon. You blow up 3 more. Your friend has 5 balloons. I of your friend’s balloons pops. Do you and your friend have the same number of balloons?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 99
Equation:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 98
Answer:
Number of balloons i have= 1 + 3 = 4
Number of balloons my friend have = 5 – 1 = 4
Equation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction- Situations-Lesson-3.6-True-or-False-Equations-Show-and-Grow-question-10

True or False Equations Practice 3.6

Is the equation true or false?

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 100
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-True-or-False-Equations-Practice-3.6-question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 101
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-True-or-False-Equations-Practice-3.6-question-2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 102
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-True-or-False-Equations-Practice-3.6-question-3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 103
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-True-or-False-Equations-Practice-3.6-question-4

Question 5.
MP Number Sense
Circle all of the equations that are false.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 104
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-True-or-False-Equations-Practice-3.6-MP-Number-Sense-question-5

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
You have 5 crayons. You find 3 more. Your friend has 7 crayons and finds I more. Do you and your friend have the same number of crayons?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 105
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 106
Answer:
Number of crayons with me = 5 + 3 = 8
Number of crayons with my friend = 7 + 1 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-True-or-False-Equations-Practice-3.6-Modeling-Real-Life-question-6

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
Circle the triangles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 107
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-True-or-False-Equations-Practice-3.6-Review-&-Refresh-question-7

Lesson 3.7 Find Numbers That Make 10

Explore and Grow

Place some red counters on the ten frame. Add yellow counters to fill the frame. Write an equation to match.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 108
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Lesson-3.7-Find-Numbers-That-Make-10-Explore-and- Grow

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 109
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Lesson-3.7-Find-Numbers-That-Make-10-Show-and-Grow-question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 110
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Lesson-3.7-Find-Numbers-That-Make-10-Show-and-Grow-question-2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 111
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Lesson-3.7-Find-Numbers-That-Make-10-Show-and-Grow-question-3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 112
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Lesson-3.7-Find-Numbers-That-Make-10-Show-and-Grow-question-4

Apply and Grow Practice

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 113
4 + _____ = 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Lesson-3.7-Find-Numbers-That-Make-10-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-question-5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 114
7 + _____ = 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Lesson-3.7-Find-Numbers-That-Make-10-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-question-6

Question 7.
1 + _____ = 10
Answer:
1 + 9 = 10

Question 8.
8 + _____ = 10
Answer:
8 + 2 = 10

Question 9.
_____ + 2 = 10
Answer:
8 + 2 = 10

Question 10.
_____ + 5 = 10
Answer:
5 + 5 = 10

Question 11.
_____ + 3 = 10
Answer:
7 + 3 = 10

Question 12.
_____ + 0 = 10
Answer:
10 + 0 = 10

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Match the numbers that have a sum of 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 115
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Lesson-3.7-Find-Numbers-That-Make-10-DIG-DEEPER-Practice-question-13

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

There are 7 jump ropes. Your teacher buys some more. Now there are 10. How many jump ropes did your teacher buy?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 116
Model:

Addition equation:

________ jump ropes
Answer:
Number of jump ropes= 7
Teacher bought some ropes and total = 10
Number of ropes teacher brought = 10 – 7 = 3

Addition equation: 7 + 3 = 10

3 jump ropes.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
There are 2 penguins. Some more join them. Now there are 10. How many more penguins joined them?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 117
Model:

Addition equation:

________ penguins
Answer:
Number of penguins at present= 2
Total number of penguins = 10
Number of penguins joined = 10 – 2 = 8

Addition equation: 2 + 8 = 10

8 penguins joined.

Find Numbers That Make 10 Practice 3.7

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 118
8 + _______ = 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Find-Numbers-That-Make-10-Practice-3.7-question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 119
1 + _______ = 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Find-Numbers-That-Make-10-Practice-3.7-question-2

Question 3.
10 + _______ = 10
Answer:
10 + 0 = 10

Question 4.
5 + _______ = 10
Answer:
5 + 5 = 10

Question 5.
_______ + 4 = 10
Answer:
6 + 4 = 10

Question 6.
_______ + 0 = 10
Answer:
10 + 0 = 10

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Match the numbers that have a sum of 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 120
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Find-Numbers-That-Make-10-Practice-3.7-DIG-DEEPER-question-7

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You have 3 baseball cards. Your friend gives you some more. Now you have 10. How many baseball cards did your friend give you?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 121

________ baseball cards
Answer:
Number of baseball cards with me= 3
Total number of baseball cards i have = 10
Number of baseball cards given by my friend = 10 -3 = 7 cards.

Review & Refresh

Find the sum. Then change the order of the addends. Write the new addition problem.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 122
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Find-Numbers-That-Make-10-Practice-3.7-Review-&-Refresh-question-9

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 123
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Find-Numbers-That-Make-10-Practice-3.7-Review-&-Refresh-question-10

Lesson 3.8 Fact Families

Explore and Grow

Use linking cubes to model the equations.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 124

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Complete the fact family.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 125
1 + 8 = ______                          9 – ______ = ______

______ + ______ = ______            9 – ______ = ______
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 125

1 + 8 = 9                         9 – 8 = 1

8 + 1 = 9                         9 – 1 = 8

Apply and Grow: Practice

Complete the fact family.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 126
4 + 2 = ______                              6 – ______ = ______

______ + ______ = ______                6 – ______ = ______
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 126

4 + 2 = 6                             6 – 2 = 4

2 + 4 = 6                             6 – 4 = 2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 127
3 + 6 = ______                                 ______ – 6 = 3

______ + ______ = ______                   ______ – ______ = ______
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 127

3 + 6 = 9                                9 – 6 = 3

6 + 3 = 9                                9 – 3 = 6

Question 4.
7 + 1 = ______                                   ______ – 7 = _______

______ + ______ = ______                    ______ – 1 = ______
Answer:

7 + 1 = 8                                   8 – 7 = 1

1 + 7 = 8                                   8 – 1 = 7

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
Cross out the equation that does not belong in the fact family.
5 + 3 = 8             5 – 3 = 2
3 + 5 = 8             8 – 5 = 3
Answer:
5 + 3 = 8
3 + 5 = 8             8 – 5 = 3

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 3 puppets. Your friend has 7 puppets. How many fewer puppets do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 128
Model:

Equation:

________ fewer puppets
Answer:
Number of puppets i have = 3
Number of puppets my friend have = 7
Difference between puppets between me and my friend:

Equation: 7 – 3 = 4

I have 4 fewer puppets.

Show and Grow

Question 6.
There are 2 spoons and 8 forks. How many more forks are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 129
Model:

Equation:

________ more forks
Answer:
Number of spoons = 2
Number of forks = 8
difference between spoons and folks:
Equation: 8 – 2 = 6

There are 6 more forks.

Fact Families Practice 3.8

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 130
1 + 5 = ______                          6 – ______ = _______

______ + ______ = ______            6 – ______ = ______
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 130

1 + 5 = 6                         6 – 5 = 1

5 + 1 = 6                         6 – 1 = 5

Question 2.
3 + 7 = ______                          ______ – 7 = 3

______ + ______ = ______            ______ – _______ = ______
Answer:

3 + 7 = 10                          10 – 7 = 3

7 + 3 = 10                          10 – 3 = 7

Question 3.
Complete the fact family.
3 + 0 = ______                           ______ – 3 = _______

______ + ______ = ______             ______ – 0 = ______
Answer:

3 + 0 = 3                           3 – 3 = 0

0 + 3 = 3                           3 – 0 = 3

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
Cross out the equation that does not belong in the fact family.
6 + 4 = 10               10 – 6 = 4
4 + 6 = 10                6 – 4 = 2
Answer:
6 + 4 = 10               10 – 6 = 4
4 + 6 = 10

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
There are 7 fish and 2 frogs. How many fewer frogs are there?

________ fewer frogs
Answer:
Number of fish = 7
Number of frogs = 2
Difference between frogs and fish = 7 – 2 = 5.
There are 5 fewer frogs.

Review & Refresh

Circle the objects that holds more.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 131
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Lesson-3.8-Fact-Families-Review-&-Refresh-question-6

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 132
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Lesson-3.8-Fact-Families-Review-&-Refresh-question-7

More Addition and Subtraction Situations Performance Task

Question 1.
You and your friend bake banana bread and raisin bread. You have 8 loaves of bread. 3 of them are raisin bread. Your friend has 10 loaves of bread. 6 of them are banana bread. How many more loaves of banana bread does your friend have than you?

_______ loaf
Answer:
Total number of bread loaves i have = 8.
Number of raisin breads i have = 3.
Number of banana breads i have = 8 – 3 = 5.
Total number of bread loaves my friend have = 10.
Number of banana bread my friend have = 6.
Difference between the banana breads is : 6 – 5 = 1.
My friend have 1 more loaves of banana bread than me.

Question 2.
You give away 3 loaves of banana bread and 3 loaves of raisin bread. Your friend gives away 1 more loaf of bread than you. How many loaves of bread does your friend give away?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 133

_______ loaves
Answer:
Number of banana bread loaves i gave away = 3
Number of raisin bread loaves i gave away = 3
Total number of bread loaves i gave away = 3 + 3 = 6.
The number of bread loaf my friend gave away is 1 more then = 6 + 1 = 7.
My friend gave away 7 loaves of bread.

Question 3.
You and your friend make boxes of muffins. Does each box have the same number of muffins?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 134
Yes              No
Answer:
Number of muffins in the boxes i make = 3 + 7 = 10.
Number of muffins in the boxes my friend make = 5 + 4 = 9.
Difference between the muffins = 10 – 9 = 1
NO  the boxes does not have same number of muffins.

More Addition and Subtraction Situations Chapter Practice

Solve Add To Problems with Start Unknown Homework & Practice 3.1

Question 1.
? + 4 = 6
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 135
_______ + 4 = 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Chapter-Practice-Solve-Add-To-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Homework-&-Practice-3.1-Question-1
2 + 4 = 6

Question 2.
? + 2 = 8
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 136
_______ + 2 = 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Chapter-Practice-Solve-Add-To-Problems-with-Start-Unknown-Homework-&-Practice-3.1-Question-2
6 + 2 = 8

Solve Take From Problems with Change Unknown Homework & Practice 3.2

Question 3.
5 – ? = 4
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 137
5 – ______ = 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations- Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change-Unknown-Homework-&-Practice-3.2-question-3
5 – 1 = 4

Question 4.
7 – ? = 7
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 138
7 – ______ = 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations- Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change-Unknown-Homework-&-Practice-3.2-question-4
7 – 0 = 7

Solve Take From Problems with Start Unknown Homework & Practice 3.3

Question 5.
? – 6 = 3
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 139
Think 6 + 3 = ______.
So, ______ – 6 = 3.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations- Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change-Unknown-Homework-&-Practice-3.3-question-5

Think 6 + 3 = 9.
So, 9 – 6 = 3.

Question 6.
? – 3 = 1
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 140
Think 3 + 1 = ______.
So, ______ – 3 = 1.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations- Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change-Unknown-Homework-&-Practice-3.3-question-6

Think 3 + 1 = 4.
So, 4 – 3 = 1.

Question 7.
MP Structure
Circle the equation that matches the model.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 141
6 – 6 = 0 4 – 2 = 2 6 – 2 = 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations- Solve-Take-From-Problems-with-Change-Unknown-Homework-&-Practice-3.3-MP-Structure-question-7

Compare Problems: Bigger Unknown Homework & Practice 3.4

Question 8.
Your friend has 3 stickers. You have 4 more than your friend. How many stickers do you have?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 142
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Compare-Problems-Bigger-Unknown-Homework-&-Practice-3.4-Question-8

Compare Problems: Smaller Unknown Homework & Practice 3.5

Question 9.
Your friend has 5 stuffed animals. You have 2 fewer than your friend. How many stuffed animals do you have?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 143
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Compare-Problems-Smaller-Unknown-Homework-&-Practice-3.5-Question-9

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life Your friend has 4 dogs and 2 cots. You have I fewer pet than your friend. How many pets do you have?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 144
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Compare-Problems-Smaller-Unknown-Homework-&-Practice-3.5-Modeling-Real-Life-Question-10

True or False Homework & Practice 3.6

Is the equation true or false?

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 145
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-True-or-False-Homework-&-Practice-3.6-question-11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 146
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-True-or-False-Homework-&-Practice-3.6-question-12

Question 13.
MP Number Sense
Circle all of the equations that are true.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 147
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-True-or-False-Homework-&-Practice-3.6-MP-Number-Sense-question-13

Find the number That Make 10 Homework & Practice 3.7

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 148
3 + _______ = 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Find-the-number-That-Make-10-Homework-&-Practice-3.7-question-14

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 149
6 + _______ = 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Find-the-number-That-Make-10-Homework-&-Practice-3.7-question-15

Fact Families Homework & Practice 3.8

Question 16.
Complete the fact family.
8 + 1 = _______                         ________ – 8 = 1
________ + _______ = _______      _______ – _______ = ______
Answer:
8 + 1 = 9                         9 – 8 = 1
1 + 8 = 9                         9 – 1 = 8

Question 17.
Modeling Real Life
There are 2 slides and 6 swings on a playground. How many more swings are there?

__________ more swings
Answer:
Number of slides = 2
Number of swings = 6
Number of more swings = 6 – 2 = 4 more swings.

More Addition and Subtraction Situations Cumulative Practice 1 – 3

Question 1.
Shade the circle next to the answer.
4 + 4 = ______
○ 4
○ 6
○ 9
○ 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Cumulative-Practice-1-3-Question-1

Question 2.
Shade the circle next to the addition equation that you can use to solve 8 – 3.
○ 8 + 3 = 11
○ 3 + 5 = 8
○ 1 + 8 = 9
○ 5 + 2 = 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Cumulative-Practice-1-3-Question-2

Question 3.
Circle the equation that matches the bar model.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 150
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Cumulative-Practice-1-3-question-3

Question 4.
You take 10 pictures. Your friend takes 3 pictures. Shade the circle next to the equation that shows how many more pictures you take.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 151
○ 3 + 3 = 6
○ 10 – 3 = 7
○ 10 + 3 = 13
○ 3 – 1 = 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Cumulative-Practice-1-3-Question-4

Question 5.
Shade the circle next to the number that completes the addition equation.
________ + 7 = 9
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 152
○ 1
○ 2
○ 3
○ 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Cumulative-Practice-1-3-Question-5

Question 6.
There are 6 Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 153.
3 more Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 153 join them.
How many Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 153 are there now?
_________ + __________ = _________ Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 153
Answer:
Number of Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 153 = 6
Total number of Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 153 = 6 + 3 = 9 Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 153

Question 7.
Is each equation true or false?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 154
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Cumulative-Practice-1-3-question-7

Question 8.
Use the picture to write a subtraction equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 155
________ – 0 = _______
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 155
5 – 0 = 5

Question 9.
You have 8 beads. 5 are orange. The rest are blue. Shade the circles next to the equations that describe the beads.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 156
○ 3 + 5 = 8
○ 8 – 2 = 6
○ 4 + 4 = 8
○ 8 – 5 = 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Cumulative-Practice-1-3-Question-9

Question 10.
Use the numbers shown to write two equations.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 157
Answer:
Given   3     8     5
3 + 5 = 8      5 + 3 = 8

Question 11.
Shade the circle next to the equation that does not belong in the fact family.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 158
○ 3 + 1 = 4
○ 4 – 3 = 1
○ 1 + 3 = 4
○ 3 – 1= 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Cumulative-Practice-1-3-Question-11

Question 12.
There are 3 rabbits. 3 more join them. Shade the circle next to the equation that shows how many rabbits there are in all.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations 159
○ 3 + 2 = 5
○ 3 + 4 = 7
○ 4 + 1 = 5
○ 3 + 3 = 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-3-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-More-Addition-and-Subtraction-Situations-Cumulative-Practice-1-3-Question-12

Conclusion:

Hope you are all satisfied with the answers provided in the Bigideas Math Grade 1 Chapter 3 More Addition and Subtraction Situations. Get different methods to solve the problems in our Big Ideas Math Solution Key 1st Grade Chapter 3 More Addition & Subtraction Situations. Thus, the students who are interested to learn the basics quickly can follow the methods given here.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 6

Hello Students!!! Are you looking for Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within hundred Answers? If yes, then our guess is correct. Here we have given a detailed explanation for every concept of BIM 2nd Grade 6th Chapter Fluently Subtract within 100 Book. Students are advised to practice all the topics covered in this chapter to score good marks in the exam. Also, download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 Answer Key PDF for making a better preparation plan.

Big Ideas Math Book 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100

This free Big Ideas Math Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 Solutions helps the students to complete their homework and assignments easily. Refer to Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 Answer Key to prove yourself good in the practice tests and surprise tests. After solving this chapter, the students can be able to identify subtraction patterns, show regrouping, model subtraction problems, and explain which strategy is used to find the difference of numbers.

The various topics included in this answer key are Fluently Subtract within 100 Vocabulary, Model and Regroup to Subtract, Use Models to Subtract a One-Digit Number from a Two-Digit number, Use Models to Subtract Two-Digit Numbers, Use Models to Subtract Two-Digit Numbers, Use Addition to Check Subtraction, Practice Two-Digit Subtraction, and More Problem Solving: Subtraction. The performance task included at the end will help you to check your skills. As per your convenience, we have given the links according to the topics given in the textbook. Click on the link and start your preparation.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Model and Regroup to Subtract

Lesson: 2 Use Models to Subtract a One-Digit Number from a Two-Digit numbers

Lesson: 3 Use Models to Subtract Two-Digit Numbers

Lesson: 4 Use Models to Subtract Two-Digit Numbers

Lesson: 5 Use Addition to Check Subtraction 

Lesson: 6 Practice Two-Digit Subtraction

Lesson: 7 More Problem Solving: Subtraction

Performance Task

Fluently Subtract within 100 Vocabulary

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 1
Organize It
Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 1.1

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Organize-it

Define It

Match.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 2

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Define-it

Lesson 6.1 Model and Regroup to Subtract

Explore and Grow

Model each problem. Make quick sketches to show how you found the difference.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 3
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 3.1

Compare your quick sketches. What step did you use to find 21 − 6 that you did not use to find 19 − 6?

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 4

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.1-Model- Regroup – Subtract-Explore-Grow.
The step in 21 − 6 that you did not use to find 19 − 6 is regrouping as 6 can be easily subtract from 9 but whereas 6 cannot be subtracted from 1 (21) so we need to regroup to subtract.

Show and Grow

Use models to subtract. Draw to show your work.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 5

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.1-Model- Regroup – Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-1

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use models to subtract. Draw to show your work.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 6
Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 6.1

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.1-Model- Regroup – Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 7

Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.1-Model- Regroup – Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 8

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.1-Model- Regroup – Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-4

Question 5.
Number Sense
Which numbers can you subtract from 44 without regrouping?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 9

Answer:
3 and 4.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 42 craft sticks. You use 8 of them. How many craft sticks are not used?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 10
Subtraction equation:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 10.1

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.1-Model- Regroup – Subtract-Think-Grow

Show and Grow

Question 6.
There are 74 people in a theater. 7 of them leave. How many people are left?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 12

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.1-Model- Regroup-Subtract- Show-Grow-Question-6
People left from theater are 67.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 50 straws. You use some of them for a project. There are 44 left. How many straws did you use?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 13

Answer:
Number of straws = 50.
Number of straws left = 44.
Number of used straws = 50 – 44. = 6 straws.

Model and Regroup to Subtract Homework & Practice 6.1

Use models to subtract. Draw to show your work.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 14

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- Model-Regroup-Subtract-Homework-Practice 6.1 -Question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 15

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- Model-Regroup-Subtract-Homework-Practice 6.1 -Question-2

Question 3.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Newton correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 16

Answer:
No, The answer is 22. after regrouping one from tens to ones . then in tens we will have 2 tens not 3 tens.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
You have 26 magnets. You put 9 of them on your refrigerator. How many magnets are not on the refrigerator?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 17

Answer:
Number of magnets = 26.
Number of magnets on refrigerator = 9.
Number of magnets not on refrigerator = 26 – 9 = 15.

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 83 cotton balls. You use some of them. There are 76 left. How many cotton balls do you use?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 18

Answer:

Number of cotton balls = 83
Number of cotton balls left = 76.
Number of cotton balls used = 83 – 76 = 7.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 19

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Model-Regroup-Subtract-Homework-Practice-6.1-Question-6

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 20

Answer:

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 21
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Model-Regroup-Subtract-Homework-Practice-6.1-Question-8

Lesson 6.2 Use Models to Subtract a One-Digit Number from a Two-Digit numbers

Explore and Grow

Make a quick sketch to find 41 − 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 22

How do you regroup 4 tens and 1 one to subtract 3?
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________

Answer:

We regroup one from tens to ones place then one tens will be subtracted from 4 tens so we have 3 tens remaining and in ones place we added 10 ones + 1 ones earlier .total 11 ones will be in ones place.Later we need to subtract 3 ones from 11 ones so we have 8 ones remaining after subtraction.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
31 – 4 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 23

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.2- Use -Models –to- Subtract- One-Digit Number- from- Two-Digit numbers-Show-Grow-Question-1

Question 2.
7 – 5 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 24

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.2- Use -Models –to- Subtract- One-Digit Number- from- Two-Digit numbers-Show-Grow-Question-2

Question 3.
88 – 9 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 25

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.2- Use -Models –to- Subtract- One-Digit Number- from- Two-Digit numbers-Show-Grow-Question-3

Question 4.
63 – 2 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 26

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.2- Use -Models –to- Subtract- One-Digit Number- from- Two-Digit numbers-Show-Grow-Question-4

Question 5.
90 – 8 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 27

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.2- Use -Models –to- Subtract- One-Digit Number- from- Two-Digit numbers-Show-Grow-Question-5

Question 6.
Number Sense
What one-digit numbers can you subtract from 24 without regrouping? Explain.
Answer:
The one digit which is less or equal to 4 can be used to subtract without regrouping are 1,2,3 and 4.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You catch 33 fish. You keep the state limit of 25. How many fish do you release?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 28

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.2- Use -Models –to- Subtract- One-Digit Number- from- Two-Digit numbers-Think-Grow

Show and Grow

Question 7.
The temperature this morning was 72 degrees. This afternoon, it is 67 degrees. How much did the temperature drop?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 28.1

Answer:
Temperature in the morning= 72 degrees.
Temperature in the Afternoon= 67 degrees.
The Temperature drop= 72 – 67 =5 degrees.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
You have a bowl of strawberries. You eat 7 of them. There are 19 left. How many strawberries were in the bowl to start?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 29

Answer:
Number of strawberries left =19
Number of strawberries eaten = 7.
Total Number of strawberries = 19 + 7 = 26 strawberries.

Use Models to Subtract a One-Digit Number from a Two-Digit numbers Homework & Practice 6.2

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 30\

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-to-Subtract- One-Digit Number- from -Two-Digit numbers- Homework - Practice 6.2-Question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 31

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-to-Subtract- One-Digit Number- from -Two-Digit numbers- Homework - Practice 6.2-Question-2

Question 3.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Descartes correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 32

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-to-Subtract- One-Digit Number- from -Two-Digit numbers- Homework - Practice 6.2-Question-3

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
Descartes scores 8 more points than Newton. How many points did Newton score?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 33

Answer:
Score of Descartes = 8 +Score of newton.
Score of Descartes = 97.
Score of newton = 97 – 8 =89.

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
There are some piñata toys on the ground. 6 of your friends each pick 1 up. There are17 left. How many toys were there to start?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 34

Answer:
Total pinata toys picked by friends = 6 (6 friends picked 1 so 6 x 1 = 6 toys).
Toys left =17.
Total toys = 17 + 6 =23.

Review & Refresh

Break apart an addend to find the sum.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 35

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use Models-Subtract- One-Digit Number- Two-Digit numbers-Homework-Practice- 6.2-Question-6

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 36

Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use Models-Subtract- One-Digit Number- Two-Digit numbers-Homework-Practice- 6.2-Question-7

Lesson 6.3 Use Models to Subtract Two-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Model the problem. Make a quick sketch to find 33 − 17.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 37
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 37.1

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- Lesson 6.3-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit-Numbers-Explore-Grow

Show and Grow

Question 1.
55 – 18 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 38

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.3-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Show-Grow-Question-3

Question 2.
21 – 18 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 39

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- Lesson 6.3-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit-Numbers-Show-Grow-Question-2

Question 3.
44 – 29 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 40

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.3-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Show-Grow-Question-3

Question 4.
60 – 32 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 41

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.3-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Show-Grow-Question-4

Question 5.
75 – 21 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 42

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.3-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Show-Grow-Question-5

Question 6.
Number Sense
Use two of the numbers to write and solve a subtraction problem that requires regrouping
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 43

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.3-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Show-Grow-Question-6

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 68 flowers. You give 17 to Newton. Then you give 14 to Descartes. How many flowers do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 44
Subtraction problems:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 45

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.3-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life

Show and Grow

Question 7.
There are 32 pretzels. You eat 11 of them. Your friend eats 12 of them. How many pretzels are left?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 46

Answer:
Number of pretzels = 32.
Number of pretzels Eaten by me = 11.
Number of pretzels Eaten by my friend = 12.
Number of pretzels left = 32 – 11 – 12 = 9

Question 8.
Can you solve the problems on this page using addition and subtraction? Think: How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 47

Answer:
Yes

Use Models to Subtract Two-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 6.3

Question 1.
84 – 60 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 48

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models –Subtract- Two-Digit Numbers- Homework-Practice 6.3-Question-1

Question 2.
40 – 15 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 49

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models –Subtract- Two-Digit Numbers- Homework-Practice 6.3-Question-2

Question 3.
Number Sense
Which numbers can you subtract from 55 without regrouping?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 50

Answer:
Numbers that can subtract from 55 without regrouping are 15 , 33 and 24.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
You and your friend have 38 cups of lemonade in all. You sell 14 cups. Your friend sells 16. How many cups are left?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 51

Answer:
Total Number of Lemonade cups= 38.
Number of lemonade cups sold by me = 14.
Number of lemonade cups sold by my friend =16.
Number of cups left = 38 – 14 – 16 = 8.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
Your principal has 75 awards. She gives 25 to your class. Then she gives 34 to your friend’s class. How many awards are left?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 52

Answer:
Number of Total Awards = 75.
Number of Awards given to my class = 25.
Number of Awards given to my friends class = 34.
Number of Awards left = 75 – 25 – 34 = 16.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
A bookcase has 5 shelves. There are 3 plants on each shelf. How many plants are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 53
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 54
Answer:
Each shelf has 3 plants
Total plants = 3 + 3 + 3 + 3 + 3= 15 Plants.

Use Models to Subtract Two-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 6.4

Make quick sketches to find each difference.

31 – 3 =?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 55

Answer:
31 – 23 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 56

How are the problems the same? How are they different?
_______________________________________
_______________________________________
_______________________________________

Answer:
The Minuend is the same for both the problems that is 31.
The Subtrahend are different for both the problems that is 3 and 23 .
Even the difference of both the problems are different that is 23 and 3 .

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4-2

Show and Grow

Question 1.
52 – 19 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 57

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4-Show-Grow-Question-1

Question 2.
46 – 9 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 58

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4-Show-Grow-Question-2

Question 3.
60 – 21 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 59

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4-Show-Grow-Question-3

Question 4.
66 – 8 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 60

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4-Show-Grow-Question-4

Question 5.
84 – 2 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 61

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4-Show-Grow-Question-5

Question 6.
65 – 38 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 62

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4-Show-Grow-Question-6

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 7.
58 – 22 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 63

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-7

Question 8.
33 – 4 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 64

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-8

Question 9.
22 – 15 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 65

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-9

Question 10.
70 – 60 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 66

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-10

Question 11.
43 – 26 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 67

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-11

Question 12.
95 – 4 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 68

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-12

Question 13.
Number Sense
Use the given numbers to complete the problem.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 69

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-13

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
Subtract a one-digit number from a two-digit number to complete the problem.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 70

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-14

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You pick 19 yellow flowers and 24 purple flowers. You give 8 flowers away. How many flowers do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 71
Step 1: Find the total number of flowers you picked.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 72

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework-Practice 6.4- Think-Grow-Step1

Step 2: Subtract the number of flowers you give away from your result in Step 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 73

Answers:
8 Flowers.

Show and Grow

Question 15.
You bake 36 blueberry muffins and 36 banana nut muffins. You sell 47 muffins. How many muffins do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 74

Answer:
Number of Blueberry muffins baked = 36.
Number of banana nut muffins baked = 36.
Total number of muffins = 36 + 36 = 72.
Number of muffins sold = 47.
Number of muffins left = 72 – 47 = 25.

Question 16.
There are 54 ladybugs. 7 fly away. Then 25 join. How many ladybugs are there now?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 75

Answer:
Number of ladybugs = 54.
Number of bugs flew away = 7.
Number of bugs joined = 25.
Total number of bugs left = 54 – 7 + 25 =22.

Use Models to Subtract Two-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 6.4

Question 1.
25 – 7 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 76

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models- Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework -Practice 6.4-Question-1

Question 2.
65 – 35 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 77

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models- Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework -Practice 6.4-Question-2

Question 3.
33 – 29 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 78

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models- Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework -Practice 6.4-Question-3

Question 4.
80 – 53 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 79

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models- Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework -Practice 6.4-Question-4

Question 5.
92 – 47 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 80

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models- Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework -Practice 6.4-Question-5

Question 6.
56 – 4 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 81

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models- Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework -Practice 6.4-Question-6

Question 7.
Writing
Write and solve a subtraction problem using 2 two-digit numbers. Write a story to match.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 82

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use-Models- Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Homework -Practice 6.4-Question-7
From the above figure we observe that 86 is the minuend and 24 is the subtrahend.The difference is 62.
The 8 tens from minuend  have to subtract 2 tens from the subtrahend we get 6 tens in the difference . We have 6 ones in the minuend and we have to subtract 4 ones from subtrahend we get 2 ones in difference.
Therefore the difference is 6 tens and 2 ones = 62.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You fill up 17 large water balloons and 24 small water balloons. You break 26 balloons. How many water balloons do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 83

Answer:
Number of large water balloons = 17
Number of small water balloons = 24
Total number of balloons = 17 + 24 =41
Number of balloons broken = 26.
Number of balloons Remaining = 41 – 26 =15

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
You have 45 rings. You throw 28 of them. You earn a bonus and get 15 more rings to throw. How many rings do you have now?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 84

Answer:
Total Number of Rings = 45.
Number of rings threw = 28.
Number of Remaining Rings = 45 – 28 = 17.
Number of rings earned as Bonus = 15.
Total Number of Rings = 17 + 15 = 32.

Review & Refresh

Question 10.
How can you make a 10 to find 5 + 8?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 85
Answer:
10 + 3

Lesson 6.5 Use Addition to Check Subtraction

Write the equation shown by each model.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 86

How are the equations related?
__26 – ? =43____________________
__26 + 17 = ?____________________

Explain how you can check whether 24 – 13 = 11 is correct.
Answer:
Here when we add 13 + 11 we should get 24 then the answer is correct.

Show and Grow

Find the difference. Use addition to check your answer.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 88

Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 89

Answer:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the Difference. Use addition to check your answer.

Question 3.
52 – 27 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 90

Answer:

Question 4.
76 – 58 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 91

Answer:

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 92

Answer:

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 93

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- Lesson-6.5-Use-Addition-Check-Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-6

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 94

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- Lesson-6.5-Use-Addition-Check-Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-7

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 95

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.5-Use-Addition-to-Check-Subtraction- Apply-Grow- Practice-Question-8

Question 9.
Reasoning
Newton uses 16 + 37 to check his answer to a subtraction problem. What two subtraction problems could he have solved?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 96

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson-6.5-Use-Addition-Check-Subtraction-Show-Grow-Reasoning.jpg

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A joke book has 96 jokes. 58 are knock-knock jokes. The rest are riddles. How many riddles are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 97
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 98

Answer:
The rest riddles are 38.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- Lesson-6.5-Use-Addition-Check-Subtraction-Think-Grow

Show and Grow

Question 10.
A museum has 71 fossils. 47 are dinosaur fossils. The rest are fish fossils. How many fish fossils are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 99

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- Lesson-6.5-Use-Addition-Check-Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-10

Question 11.
There are 27 more countries in Europe than in North America. There are 50 countries in Europe. How many countries are there in North America?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 100
Answer:
Countries in Europe = 50.
Countries in North America = 50 – 27 ( europe has 27 more than north america).
= 23 .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- Lesson-6.5-Use-Addition-Check-Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-11

Use Addition to Check Subtraction Homework & Practice 6.5

Find the difference. Use addition to check your answer.

Question 1.
44 – 21 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 101

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use–Addition-Check-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-6.5-Question-1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 102

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use–Addition-Check-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-6.5-Question-2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 103

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use–Addition-Check-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-6.5-Question-3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 104

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use–Addition-Check-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-6.5-Question-4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 105

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use–Addition-Check-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-6.5-Question-5

Question 6.
Number Sense
Descartes subtracts to find 36 − 19. Which addition equation can he use to check his answer?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 106

Answer:
36 -19 = 17
19 + 17 = 36

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
A theme park has 62 rides. 45 of them are in the amusement park. The rest are in the water park. How many rides are in the water park?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 107

Answer:
Number of rides in Theme park= 62
Number of rides in amusement park =45.
left over rides take place in water park
Number of rides in water park = 62 -45 = 17
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use -Addition –to-Check-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-6.5-Question-7

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
There are 58 more books in a library than in a classroom. There are 94 books in the library. How many books are in the classroom?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 108

Answer:
Number of books in library = 94.
Number of books in class room = 94 – 58( 58 more books are there in classroom)
Number of books in class room = 36.

Review & Refresh

Use compensation to solve.

Question 9.
18 + 44 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 109

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use -Addition –to-Check-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-6.5-Question-9

Question 10.
63 + 27 = _____

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Use -Addition –to-Check-Subtraction-Homework-Practice-6.5-Question-10

Lesson 6.6 Practice Two-Digit Subtraction

Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 110

Work with a partner. Choose different strategies to find 76 − 29.

Compare your strategy to your partner’s. Are your answers the same? Which strategy do you prefer? Why?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 111

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6-Practice-Two-Digit-Subtraction

I prefer Strategy – 2 as we can check the answer, which helps us to know whether the answer is correct or wrong.
Whatever the strategy may be the answer will be the same.

Show and Grow

Use any strategy to find the difference.

Question 1.
52 – 25 = _____

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-1

Question 2.
78 – 56 = _____

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-2

Question 3.
61 – 33 = ___

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-3

Question 4.
83 – 37 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-4

Question 5.
72 – 49 = __-
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-5

Show and Grow

Question 1.
52 − 25 = __

Question 4.
83 − 37 = __

Question 5.
72 – 49 = __

Question 6.
45 – 39 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-6

Question 7.
69 – 58 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-7

Question 8.
94 – 45 = __
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-8

Question 9.
86 – 48 = __
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-9

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use any strategy to find the difference.

Question 10.
95 – 38 = __
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction- Apply-Grow-Practice -Question-10

Question 11.
66 – 47 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction- Apply-Grow-Practice -Question-11

Question 12.
58 – 6 = __
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction- Apply-Grow-Practice -Question-12

Question 13.
81 – 35 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction- Apply-Grow-Practice -Question-13

Question 14.
43 – 17 = ___
Answer:

Question 15.
37 – 8 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction- Apply-Grow-Practice -Question-15

Question 16.
28 – 19 = ___
Answer:

Question 17.
72 – 30 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction- Apply-Grow-Practice -Question-17

Question 18.
82 – 4 = __
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction- Apply-Grow-Practice -Question-18

Question 19.
DIG DEEPER!
Fill in the missing digits.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 112

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction- Apply-Grow-Practice -Question-19

Question 20.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Descartes correct? Explain
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 200

Answer:
Yes, You can verify your answer by adding 18 + 23 to get 41. if you wont 41 as your answer the sum is wrong.
18 + 23 = 41.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Is there a greater difference between the number of guests on Saturday and Sunday or on Sunday and Monday?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 114

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction- Think-Grow

Show and Grow

Question 21.
Is there a greater difference between the number of bagels sold on Sunday and Monday or on Monday and Tuesday?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 115

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.6- Practice- Two-Digit –Subtraction- Show-Grow-Question-21

Practice Two-Digit Subtraction Homework & Practice 6.6

Use any strategy to find the difference.

Question 1.
34 – 26 = __

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Practice-Two-Digit- Subtraction-Homework- Practice- 6.6 -Question-1

Question 2.
75 – 47 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Practice-Two-Digit- Subtraction-Homework- Practice- 6.6 -Question-2

Question 3.
96 – 48 = __
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Practice-Two-Digit- Subtraction-Homework- Practice- 6.6 -Question-3

Question 4.
51 – 21 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Practice-Two-Digit- Subtraction-Homework- Practice- 6.6 -Question-4

Question 5.
23 – 16 = ___

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Practice-Two-Digit- Subtraction-Homework- Practice- 6.6 -Question-5

Question 6.
47 – 8 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Practice-Two-Digit- Subtraction-Homework- Practice- 6.6 -Question-6

Question 7.
25 – 3 = ___
Answer:

Question 8.
87 – 69 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Practice-Two-Digit- Subtraction-Homework- Practice- 6.6 -Question-8

Question 9.
48 – 29 = ___
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Practice-Two-Digit- Subtraction-Homework- Practice- 6.6 -Question-9

Question 10.
Number Sense
Find each missing number.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 116

Answer:

Question 11.
Structure
Solve 31 − 14 two different ways.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Practice-Two-Digit- Subtraction-Homework- Practice- 6.6 -Question-11

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
Is there a greater difference between the number of animals adopted in December and January or in January and February?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 117

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Practice-Two-Digit- Subtraction-Homework- Practice- 6.6 -Question-12

Review & Refresh

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 118

Answer:
2 + 8 =10
10 – 8 = 2

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 119

Answer:
5 + 6 = 11
11 – 6 = 5

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 120
Answer:
9 + 8 = 17
17 – 8 = 9.

Lesson 6.7 More Problem Solving: Subtraction

Explore and Grow

Model the story

Newton has 34 balloons. 18 fly away. How many balloons does Newton have left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 121Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 122
Answer:
Number of balloons = 34
number of balloons flew=18
Number of balloons left = 34 – 18 =16

Show and Grow

Question 1.
There are 27 more harmonicas than drums in a music room. There are 55 harmonicas. How many drums are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 123
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 124

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.7-More-Problem-Solving- Subtraction-Show-Grow

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
There are 71 fish crackers. You eat 29 of them. Your friend eats 28. How many fish crackers are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 125
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 126

Answer:
Number of Fish crackers = 71
Number of fish crackers eaten by me = 29
Number of fish crackers eaten by my friend = 28.
Number of fish crackers left = 71- 29 – 28 =14

Question 3.
Newton solves 16 more math problems than Descartes. Newton solves 34 math problems. How many math problems does Descartes solve?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 127
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 128

Answer:
Problems solved by Newton =34.
Problem solved by Descartes = 34 – 16( as newton solves 16 problems more)
Problem solved by Descartes = 18

Question 4.
Number Sense
You have 78 tokens. Your friend gives you 14 more. You use 35 tokens. Use the given numbers to find how many tokens you have now.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 129
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 130

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.7-More-Problem-Solving- Subtraction-Show-Grow-Question-4

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You see 20 elephants on a safari. You see 7 fewer giraffes than elephants. Then 5 of the giraffes leave the group. How many giraffes are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 131
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 131.1

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-Lesson 6.7-More-Problem-Solving- Subtraction-Think-Grow

Show and Grow

Question 5.
Your friend has 54 blocks. You have 18 fewer blocks than your friend. You use 29 blocks to make a tower. How many blocks do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 132

Answer:
Number of Blocks with my friend = 54
Number of Blocks with me = 54 – 18 = 36
Number of blocks used by me to make a tower = 29.
Number of blocks left = 36 – 29 = 7 .

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
You had 19 almonds. You ate some. There are 11 left. Your friend ate 3 fewer almonds than you. How many almonds did your friend eat?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 133

Answer:
Number of Almonds = 19.
Number of Almonds left = 11.
Number of Almonds eaten = 19 – 11 = 8.
Number of Almonds eaten by me = 8 – 3 = 5.
Number of Almonds eaten by my friend = 3.

More Problem Solving: Subtraction Homework & Practice 6.7

Question 1.
Some kids are at a trampoline park. 24 leave. There are 57 left. How many kids were there to start?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 134

Answer:
Total Number of kids at a Trampoline park = X
Number of kids left the park = 24.
Number of kids remaining in the park = 57.
Total number of kids = 24 + 57 =81.

Question 2.
You have 62 dollars saved. You spend 37 dollars on a video game. Then you give 16 dollars to your friend. How many dollars do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 135

Answer:
Total Number of Dollars = 62.
Number of dollars spend on video game = 37.
Number of dollars given to my friend = 16 .
Number of dollars left = 62 – 37 – 16 =9 .

Question 3.
Structure
You have 50 toothpicks. Your friend has 30 fewer toothpicks than you. Which picture shows how many toothpicks you and your friend have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 136
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 137

Answer:
Picture 2 is correct = 70 Toothpicks.
Number of tooth picks with me = 50.
Number of tooth picks with my friend = 50 – 30 = 20.
Total number of tooth picks = 50 + 20 = 70.

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
A museum has 12 dinosaur exhibits and some art exhibits. There are 34 exhibits in all. Then 3 more art exhibits are added. How many art exhibits are there now?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 138

Answer:
Number of Dinosaur Exhibits = 12.
Total Number of Exhibits = 34
Number of Art Exhibits = 34 – 12 = 22
Number of Art Exhibits added = 3.
Total Number of Art Exhibits =22 + 3 = 25 .

Review & Refresh

Break apart the addends to find the sum.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 139

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-More-Problem-Solving- Subtraction-Homework -Practice 6.7-Question-5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 140

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-More-Problem-Solving- Subtraction-Homework -Practice 6.7-Question-6

Fluently Subtract within 100 Performance Task

Question 1.
Your class makes 53 paper snowflakes to decorate your classroom.
a. Your group makes 16 of them. How many snowflakes does the other group make?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 141

Answer:
Total Number of paper snowflakes = 53.
Number of snow flakes made by my group =16.
Number of snowflakes made by other group = 53 – 16 = 37.

b. Your teacher hangs 49 of the snowflakes from the ceiling in an array with 7 equal rows. How many columns of snowflakes are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 143

Answer:
Total Number snowflakes = 49.
Number of rows = 7.
Number of Columns = 49 ÷ 7 = 7.

c. Your teacher wants to hang one more equal row of snowflakes. Are there enough snowflakes? If so, how many extra snowflakes are there? If not, how many more snowflakes are needed?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 144

Answer:
Number of snowflakes = 49.
One more row means 8 th row = 7 more snowflakes = 49 + 7 =56 snowflakes.
56 snowflakes are required we have only 49 snowflakes.
Therefore , more 7 snowflakes are required

Question 2.
Another class makes 75 paper snowflakes. 29 are white and some are blue. They make some more blue snowflakes. Now they have 61 blue snowflakes. How many more blue snowflakes did they make?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 145
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 146

Answer:
Number of snowflakes = 75.
Number of white snowflakes = 29 .
Number of blue snowflakes = 75 – 29 = 46 .
Number of blue snowflakes made again = 61.
Total Number of Blue snowflakes = 61 + 46 = 107 .

Fluently Subtract within 100 Activity

To Play: Use Solve and Cover: Subtraction Cards. Place a Difference Card face up on each box. Place the stack of Problem Cards face down. Players take turns. On your turn, flip over a card from the stack. Solve the problem. Place the card on the difference. Play until all of the differences are covered.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 147

Fluently Subtract within 100 Chapter Practice 6

6.1 Model and Regroup to Subtract

Question 1.
Use Models to Subtract. Draw to show your work.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 148
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 149

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-6.1-Model-Regroup- Subtract

6.2 Use Models to Subtract a One-Digit Number from a Two-Digit Number

Question 2.
60 – 8 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 150

Answer:Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-6.2 Use-Models-Subtract-One-Digit Number-Two-Digit Number-Question-2

Question 3.
74 – 3 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 151

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-6.2 Use-Models-Subtract-One-Digit Number-Two-Digit Number-Question-3

6.3 Use Models to Subtract Two-Digit Numbers

Question 4.
45 – 38 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 152

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- 6.3-Use-Model-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Question-4

Question 5.
74 – 27 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 153

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- 6.3-Use-Model-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Question-5

Question 6.
Number Sense
Use two of the numbers to write and solve a subtraction problem that requires regrouping.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 154

Answer:
The two numbers that requires regrouping for subtraction are 63 – 45 = 18

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- 6.3-Use-Model-Subtract-Two-Digit Numbers-Question-6

6.4 Subtract from a Two-Digit Number

Question 7.
93 – 50 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 155

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-6.4-Subtract-from-a-Two-Digit-Number-Question-7

Question 8.
57 – 28 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 156

Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-6.4-Subtract-from-a-Two-Digit-Number-Question-8

Question 9.
67 – 9 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 157

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-6.4-Subtract-from-a-Two-Digit-Number-Question-9

6.5 Use Addition to Check Subtraction

Find the difference. Use addition to check your answer.

Question 10.
64 – 27 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 158

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- 6.5-Use –Addition-Check- Subtraction-Question-10

Question 11.
86 – 36 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 159

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- 6.5-Use –Addition-Check- Subtraction-Question-11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 160

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- 6.5-Use –Addition-Check- Subtraction-Question-12

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 161
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- 6.5-Use –Addition-Check- Subtraction-Question-13

6.6 Practice Two-Digit Subtraction

Use any strategy to find the difference.

Question 14.
55 – 37 = ___
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- 6.6-Practice-Two-Digit-Subtraction-Question-14

Question 15.
60 – 20 = __
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- 6.6—Practice-Two-Digit-Subtraction-Question-15

Question 16.
39 – 3 = __
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100- 6.6—Practice-Two-Digit-Subtraction-Question-16

6.7 More Problem Solving: Subtraction

Question 17.
Newton has some BINGO chips. He gives 25 of them away. He has 28 left. How many chips did he have to start?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 162
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 162.1

Answer:

Question 18.
Number Sense
You have 35 balls. You use 18 of them. You win a bonus and get 10 more balls. Use the given numbers to find how many balls you have now.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 163
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 164

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-6-Fluently-Subtract-100-6.7-More-Problem-Solving-Subtraction- Question-18

Question 19.
Modeling Real Life
A petting zoo has 27 sheep and some goats. There are 41 animals in all. Then 16 more goats are added. How many goats are there now?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 165
Answer:
Total Animals = 41.
The number of sheep = 27.
A number of goat = ?
The number of goats = Total Animals – Number of sheep.
= 41 – 27 = 14
The number of goats added =16.
Total Number of goats= 14 + 16 = 30 goats.

Big Ideas Math 2nd Grade 6th Chapter Fluently Subtract within 100 Solution Key Pdf

The answers given in the Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 Answer Key are prepared by the math experts. So, download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 6 Fluently Subtract within 100 pdf for free of cost and kick start your preparation. Learn all the chapters of Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 by keeping in touch with our site.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas is the best source for students. Students can follow the step-by-step procedure to solve the problems. We have given a detailed explanation for every problem. Also, we included real-time examples to make the student’s preparation perfect. Get the free pdf Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas to learn offline. Important notes provided for every concept where quick preparation is possible. So, immediately, begin your practice now and strengthen your knowledge.

Big Ideas 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas Math Book Answer Key

Easily improve your problem-solving skills with the help of Big Ideas Math Book 4th Grade Answer Key Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas. We have also included an additional practice section where you can test your knowledge and find out the difficult concepts for you. Concentrate on the difficult topics and become the expert on the complete concept. Easy learning and fast solving skills will come at the same place by using Big Ideas Math Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas Solution Key.

Lesson: 1 Perimeter Formula for a Rectangle

Lesson: 2 Area Formula for a Rectangle

Lesson: 3 Find Unknown Measures

Lesson: 4 Problem Solving: Perimeter and Area

Performance Task

Lesson 12.1 Perimeter Formula for a Rectangle

Explore and Grow

Use color tiles to create a rectangle with a perimeter of 12 units. Compare your rectangle to your partner’s. How are they the same? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 1
How do you know that the perimeter of your rectangle is 12 units?

Answer:

The perimeter (P) of a rectangle = P=2l+2w( length=l ; width = w)

GIVEN: Perimeter of rectangle =12
P =2l + 2w
12= 2 (l + w)
12/2=l + w
6= l + w
Hence, the rectangle of my friend and mine are going to be same because perimeter given above is same for both the rectangle of us both.


The rectangle of mine is having a length of 3 units and width of 3 units.
Perimeter of my rectangle= (2 x l) + (2 x w)
P=(2 x 3) + (2 x 3)
P= 6 + 6
P= 12  units.
Here, my rectangle has 12  units perimeter. This is how I know my rectangle is having 12 units as its perimeter.

Structure
How is the perimeter of a rectangle related to its length and width?

Answer:
The perimeter (P) of a rectangle is given by the formula, P=2l+2w , where “l” is the length and “w” is the width of the rectangle.

Think and Grow: Use a Formula for Perimeter

Perimeter is the distance around a figure. A formula is an equation that uses letters and numbers to show how quantities are related. You can use a formula to show how the length, width, and perimeter of a rectangle are related.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 2
Example
Find the perimeter of the rectangle.
The length is ___ feet and the width is __ feet.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 3
P = (2 × l) + (2 × W) Formula for perimeter of a rectangle
= (2 × ___) + (2 × ___)
= __ + __
= ___
The perimeter is ___ feet.
ANSWER:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 3
Given: Length of Rectangle = 24 feet
Width of Rectangle = 9 feet
FORMULA: Perimeter = (2 x l) + (2 x w)
P = (2 x 24) + (2 x 9)
P = 48 + 18
P = 66  feet.
Hence, the Perimeter of the rectangle = 66  feet.

Show and Grow

Find the perimeter of the rectangle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 300
Answer:
GIVEN: Length of rectangle = 16cm
Width of rectangle = 13 cm
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w)
P = ( 2 x 16) + ( 2 x 13 )
P = 32 + 26
P = 58  cm.
Hence, the perimeter of the rectangle = 58  cm.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 4
Answer:
GIVEN: Length of the rectangle = 8 inches
Width of the rectangle = 4 (1/2) inches =9/2 = 4.5 inches
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2( 8 + 4.5 )
P = 2(12.5 )
P = 25 inches.
Hence, the perimeter of the rectangle = 25 inches.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the perimeter of the rectangle.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 5
Answer:
GIVEN: Length of the rectangle = 54 yards
Width of the rectangle = 32 yards
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2(54+32)
P= 2 x 86
P= 172 yards.
Hence, the perimeter of the rectangle =172 yards.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 6
Answer:
GIVEN: Length of the rectangle =87 m
Width of the rectangle = 65 m
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P= 2(87+65)
P= 2 x 153
P= 306  m.
Hence, the perimeter of the rectangle = 306 m.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 7
Answer:
GIVEN: Length of the rectangle = 49 inches
Width of the rectangle = 18 inches
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2(49+18)
P =2 x 67
P =134 inches.
Hence, the perimeter of the rectangle = 134 inches.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 8
Answer:
GIVEN: Length of the rectangle =11 cm
Width of the rectangle = 7 (3/10) cm = 73/10 cm =7.3 cm
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2(11+7.3)
P = 2 x 18.3
P = 36.6  cm.
Hence, the perimeter of the rectangle = 36.6 cm.

Question 7.
You want to string lights around a rectangular room that is 12 feet long and 10 feet wide. How many feet of lights do you need?
Answer:
GIVEN: Length of the rectangle = 12 feet
Width of the rectangle = 10 feet
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2(12+10)
P = 2 x 22
P = 44  feet
Hence, 44  feet of light is needed..

Question 8.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the perimeter of the rectangle. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 9
p = (2 × 13) × (2 × 5)
= 26 × 10
= 260  ft
Answer: GIVEN: Length of the rectangle = 13 feet
Width of the rectangle = 5 feet
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2(13+5)
P = 2 x 18
P = 36 feet.
Hence, the perimeter of the rectangle = 36  feet.
Therefore my friend is wrong because his formula for finding perimeter of rectangle is wrong.
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
You can use the formula for the perimeter of a rectangle to find the perimeter of the square. What other formula can you use to find the perimeter of the square?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 10

Answer:
The perimeter of a square is the total length of the four equal sides of the square.
Perimeter of the square = 4 × s = 4 s
The perimeter of a rectangle is the total length of the two lengths and two widths of the rectangle.
If the length and width of a rectangle are l and w, then its perimeter = 2(l + w) units.
We cannot equate the perimeter of a rectangle to find the perimeter of the square because rectangle has length and width whereas square has four sides.
No, other ways are there find the perimeter of the square.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
In a video game, you make a rectangular castle that is 4 times longer than it is wide. What is the perimeter of the castle?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 11
Multiply 4 and the width of the castle to find the length.
4 × 25 = ___
The length of the castle is ___ yards.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 12
Answer:
GIVEN: Width of the rectangular castle  = 25 yards
Length of the rectangular castle = 4 times longer than it is wide =4 x 25 yards = 100 yards
Perimeter of the rectangle castle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2 (100+25)
P = 2 x 125
P = 250  yards
Hence, Perimeter of the rectangle  castle= 250 yards.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
A teacher wants to put a border around a rectangular whiteboard. The whiteboard is 2 times longer than it is wide. What is the perimeter of the whiteboard?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 13
Answer:
GIVEN: Width of the rectangular castle  =  1 m
Length of the rectangular castle = 2 times longer than it is wide = 2 x 1 m = 2 m
Perimeter of the rectangle castle= (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2(2+1)
P = 2 x 3
P = 6 m
Hence, Perimeter of the rectangle castle = 6 m.

Question 11.
You want to put a ribbon border around each rectangular card. Which card requires more ribbon? How much more ribbon?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 14
Answer:
GIVEN: FIRST RECTANGULAR CARD
Width of the rectangular card  =  18 cm
Length of the rectangular card =  18 cm
Perimeter of the rectangle card= (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2(18+18)
P = 2 x 36
P = 72 cm.
SECOND RECTANGULAR CARD
Width of the rectangular card  =  14cm
Length of the rectangular card =  21 cm
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2(21+14)
P = 2 x 35
P = 70  cm.
The FIRST RECTANGULAR CARD needs the more ribbon than SECOND RECTANGULAR CARD because FIRST RECTANGULAR CARD Perimeter = 72  cm and SECOND RECTANGULAR CARD Perimeter = 70 cm.
That means  difference in perimeter of FIRST RECTANGULAR CARD and the perimeter of SECOND RECTANGULAR CARD.
=72  cm – 70  cm
= 2  cm.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
A rectangular flower bed has a length of 6 feet. The width is 48 inches shorter than the length. What is the perimeter of the flower bed?
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangular bed = 6 feet
Width of the rectangular bed = 48 inches shorter than the length.
1 inch = 0.08333 feet
48inches = 48 x 0.0833 =  4 feet
Width of the rectangular bed =  4 feet
The perimeter of the  rectangular flower bed = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2(6+4)
P = 2 x 10
P = 20 feet.
Hence, the perimeter of the  rectangular flower bed = 20 feet.

Perimeter Formula for a Rectangle Homework & Practice 12.1

Find the perimeter of the rectangle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 15
Answer:
GIVEN: Length of the rectangle = 22 yards
Width of the rectangle = 18 yards
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2(22+18)
P = 2 x 40
P = 80 yards.
Hence, the Perimeter of the rectangle = 80 yards.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 16
Answer:
GIVEN: Length of the rectangle = 36 mm
Width of the rectangle = 25 mm
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2(36+25)
P = 2 x 61
P =122 mm
Hence, the Perimeter of the rectangle = 122 mm.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 17
Answer:
GIVEN: Length of the rectangle = 30 cm
Width of the rectangle = 14 cm
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2(30+14)
P = 2 x 44
P = 88 cm
Hence, the Perimeter of the rectangle = 88 cm.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 18
Answer:
GIVEN: Length of the rectangle = 12 (1/4) feet = 49/4 feet = 12.25 feet
Width of the rectangle = 8 feet
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2(12.25 + 8)
P = 2 x 20.25
P = 40.5 feet
Hence, the Perimeter of the rectangle = 40.5feet.

Question 5.
Number Sense
What is the perimeter of a square tabletop with side lengths of 48 inches?
Answer:
GIVEN: Side of the square tabletop = 48 inches
Perimeter of the square = 4 x sides
P = 4 x 48
P = 192  inches.
Hence, Perimeter of the square tabletop = 192 inches.

Question 6.
Structure
Use the Distributive Property to write P = (2 × l) + (2 × w) another way.
Answer:
According to the distributive property, multiplying the sum of two or more addends by a number will give the same result as multiplying each addend individually by the number and then adding the products together.
Perimeter of rectangle = (2 × l) + (2 × w)
P = 2(l + w)
Hence, According to distributive property,  the another way of the Perimeter of rectangle = 2(l + w).

Question 7.
Open-Ended
Draw a rectangle that has the same perimeter as the one shown, but different dimensions.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 19
Answer:
GIVEN: Length of the rectangle = 50 m
Width of the rectangle = 25 m
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2( 50+25)
P = 2 x 75
P = 150 m.
MY FIGURE:

Length of the rectangle = 49m
Width of the rectangle = 26 m
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2( 49+26)
P = 2 x 75
P = 150 m.
Hence, the given rectangle Perimeter and my figure  Perimeter are the same of 150 m.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
A worker places tape around a rectangular shipping label that is 2 times longer than it is wide. How much tape does the worker need?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 20
Answer:
GIVEN:
Width of the rectangle shipping label = 74 mm
Length of the rectangle shipping label = 2 times longer than it is wide =  2 x 74mm = 148mm
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2(148+74)
P = 2 x 222
P = 444  mm.
Hence, Perimeter of the rectangle shipping label = 444 mm.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
A coach is painting lines around the perimeter of two rectangular fields. Which field requires more paint?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 21
Answer:
GIVEN: FIRST A COACH
Length of the rectangle field A = 100yards
Width of the rectangle field A =65 yards
Perimeter of the rectangle field A= (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2( 100+65)
P =2 x 165
P = 230 yards
Length of the rectangle field B = 120yards
Width of the rectangle field B =53 1/3 yards = 160/3 = 53.3 yards
P = (2 x l) + (2 x w) = 2( l + w)
P = 2( 120+53.3)
P = 2 x 173.3
P = 346.6  yards
Hence, Perimeter of the rectangle field B is more than Perimeter of the rectangle field A
=346.6 – 230 = 116.6  yards.
Therefore, Perimeter of the rectangle field A requires more 116.6 square yards than Perimeter of the rectangle field B.

Review & Refresh

Write the first six numbers in the pattern. Then describe another feature of the pattern.

Question 10.
Rule: Subtract 11.
First number: 99
Answer:
Rule: Subtract 11.
GIVEN: First number = 99  in the pattern
Second number = 99-11= 88
Third number = 88-11= 77
Fourth number = 77-11 = 66
Fifth number = 66-11 = 55
Sixth number = 55-11 =44
Another feature of this pattern is that all the numbers are multiples of table 11.

Question 11.
Rule: Multiply by 5.
First number: 5
Answer: Rule: Multiply by 5.
GIVEN: First number = 5 in the pattern
Second number = 5 x5 =25
Third number = 25 x 5 = 125
Fourth number = 125 x 5= 625
Fifth number = 625 x 5 = 3125
Sixth number = 3125 x 5 = 15625
Another feature of this pattern is that all the numbers are multiples of table 5.

Lesson 12.2 Area Formula for a Rectangle

Explore and Grow

Use color tiles to create a rectangle with an area of 12 square units. Compare your rectangle to your partner’s. How are they the same? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 22
How do you know that the area of your rectangle is 12 square units?
Answer:

Hence, the rectangle of my friend and mine are going to be same because area = 12 square units given above is same for both the rectangle of us both.

Area of the rectangle =l x w , where “l” is the length and “w” is the width.
Length of the rectangle = 4units
Width of the rectangle = 3units
A = l x w
A = 4 x 3
A = 12 square units.
Hence, the Area of the rectangle = 12 square units.

Structure
How is the area of a rectangle related to its length and width?
Answer:
The area “A” of a rectangle is given by the formula, A=l x w , where “l” is the length and “w” is the width.

Think and Grow: Use a Formula for Area

Area is the amount of surface a figure covers. You can use a formula to show how the length, width, and area of a rectangle are related.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 23
Example
Find the area of the rectangle.
The length is ___ inches and the width is ___ inches.
A = l × w Formula for area of a rectangle
= ___ × ___
= ___
The area is ___ square inches.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 24
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle = 19 inches
Width of the rectangle = 14 inches
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 19 x 14
A = 266  square inches
Hence, the Area of the rectangle = 266  square inches.

Show and Grow

Find the area of the rectangle

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 25
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle = 6 m
Width of the rectangle = 4 m
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 6 x 4
A = 24 square m.
Hence, the are of the rectangle = 24 square m.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 26
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle = 20 yards
Width of the rectangle = 12 yards
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 20 x 12
A = 240 square yards
Hence, the area of the rectangle = 240 square yards.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 27
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle = 11 cm
Width of the rectangle = 7cm
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 11 x 7
A = 77 square cm
Hence, the area of the rectangle = 77 square cm.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 28
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle =  5 feet
Width of the rectangle = 1 (1/2) feet = 3/2 feet = 1.5 feet
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 5 x 1.5
A = 7.5 square feet
Hence, the area of the rectangle = 7.5 square feet.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the area of the rectangle.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 29
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle =  35 mm
Width of the rectangle = 32 mm
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 35 x 32
A = 1120 mm
Hence, the area of the rectangle = 1120 mm.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 30
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle = 9 inches
Width of the rectangle = 4 (2/8) inches = 34/8 = 4.25 inches
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 9 x 4.25
A = 38.25 square inches
Hence, the area of the rectangle = 38.25 square inches.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 31
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle =  8 feet
Width of the rectangle = 5 (1/2) feet =11/2 = 5.5 feet
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 8 x 5.5
A = 44 square feet
Hence, the area of the rectangle = 44 square feet.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 32
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle = 79 cm
Width of the rectangle = 37 cm
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 79 x 37
A = 2923 square cm
Hence, the area of the rectangle = 2923 square cm.

Question 9.
You are installing wall-to-wall carpet in a rectangular bedroom that is 10 feet long and 9 feet wide. How many square feet of carpet do you need?
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the wall-to-wall carpet in a rectangular bedroom = 10 feet
Width of the wall-to-wall carpet in a rectangular bedroom = 9 feet
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 10 x 9
A = 90 square feet.
Hence, the area of the wall-to-wall carpet in a rectangular bedroom = 90 square feet
Therefore, 90 square feet of carpet is need.

Question 10.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton says the area of the rectangle is 33 square meters. Descartes says the area is 33 meters. Who is correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 33
Answer:
Length of the rectangle = 11 m
Width of the rectangle = 3 m
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 11 x 3
A = 33 square m
The area of the rectangle is 33 square meters.
Hence, Newton says correct not Descartes.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Write a formula for the area of a square that has a side length of s. Then use your formula to find the area of the square shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 34
Answer:
Area of the square = 4 x sides = 4 x s
Given : side of the square = 12 yards
Area of the square = 4 x sides = 4 x s
A= 4 x 12
A = 48 square yards
Hence, the Area of the square = 48 square yards.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
The length of the rectangular dance floor is 6 feet longer than the width. What is the area of the dance floor?
Add 6 feet to the width to find the length.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 35
Answer:
GIVEN: Width of rectangular dance floor = 24 feet
Length of the rectangular dance floor = 6 feet longer than the width = 24 +6 = 30 feet
Area of the  rectangular dance floor = l x w
A = 30 X 24
A = 720 square feet
Hence, the Area of the  rectangular dance floor = 720 square feet.

Show and Grow

Question 12.
A designer creates a rectangular advertisement for a website. The length of the advertisement is 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) centimeters longer than the width. What is the area of the advertisement?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 36
Answer:
Length of the rectangular advertisement = 1\(\ frac {1}{2}\) centimeters longer than the width= 1(1 /2) cm + 7 cm = =3 / 2 cm + 7 cm = (1.5 + 7 )cm =8.5 cm
Width of the rectangular advertisement = 7 cm
Area of the  rectangular advertisement = l x w
A = 8.5 x 7
A = 59.5 cm
Hence, the Area of the  rectangular advertisement = 59.5 cm.

Question 13.
You create a mural using 4 rectangular posters that are each 4\(\frac{1}{4}\) feet long and 2 feet wide. You put the posters next to each other with no gaps or overlaps. What is the area of the mural?
Answer:
GIVEN:
Width of the rectangular posters=  2 feet
Length of the rectangular posters= 4\(\frac{1}{4}\) feet = 4 (1/4) feet = 17/4 feet = 4.25 feet
Area of the mural = l x w
A = 4.25 x 2
A =  8.5  square feet
Hence, the Area of the mural = 8.5 square feet.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
Two rolls of wrapping paper have the same piece. The red roll is 3 feet wide and is 10 yards long when unrolled. The striped roll is 3\(\frac{1}{2}\) feet wide and 8 yards long when unrolled. Which roll is the better buy? Explain.
Answer:
GIVEN:
Width of Red roll =3 feet
CONVERTION : 1 YARD = 3 FEET
Width of Red roll =3 feet = 1 yard
Length of the red roll = 10 yards
Area of the red roll = l x w
A = 10 x 1
A = 10 square yards.
Area of the red roll = 10 square yards.
Width of striped roll = 3\(\frac{1}{2}\) feet = 3 1/2 feet = 3.5 feet.
CONVERTION : 1 YARD = 3 FEET
Width of striped roll = 3.5 feet
I yard = 3.5 feet
Width of striped roll = yard = 3.5 / 1 feet
Width of striped roll = 3.5 yard
Length of striped roll = 8 yards
Area of the striped roll = l x w
A = 3.5 x 8
A = 28 square yards.
Area of the striped roll = 28 square yards.
Its better to buy striped roll than red roll because u are going to get more.

Area Formula for a Rectangle Homework & Practice 12.2

Find the area of the rectangle

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 37
Answer:
GIVEN: Length of the rectangle = 8 m
Width of the rectangle = 7 m
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 8 x 7
A = 42 square m
Hence, Area of the rectangle = 42 square m.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 38
Answer:
GIVEN: Length of the rectangle = 21 cm
Width of the rectangle = 9 cm
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 21 x 9
A = 189 square cm
Hence, Area of the rectangle = 189 square cm.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 39
Answer:
GIVEN: Length of the rectangle = 56 yards
Width of the rectangle = 12 yards
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 56 x 12
A = 672 square yards
Hence, Area of the rectangle = 672 square yards.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 40
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle = 10 (3/4) inches = 43/4 = 10.75 inches
Width of the rectangle = 6 inches
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 10.75 x 6
A = 64.5 square inches
Hence, Area of the rectangle = 64.5  square inches.

Question 5.
What is the area of the window?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 41
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the window = 48 inches
Width of the window = 18 inches
Area of the window = l x w
A = 48 x 18
A = 864 square inches
Hence, the Area of the window = 864 square inches.

Question 6.
Structure
A rectangle has an area of 40 square feet. The dimensions are whole numbers. What are all of the possible dimensions of the rectangle?
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the rectangle = 40 square feet.
The whole numbers are the part of the number system in which it includes all the positive integers from 0 to infinity. These numbers exist in the number line.
Area of the rectangle = l x w
All of the possible dimensions of the rectangle =
40 =1 × 40
40 = 2 × 20
40 = 4 × 10
40 = 5 × 8.

Question 7.
Open-Ended
Draw a rectangle that has the same area as the one shown, but different dimensions.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 42
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle = 40 mm
Width of the rectangle = 30 mm
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 40 x30
A = 1200 mm
Area of the rectangle = 1200 mm.

Length of my rectangle = 48 mm
Width of my rectangle = 25 mm
Area of my rectangle = l x w
A = 48 x 25
A = 1200 mm
Hence, the Area of my rectangle = 1200 mm.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
An interior designer says that a rug under a dining room table should be 4 feet longer and 4 feet wider than the table. What is the area of a rug a customer should buy for under the table?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 43
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the dinning table = 6 feet
Width of the dinning table = 3feet
AS PER DESIGNER THE DINNING TABLE REQUIRED DIMENSIONS ARE AS BELOW:
Length should be 4 feet longer than table.
Length of the dinning table= 6 feet
Length of the rug = 6 feet + 4 feet = 10 feet
Width should be 4 feet wider than the table.
Width of the dinning table = 3feet
Width of the rug = 3 feet + 4 feet = 7 feet
Area of the rug = l x w
A = 10 x 7
A = 70 square feet.
Hence, the Area of the rug = 70  square feet.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
A wolf hunts within a rectangular area that is 10 miles long and 5 miles wide. A cougar hunts within a rectangular area that is 8 miles long and 6 miles wide. Which animal hunts within a greater area? How much more area does the animal hunt in?
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the wolf hunts rectangular area=10 miles
Width of the wolf hunts rectangular area=5 miles
Area the wolf hunts rectangular area= l x w
A = 10 x 5
A = 50 square miles.
Area the wolf hunts rectangular area= 50 square miles.

Length of the cougar hunts rectangular area= 8 miles
Width of the cougar hunts rectangular area= 6 miles
Area of the cougar hunts rectangular area= l x w
A  = 8 x 6
A = 48 square miles
Area of the cougar hunts rectangular area= 48 square miles.

Hence, wolf hunts within a greater area than the cougar hunts.

Area the wolf hunts rectangular area= 50 square miles.
Area of the cougar hunts rectangular area= 48 square miles.
DIFFERENCE:
Area the wolf hunts rectangular area – Area of the cougar hunts rectangular area
= 50 square miles – 48 square miles
= 2 miles.
Therefore, Wolf hunts more of 2 square miles area than the cougar hunts.

Review & Refresh

Find the quotient.

Question 10.
70 ÷ 7 = __
Answer:
70 ÷ 7 = 10.
The quotient of 70 ÷ 7 = 10.

Question 11.
420 ÷ 6 = ___
Answer:
420 ÷ 6 = 70.
The quotient of 420 ÷ 6 = 70.

Question 12.
2,400 ÷ 8 = ___
Answer:
2,400 ÷ 8 = 300.
The quotient of 2,400 ÷ 8 = 300.

Lesson 12.3 Find Unknown Measures

Explore and Grow

For each row of the table, use color tiles to create the rectangle described. Then complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 44
Answer:
GIVEN:
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 44
Area of the rectangle = 20 square units
length of the rectangle = 5 units
Width of the rectangle = ??
Let the Width of the rectangle be W
Area of the rectangle = l x w
=> 20 square units = 5units x W
=> 20 / 5 = W
=> 4 units =W
Width of the rectangle = 4 units

GIVEN:
Area of the rectangle = 24 square units
Length of the rectangle = ??
Let the Length of the rectangle = l
Width of the rectangle = 4 units
Area of the rectangle = l x w
=> 24 square units = l x 4units
=> 24 / 4= l
=> 6 units =l
Length of the rectangle = 6 units

GIVEN:
Perimeter of the rectangle = 20 units
Length of the rectangle = ??
Let the length of the rectangle be l
Width of the rectangle = 3 units
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l x 2w = 2 (l + w)
20 = 2(l+ 3)
20 / 2= L + 3
10 = l + 3
10 – 3 =l
l =7 units.
The Length of the rectangle = 7 units.

GIVEN:
Perimeter of the rectangle = 24 units
Length of the rectangle = 8 units
Width of the rectangle = ??
Let the Width of the rectangle = w
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l x 2w = 2 (l + w)
24 = 2 ( 8 + w)
24/2 =8 + w
12 = 8 + w
12 – 8 = w
w = 4units
Width of the rectangle = 4units.

The required table is as below:

Reasoning
Compare your strategy to your partner’s. How are they the same or different?
Answer:
The strategy of mine and my partner does not vary as both the required answers value is same.

Think and Grow : Find Unknown Measures

Example
The area of the rectangle is 36 square feet. Find the length.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 45
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the rectangle = 36 square feet.
Length of the rectangle = l feet
Width of the rectangle = 3 feet
Area of the rectangle = l x w
36 = l x 3
36/3 = l
12 feet = l
Hence, the Length of the rectangle =12 feet

Example
The perimeter of the rectangle is 30 centimeters. Find the width.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 46
Answer:
GIVEN:
Perimeter of the rectangle = 30 centimeters.
Length of the rectangle = 8 cm
Width of the rectangle = w cm
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + ( 2 x w )
30 = ( 2 x 8) + (2 x w)
30 = 16 + 2w
30 – 16 = 2w
14 = 2w
14/2 = w
7 = w
Hence, the Width of the rectangle = 7 cm.

 

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Area = 75 square meters
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 410
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the rectangle = 75 square meters
Length of the rectangle = l m
Width of the rectangle = 5 m
Area of the rectangle =  l x w
75 = l x 5
75/5 = l
15 = l
Hence, the length of the rectangle = 15 m.

Question 2.
Perimeter = 42 inches
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 411
Answer:
GIVEN:
Perimeter of the rectangle = 42 inches
Length of the rectangle = 12 inches
Width of the rectangle = w inches
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + ( 2 x w ) = 2 ( l + w )

Hence, the Width of the rectangle =  3.5 inches.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the unknown measure of the rectangle.

Question 3.
Area = 50 square millimeters
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 47
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the rectangle = 50 square millimeters
Length of the rectangle = l mm
Width of the rectangle = 2 mm
Area of the rectangle =  l x w
50 = l x 2
50/2 = l
25 = l
Hence, the length of the rectangle = 25 mm.

Question 4.
Perimeter = 30 centimeters
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 48
Answer:
GIVEN:
Perimeter of the rectangle = 30 centimeters
Length of the rectangle = 9 cm
Width of the rectangle = w cm
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + ( 2 x w ) = 2 ( l + w )
30 = 2( 9+w )
30/2 = 9 + w
15 = 9 + w
15 – 9 = w
6 = w
Hence, the width of the rectangle = 6 cm.

Question 5.
Area = 240 square meters
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 49
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the rectangle =  240 square meters
Length of the rectangle = 80 m
Width of the rectangle =  w m
Area of the rectangle =  l x w
240 = 80 x w
240/80 = w
3 = w
Hence, the Width of the rectangle =  3 m.

Question 6.
Perimeter = 86 yards
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 50
Answer:
GIVEN:
Perimeter of the rectangle = 86 yards
Length of the rectangle = 23 yards
Width of the rectangle = w yards
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + ( 2 x w ) = 2 ( l + w )
86 = 2( 23 + w)
86/2 = 23 +w
43 = 23 + w
43 – 23 = w
20 = w
Hence, the Width of the rectangle = 20 yards.

Question 7.
Perimeter 44 2/4 inches
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 51
Answer:
GIVEN:
Perimeter of the rectangle = 44 (2/4) inches = 90/4 = 22.5 inches
Length of the rectangle = l inches
Width of the rectangle = 8 (1/4) inches = 33/4 =  8.25 inches
Perimeter of the rectangle = (2 x l) + ( 2 x w ) = 2 ( l + w )
22.5 = 2( l+ 8.25)
22.5/2 = l + 8.25
11.25 = l + 8.25
11.25 – 8.25 = l
3.00 = l
Hence, the Length of the rectangle = 3 inches.

Question 8.
Area = 108 square feet
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 52
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the rectangle =  108 square feet
Length of the rectangle = l feet
Width of the rectangle =  9 feet
Area of the rectangle =  l x w
108 = l x 9
108/9 = l
12 = l
Hence, the Length of the rectangle = 12 feet.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
What are the dimensions of Newton’s rectangle?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 53
Answer:
Area of the Newton’s rectangle =  24 square meters
Let the Width of the Newton’s rectangle  be w m.
Length of the Newton’s rectangle = 2 meters longer than the width = 2 + w
Area of the Newton’s rectangle =  l x w
Factors of 24:
1 x 24 = 24 => 1 x ( 1 + 2 ) = 1 x 3= 3
2 x 12 = 24 =>2 x (2+2) =2 x 4 =8
3 x 8 = 24 =>3 x (3+2) = 3 x 5 = 15
4 x 6 = 24 => 4 x (4+2) = 4 x 6 = 24
The dimensions of Newton’s rectangle:
Width of the Newton’s rectangle = 4 m
Length of Newton’s rectangle = 4 + 2= 6 m
CHECK:
Area of of Newton’s rectangle =l x w
A = 4 x 6
A = 24 square meters.
Hence , the The dimensions of Newton’s rectangle = 4 m and 6 m.

 

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
The area of a square is 81 square centimeters. What is the perimeter of the square?
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of a square = 81 square centimeters.
Area of a square  =s2  
81 = s2
√ 81 = s
9 = s
Side of the square = 9 cm
Perimeter of the square = 4x s
P= 4 x 9
P = 36 cm.
Hence, Perimeter of the square = 36 cm.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
The rectangular park has an area of 200 square yards. You kick a soccer ball straight across the width of the park. How far did you kick the soccer ball?
Use a formula to find the width.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 54
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the rectangular park =200 square yards
Length of the rectangular park = 25 yards
Width of the rectangular park =w yards
Area of the rectangular park = l x w
200 = 25 x w
200/25 = w
8 = w
Hence, the Width of the rectangular park =9 yards.
Therefore, the soccer kicks the ball 8 yards far in the rectangular park.
Show and Grow

Question 11.
The rectangular parking spot has an area of 220 square feet. What is the length of the longest car that can fit in the parking spot?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 55
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the rectangular parking spot = 220 square feet
Width of the rectangular parking spot = 10 feet
Length of the rectangular parking spot = l feet
Area of the rectangular parking spot = l x w
220 = l x 10
220/10 = l
22 = l
Hence, the Length of the rectangular parking spot = 22 feet.
Therefore , the length of the longest car that can fit in the parking spot is 22 feet.

Question 12.
You want to put a frame around the rectangular painting. The painting has a perimeter of 50 inches. How wide should the frame be?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 56
Answer:
GIVEN:
Perimeter of the rectangular painting frame= 50 inches
Length of the rectangular painting  frame= 14 inches
Width of the rectangular painting frame= w inches
Perimeter of the rectangular painting = 2l + 2w = 2( l + w)
50 = 2(14+w)
50/2 = 14 + w
25 = 14 + w
25 – 14 =w
11 = w
Hence, the Width of the rectangular painting frame= 11 inches.

Question 13.
A rectangular zoo enclosure for a red panda has a perimeter of 116 meters. The length is 50 meters. What is the area of the enclosure?
Answer:
GIVEN:
Perimeter of the rectangular zoo = 116 meters
Length of the rectangular zoo = 50 meters
Width of the rectangular zoo = ??
Let the Width of the rectangular zoo = w meters
Perimeter of the rectangular painting = 2l + 2w = 2( l + w)
116 = 2( 50+ w)
116/2 = 50 + w
58 = 50 + w
58 – 50 = w
8 = w
Hence, the Width of the rectangular zoo = 8 meters
Area of the rectangular zoo =??
Area of the rectangular zoo = l x w
A = 50 x 8
A = 400 square meters
Therefore, the Area of the rectangular zoo = 400 square meters.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
A rectangular patio at a restaurant has an area of 98 square feet. The dimensions of the patio are whole numbers. The length of the patio is 2 times the width. What are the dimensions of the patio?
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the rectangular patio = 98 square feet.
The dimensions of the patio are whole numbers.
The length of the patio is 2 times the width.
Let the Width of the rectangular patio be w feet.
=> Length of the the rectangular patio = 2 x w = 2w
Area of the rectangular patio = l x w
98 = (2w) x w
98 = 2w2
98/2 = w2
49 = w2
√ 49 = w
7 = w
Hence, the Width of the rectangular patio = 7 feet.
Length of the the rectangular patio = 2 x w = 2w= 2 x 7 = 14 feet
Therefore, the dimensions of the patio are 14 feet and 7 feet.

Find Unknown Measures Homework & Practice 12.3

Find the unknown measures of the rectangle.

Question 1.
Area = 63 square feet
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 57
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the rectangle = 63 square feet
Length of the rectangle = l feet
Width of the rectangle = 7 feet
Area of the rectangle = l x w
63 = l x 7
63/7 = l
9 = l
Hence, the Length of the rectangle = 9 feet.

Question 2.
Perimeter = 26 yards
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 58
Answer:
GIVEN:
Perimeter of the rectangle =  26 yards
Length of the rectangle = l yard
Width of the rectangle = 1 yard
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w = 2 ( l + w)
26 = 2( l + 1)
26/2 = l +1
13 = l + 1
13 – 1 = l
12 = l
Hence, the Length of the rectangle = 12 yards.

Find the unknown measure of the rectangle.

Question 3.
Perimeter = 40 centimeters
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 59
Answer:
GIVEN:
Perimeter of the rectangle = 40 centimeters
Length of the rectangle =14 cm
Width of the rectangle = w cm
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w = 2 ( l + w)
40 = 2( 14 + w)
40/2 =14 + w
20 = 14 + w
20 – 14= w
6 = w
Hence, the Width of the rectangle = 6 cm.

Question 4.
Area = 88 square millimeters
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 412
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the rectangle = 88 square millimeters
Length of the rectangle = l mm
Width of the rectangle = 8 mm
Area of the rectangle = l x w
88 = l x 8
88/8 = l
11 = l
Hence , the Length of the rectangle = 11 mm.

Question 5.
Area = 2,800 square meters
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 60
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the rectangle = 2,800 square meters
Length of the rectangle = l m
Width of the rectangle = 40 m
Area of the rectangle = l x w
2800 = l x 40
2800/40 = l
70 = l
Hence, the Length of the rectangle = 70 m.

Question 6.
Perimeter = 41 inches
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 61
Answer:
GIVEN:
Perimeter of the rectangle = 41 inches
Length of the rectangle =12 (4/8) inches = 100/8 = 12.5 inches
Width of the rectangle = w inches
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w = 2 ( l + w)
41 = 2( 12.5 +w)
41/2 =12.5 + w
20.5 = 12.5 + w
20.5 – 12.5 = w
8 = w
Hence, the Width of the rectangle = 8 inches.

Question 7.
Structure
A rectangle has an area of 18 square inches and a perimeter of 18 inches. What are the dimensions of the rectangle?
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the rectangle = 18 square inches
Perimeter of the rectangle =18 inches.
LET, the Length of the rectangle be l inches
The Width of the rectangle be w inches.
FORMULA:
Area of the rectangle = l x w
18 = l x w
The dimensions of the rectangle :
18 = 1 x 18
18 = 2 x 9
18 = 3 x 6
Hence, the dimensions of the rectangle are (1,18);(2,9);(3,6) inches.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
The rectangular fire pit has a perimeter of 176 inches. What is the width of the fire pit?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 62
Answer:
GIVEN :
Perimeter of the rectangular fire pit = 176 inches
Length of the rectangular fire pit = 50 inches
Width of the rectangular fire pit = ??
Let the Width of the rectangular fire pit be w inches.
Perimeter of the rectangular fire pit = 2l + 2w = 2(l + w)
176 = 2( 50 + w)
176/2 = 50 + w
88 = 50 + w
88 – 50 = w
35 = w
Hence, the Width of the rectangular fire pit =  35 inches.

Question 9.
A painting canvas has an area of 384 square inches. The length and width of the canvas are whole numbers. The length of the canvas is 8 inches greater than the width. What are the dimensions of the canvas?
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of  the painting canvas = 384 square inches.
The length of the canvas is 8 inches greater than the width.
Let the Width of the painting canvas be w inches.
Area of  the painting canvas = l x w => 384 = l x w
384 = 1x 384 =>1 x (1 + 8) = 1 x 9 = 9
384 = 2 x 192 =>2 x (2+8) = 2 x 10 = 20
384 = 3 x 128 => 3 x (3 + 8) = 3 x 11 = 33
384 = 4 x 96 => 4 x (4 + 8) = 4 x 12 = 48
384= 6 x 64 => 6 x (6 + 8) = 6 x 14 = 84
384 = 8 x 48 => 8 x (8 + 8) =8 x 16 = 128
384 =12 x 32 =>12 x (12 + 8) = 12 x 20 = 240
384 =16 x 24 => 16 x (16 +8) = 16 x 24 = 384
Hence, The dimensions of the canvas=  (24,16) inches
Length of the canvas = 24 inches
Width of the canvas = 16 inches

Review & Refresh

Find the equivalent length.

Question 10.
35 ft = __ in.
Answer:
CONVERTION: 1 feet = 12 inches
35 feet = ?? inches
Let the unknown value be Y inches.
=>35 x 12 = 1 x Y
=>420 = 1 x Y
=> 420/1 = Y
=> 420 = Y
Hence, the unknown value = 420 inches.
35 feet = _420_ inches.

Question 11.
6 mi = __ yd
Answer:
CONVERTION: 1 mile =1760 yard
6 miles = ?? yard
Let the unknown value be X yards.
=> 1 x X = 1760 x 6
=> 1X = 10560
=> X = 10560/1
=> X = 10560
Hence, the unknown value be 10560 yards.
6 mi = _10560_ yd

Question 12.
17 yd = __ ft
Answer:
CONVERTION:
1 yard = 3 feet
17 yd = ?? feet
Let the unknown value be X feet.
=>1 x X = 3 x 17
=>1X = 51
=>X = 51/1
=> X = 51 feet
Hence, the unknown value be 51 feet.
17 yd = _51_ ft

Question 13.
4 yd = __ in.
Answer:
CONVERTION:
1 yard = 36 inches
4 yards = ?? inches
Let the unknown value be Y inches.
=> 1 x Y = 36 x 4
=> 1Y = 144
=> Y = 144/1
=> Y = 144
Hence, the unknown value be 144 inches.
4 yd = _144_ in.

Lesson 12.4 Problem Solving: Perimeter and Area

Explore and Grow

An office has a large rectangular window overlooking a city. Describe two methods for finding the area of the rectangular wall around the window.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 63
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the inside window = l x w
Area of the outside wall = l x w
Area of the rectangular wall around the window = area of the outside wall – Area of the inside window
Hence, there is only one way to find the Area of the rectangular wall around the window.

Make Sense of Problems
Use one of your methods to estimate the area of a wall with a window.
Answer:
The area of the wall can be estimated to be twice the area of the window.

Think and Grow: Problem Solving: Perimeter and Area

Example
A rectangular board has an area of 1,700 square inches. You cut out a rectangular piece that is 10 inches long and 9 inches wide to make a carnival prop similar to the one shown. What is

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 64
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of rectangular board =1,700 square inches
Length of the rectangular piece  cut = 10 inches
Width of the rectangular piece cut = 9 inches
Area of the rectangular piece cut = l x w
=>A = 10 X 9
=> A = 90 square inches
Area of the rectangular piece cut = 90 square inches.
Subtract Area of the cut out piece you cut out from the original area.
= 1700 square inches – 90 square inches
= 1610 square inches.
Hence, the Area of the area of the prop = 1610 square inches.

Understand the Problem
What do you know?

  • The original board has an area of 1,700 square inches.
  • The piece you cut out is 10 inches long and 9 inches wide.

What do you need to find?

  • You need to find the area of the carnival prop.

Make a Plan

How will you solve?

  • Find the area of the piece you cut out.
  • Subtract the area of the piece you cut out from the original area.

Solve
Step 1: Find the area of the piece you cut out.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 65
Step 2: Subtract the area of the you cut out piece you cut out from the original area.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 66
The area of the prop is __ square inches.
Answer:
Area of rectangular board =1,700 square inches
Length of the rectangular piece  cut = 10 inches
Width of the rectangular piece cut = 9 inches
Area of the rectangular piece cut = l x w
=>A = 10 X 9
=> A = 90 square inches
Area of the rectangular piece cut = 90 square inches.
Subtract Area of the cut out piece you cut out from the original area.
= 1700 square inches – 90 square inches
= 1610 square inches.
Hence, the Area of the area of the prop = 1610 square inches

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Explain how you can check whether your answer above is reasonable.
Answer:
My above answer is reasonable because it satisfies.
Area of the area of the prop + Area of the cut out piece  =The Area of the outside rectangular
=>1610 square inches + 90 square inches
=>1700 square inches.
Hence, proved my answer is reasonable and correct.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Understand the problem. What do you know? What do you need to find? Explain.
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of rectangular board =1,700 square inches
Length of the rectangular piece  cut = 10 inches
Width of the rectangular piece cut = 9 inches
This is known in the problem.
You need to find the area of the carnival prop.

Question 2.
A construction worker has 40 feet of caution tape. Is this enough tape to surround a rectangular region that is 120 inches long and 90 inches wide?
Answer:
GIVEN:
A construction worker has 40 feet of caution tape.
Length of the rectangular region = 120 inches
Width of the rectangular region = 90 inches
Perimeter of the rectangular region = 2l + 2 w = 2( l + w)
P = 2( 120 + 90)
P = 2 x 210
P = 420 inches.
CONVERTION: 1 inch = 0.8333 feet  or (1/12) feet
420 inches = ??
Let the unknown value be X feet
=> 1 x X = 420 x 1/12
=> 1X = 420/12
=> 1X = 35 feet.
The required tape to surround the rectangular region = 35 feet.
A construction worker has 40 feet of caution tape.
Therefore, the tape of construction worker bought will be enough to surround a rectangular region that is 120 inches long and 90 inches wide.

Question 3.
One ton of salt de-ices a rectangular section of a road that is 10,500 meters long and 3 meters wide. How many square meters does 6 tons of salt de-ice?
Answer:
GIVEN:
One ton of salt de-ices a rectangular section of a road
Length of the One ton of salt de-ices rectangular section of a road = 10500 meters
Width of the One ton of salt de-ices rectangular section of a road = 3 meters
Area of the One ton of salt de-ices rectangular section of a road = l x w
A = l x w
A = 10500 x 3
A = 31500 square meters
Area of the  One ton of salt de-ices rectangular section of a road = 31500 square meters.
Area of the 6 ton of salt de-ices rectangular section of a road  = ??
Area of the 6 ton of salt de-ices rectangular section of a road  = (Area of the one ton of salt de-ices rectangular section of a road) x 6
=> 31500 x 6
=> 189000 square feet.
Therefore, Area of the 6 ton of salt de-ices rectangular section of a road  = 189000 square feet.

Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve? Explain.

Question 4.
A worker installs fencing around two rectangular properties. One is 99 feet long and 80 feet wide. The other is95 feet long and 83 feet wide. Which property requires more fencing? How much more?
Answer:
GIVEN:
A worker installs fencing around two rectangular properties.
ONE RECTANGULAR PROPERTY
Length of the  one rectangular property = 99 feet
Width of the one rectangular property = 80 feet
Perimeter of the one rectangular property = 2l + 2w = 2( l + w)
P = 2 ( 99+ 80 )
P = 2 x 179
P = 358 feet
Perimeter of the one rectangular property = 358 feet.
OTHER RECTANGULAR PROPERTY
Length of the  other rectangular property = 95 feet
Width of the other rectangular property = 83 feet
Perimeter of the other rectangular property = 2l + 2w = 2( l + w)
P = 2 ( 95 + 83 )
P = 2 x 178
P = 356 feet
Perimeter of the other rectangular property = 356 feet
DIFFERENCE:
Perimeter of the one rectangular property – Perimeter of the other rectangular property
=> 358 – 356
=> 2 feet.
One rectangular property requires more fencing than the other rectangular property.
Therefore, 2 feet more it requires than the one rectangular property than the other rectangular property.

Question 5.
A roofer covers the rectangular roof with shingles. A chimney occupies a rectangular area that is 4 feet long and 2 feet wide. How many square feet of the roof are with shingles?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 67
Answer:
GIVEN:
A roofer covers the rectangular roof with shingles.
Length of the rectangular area of chimney = 4 feet
Width of the rectangular area of chimney = 2 feet
Area of the rectangular area of chimney = l x w
A = 4 x 2
A = 8 square feet
Area of the rectangular area of chimney = 8 square feet.
Length of the rectangular roof = 60 feet
Width of the rectangular roof= 30 feet
Area of the rectangular roof = l x w
A = 60 x 30
A = 1800 square feet
Area of the rectangular roof = 1800 square feet.
Area of the roof are with shingles = Area of the rectangular roof – Area of the rectangular area of chimney
=> 1800 square feet – 8 square feet
=> 1792 square feet.
Area of the roof are with shingles = 1792 square feet.

Question 6.
You want to buy a cover for the lid of your laptop. Your laptop is 1\(\frac{1}{3}\) feet long and 1 foot wide. Which cover will fit best on your laptop?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 68
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the Laptop = 1\(\frac{1}{3}\) feet long =1 (1/3) feet = 4/3 feet = 1. 33 feet.
Width of the laptop = 1 feet
Perimeter of the laptop =2l + 2w = 2( l + w)
P = 2( 1.33 + 1)
P =2 x 2.33
P = 4.66 feet
Perimeter of the laptop =4.66 feet.
CONVERTION:
1 feet = 12 inches
4.66 feet =??
=> 4.66 x 12
=> 55.92 inches
Hence, the perimeter of the laptop = 55.92 inches.
FIRST LAPTOP COVER :
Length of the first Laptop cover = 16 inches
Width of the first Laptop cover = 12 inches
Area of the first Laptop cover =  192 square inches
Perimeter of the first Laptop cover = 2l + 2w = 2( l + w)
P = 2( 16 + 12)
P = 2 x 28
P = 56 inches.
Perimeter of the first Laptop cover = 56 inches.
SECOND LAPTOP COVER :
Length of the second Laptop cover = 13 inches
Width of the second Laptop cover = 9 (3/4)inches = 39/4  inches = 9.75 inches
Area of the second Laptop cover =  126 (3/4) square inches
Perimeter of the second Laptop cover = 2l + 2w = 2( l + w)
P = 2( 13 +9.75 )
P = 2 x 22.75
P =  45.5 inches.
Perimeter of the second Laptop cover = 45.5 inches.
THIRD LAPTOP COVER
Length of the third Laptop cover = 14 (1/2) inches = 29/2  inches= 14.5 inches
Width of the third Laptop cover = 11 inches
Area of the third Laptop cover =  159 (1/2) square inches
Perimeter of the third Laptop cover = 2l + 2w = 2( l + w)
P = 2( 14.5 + 11 )
P = 2 x 25.5
P = 51 inches.
Perimeter of the third Laptop cover = 51 inches.
Therefore, first laptop cover will fit correctly to the laptop because cover size is more accurate size of 56 inches than other two laptop covers are lesser in size of the laptop size 55.92 inches.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A worker wants to cover the miniature golf putting surface with artificial turf. The putting surface is in the shape of two rectangles. How much turf does the worker need?
Think: What do you know? What do you need to find? How will you solve?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 69
Step 1: Divide the surface into two rectangles. Then find the area of each rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 70
Answer:
GIVEN:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 69
Divide the surface into two rectangles. Then find the area of each rectangle.

Length of the Rectangle A = 16 feet
Width of the Rectangle A = `4 feet
Area of the Rectangle A = l x w
A =16 x 4
A = 64 square feet
Area of the Rectangle A = 64 square feet.
Length of the Rectangle B = `10 feet
Width of the Rectangle B = `5 feet
Area of the Rectangle B = l x w
A = 10 x 5
A = 50 square feet
Area of the Rectangle B = 50 square feet.
ADDITION:
Area of the Rectangle A + Area of the Rectangle B
=> 64 square feet + 50 square feet
=> 114 square feet.
Hence, the workers need 114 square feet for artificial turf.

Question 7.
You want to install new carpet in the rectangular bedroom and the rectangular closet. How much carpet do you need to cover the floor?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 413

Answer:
GIVEN:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 413
Length of the rectangular bedroom = 20 feet
Width  of the rectangular bedroom = 10 feet
Area of the rectangular bedroom = l x w
A = 20 x 10
A = 200 square feet
Area of the rectangular bedroom = 200 square feet.
Length of the rectangular closet = 10 feet
Width  of the rectangular closet= 4 feet
Area of the rectangular closet = l x w
A = 10 x 4
A = 40 square feet
Area of the rectangular closet = 40 square feet.
ADDITION:
Carpet  needed to cover the floor = Area of the rectangular bedroom + Area of the rectangular closet.
=> 200 square feet + 40 square feet
=> 240 square feet.
Hence, the Carpet  needed to cover the floor = 240 square feet.

Question 8.
A gardener wants to enclose the garden with fencing. The garden is in the shape of two rectangles. How much fencing does the gardener need?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 414
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 414
Divide the surface into two rectangles.


Length of the Rectangle A = 8 yard
Width of the Rectangle A = 6 yard
Perimeter of the Rectangle A = 2l x 2w = 2( l + w)
P = 2( 8 + 6 )
P = 2 x 14
P = 28 yards
Perimeter of the Rectangle A = 28 yards.
Length of the Rectangle B = 10 yard
Width of the Rectangle B = 3 yard
Perimeter of the Rectangle B = 2l x 2w = 2( l + w)
P = 2( 10 + 3 )
P = 2 x 13
P = 26 yards
Perimeter of the Rectangle B = 26 yards.
Fencing the gardener needed = Perimeter of the Rectangle A + Perimeter of the Rectangle B
=> 28 yards + 26 yards
=> 54 yards.
Hence, the Fencing the gardener needed = 54 yards.

Problem Solving: Perimeter and Area Homework & Practice 12.4

Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve? Explain.

Question 1.
An indoor dog park has an area of 50,000 square feet. The owner creates a square welcome center inside the park that is 100 feet long. What is the area of the section that dogs can play in?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 71
Answer:
GIVEN:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 71

Area of the indoor dog park = 50,000 square feet.
The owner creates a square welcome center inside the park that is 100 feet long.
=> side of the square welcome center inside the park = 100 feet
Area of the square welcome center inside the park =  s x s
A = 100 x 100
A  = 10,000 square feet
Area of the square welcome center inside the park = 10,000 square feet.
Area of the section that dogs can play in = Area of the indoor dog park – Area of the square welcome center inside the park
=> 50,000 square feet – 10,000 square feet
=> 40,000 square feet.
Hence, the Area of the section that dogs can play in = 40,000 square feet.

Question 2.
You tile a hallway with square tiles that are 12 inches wide. You completely cover the hallway with 3 rows of 5 tiles. What is the area of the hallway?
Answer:
GIVEN:
Side of the square tiles = 12 inches
The hallway completely covered with 3 rows of 5 tiles.
Area of the square tiles hallway= s x s
A = 12 x 12
A = 144 square inches.
Hence, the Area of the square tiles hallway= 144 square inches.

Question 3.
Your friend makes a rectangular poster for a school play. The poster is 4 feet long and 3 feet wide. Ribbon costs $1 per foot. How much does it cost to add a ribbon border to the poster?
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangular poster = 4 feet
Width of the rectangular poster = 3 feet
Perimeter of the rectangular poster = 2l +2w = 2(l + w)
P = 2 ( 4 + 3 )
P = 2 x 7
P = 14 feet
Perimeter of the rectangular poster = 14 feet.
Ribbon costs $1 per foot
Cost of the ribbon border to the poster = 14 feet x $1= $14
Therefore, the Cost of the ribbon border to the poster = $14.

Question 4.
Writing
Explain how you know when you need to find the perimeter or the area of a rectangle when solving a word problem.
Answer:
GIVEN:
Perimeter can be thought  as the length of the outline of a shape.
Area can be defined as the space occupied by a flat shape or the surface of an object.
On the above referred points,  I try to calculate the perimeter or the area of the rectangle when solving a word problem.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
Your teacher joins two rectangular tables for students to complete a craft. How much newspaper does your teacher need to cover the tops of the tables with no overlap and no paper hanging over the sides?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 72
Answer:
GIVEN:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 72
Divide the surface into two rectangles.

Length of the rectangle A = 72 inches
Width of the of the rectangle A = 30 inches
Perimeter of the rectangle A = 2l + 2w = 2( l + w)
P = 2( 72 + 30 )
P =  2 x 102
P = 204 inches
Perimeter of the rectangle A = 204 inches.
Length of the rectangle B = 60 inches
Width of the of the rectangle B = 30 inches
Perimeter of the rectangle B = 2l + 2w = 2( l + w)
P = 2( 60 + 30 )
P = 2 x 90
P = 180 inches
Perimeter of the rectangle B = 180 inches.
Newspaper needed to cover the tops of the tables with no overlap and no paper hanging over the sides = Perimeter of the rectangle A + Perimeter of the rectangle B
= 204 inches + 180 inches
= 384 inches.
Hence, the newspaper needed to cover the tables = 384 inches.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
A landscaper buys 2 bags of grass seed. Each bag covers 5,000 square feet. A rectangular lawn is 200 feet long and 40 feet wide. Does the landscaper have enough seed to cover the lawn once? twice? Explain.
Answer:
GIVEN:
A landscaper buys 2 bags of grass seed.
Area of the bags seed covers = 5000 square feet.
Length of the rectangular lawn = 200 feet
Width of the rectangular lawn = 40 feet
Area of the rectangular lawn = l x w
A = 200 x 40
A = 8000 square feet.
Area of the rectangular lawn = 8000 square feet.
The landscaper have enough seed to cover the lawn once only not twice because he has  bags which can cover only 5000 square feet not 8000 square feet rectangular lawn completely.

Review & Refresh

Multiply

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 73
Answer:
GIVEN:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 73= 2 x 1/4
= 1 x 1/2
= 1/2
= 0.5
Hence, Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 73= 0.5.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 74
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 74= 12/5
= 2.4.
Hence, Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 74 = 2.4.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 75
Answer:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 75= 6 x 5/4
= 3 x 5/2
=15/2
= 7.5.
Hence, Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 75 = 7.5.

Use Perimeter and Area Formulas Performance Task 12

Stop-motion animation videos are made by taking multiple photographs of an object. Each photograph shows the object in a slightly different position. When all of the photographs are combined into a video, the object appears to be moving.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 76
1. You decide to make a stop-motion video. You make a background with an area of 12 square feet and a perimeter of 14 feet.
a. What are the dimensions of your background?
b. The part of the background in each photograph is 45 inches long and 30 inches wide. What is the perimeter of the background in each photograph?
c. What is the area of the background that is not in each photograph?
2. You take photographs for your video. Your video shows 15 photographs each second. How many photographs are in a 24-second video?
3. You start working on your animation at 3:05 P.M. and finish at 5:20 P.M. You spend equal amounts of time creating your background, taking photographs, and editing your video. How much time do you spend on each activity?
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the rectangular background= 12 square feet.
Perimeter  of the rectangular background = 14 feet.
1. a) All dimensions of the rectangular background =
Area of the rectangle = l x w
1 × 12 = 12.
2 × 6 = 12.
3 × 4 = 12.
The dimensions of the rectangular background = (1,12); (2,6);(3,4).
b) The Length of the background in each photograph = 45 inches The Width  of the background in each photograph =30 inches  The perimeter of the background in each photograph = 2l + 2w = 2(l + w)
P = 2 (45 + 30)
P = 2 x 75
P = 150 inches.
Hence, the perimeter of the background in each photograph = 150 inches.
2) 
GIVEN:
15 photograph taken in 1 second
=> ?? in 24 seconds
=> 24 x 15 = photographs taken in 24 seconds
=> 360 = photographs taken in 24 seconds
Hence, photographs taken in 24 seconds = 360.
3)
GIVEN:
Starting time on animation at 3:05 P.M.
Finishing time on animation at 5:20 P.M.
Time taken on each activity = Finishing time on animation – Starting time on animation
=> 5:20 P.M – 3:05 P.M
=> 2: 15 Hours
Hence, Time taken on each activity =2:15 Hours.

Use Perimeter and Area Formulas Activity

Area Roll and Conquer

Directions:

  1. Players take turns rolling two dice.
  2. On your turn, create a rectangle with the numbers on the dice as the length and width. Your rectangle cannot cover another rectangle.
  3. Shade the rectangle in your color. Record the multiplication equation for the rectangle.
  4. If you cannot create a rectangle on the board, then you lose your turn. Play 10 rounds, if possible.
  5. The player with the greatest area covered wins!

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 77
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 78
Answer:
GIVEN:

  1. Players take turns rolling two dice.

1)
2)

Length of the rectangle = 4 units
Width of the rectangle = 3 units.
3)
Equation of the rectangle = 4 x 3 = 12 square units.
4)   
5) 
The player with the greatest area covered wins!
Given Equation Area = 3 x 2 = 6 square units
My Equation Area= 4 x 3 =12 square units

Use Perimeter and Area Formulas Chapter Practice

12.1 Perimeter Formula for a Rectangle

Find the perimeter of the rectangle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 79
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle = 15 yard
Width of the rectangle = 13 yard
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w = 2( l + w)
P = 2 (15 + 13)
P = 2 x 28
P = 56 yards
Hence, the Perimeter of the rectangle = 56 yards.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 80
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle = 29 mm
Width of the rectangle = 23 mm
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w = 2( l + w)
P = 2 ( 29 + 23)
P = 2 x 52
P = 104 mm
Hence, the Perimeter of the rectangle = 104 mm.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 81
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle = 55 cm
Width of the rectangle = 46 cm
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w = 2( l + w)
P = 2( 55 + 46)
P = 2 x 101
P = 202 cm
Hence, the Perimeter of the rectangle = 202 cm.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 82
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle = 10 (2/12) feet = 20/12 = 1.67 feet
Width of the rectangle = 7 feet
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w = 2( l + w)
P = 2(1.67 + 7)
P = 2 x 7.67
P = 15.34 feet
Hence, the Perimeter of the rectangle = 15.34 feet.

12.2 Area Formula for a Rectangle

Find the area of the rectangle.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 83
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle =  58 m
Width of the rectangle = 37 m
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 58 x 37
A = 2146 square m.
Hence, the Area of the rectangle = 2146 square m.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 84
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle = 13 (1/2) inches = 27/2 = 13.5 inches
Width of the rectangle = 7 inches
Area of the rectangle = l x w
A = 13.5 x 7
A = 94.5 square inches
Hence, the Area of the rectangle = 94.5 square inches.

Question 7.
A rectangle has an area of 60 square feet. The dimensions are whole numbers. What are all of the possible dimensions of the rectangle?
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the rectangle = l feet
Width of the rectangle = w feet
Area of the rectangle = 60 square feet
Area of the rectangle = l x w
All possible dimensions of rectangle =
60 = 1 x 60,
60 = 2 x 30,
60 = 3 x 20,
60 = 4 x 15
60 = 5 x 12,
60 = 6 x 10.
All possible dimensions of rectangle =(1,60);(2,30);(3,20);(4,15);(5,12);(6,10).

12.3 Find Unknown Measures

Find the unknown measure of the rectangle.

Question 8.
Area = 48 square yards
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 85
Answer:
GIVEN:
Area of the rectangle = 48 square yards
Length of the rectangle = l yards
Width of the rectangle = 3 yards
Area of the rectangle = l x w
48 = l x 3
48/3 = l
16 = l
Hence, the Length of the rectangle = 16 yards.

Question 9.
Perimeter = 90 centimeters
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 86
Answer:
GIVEN:
Perimeter of the rectangle = 90 centimeters
Length of the rectangle = l cm
Width of the rectangle = 12 cm
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w = 2( l + w)
90 = 2( l + 12)
90/2 = l + 12
45 = l + 12
45 – 12 = l
33 = l
Hence, the Length of the rectangle = 33 cm.

Question 10.
Logic
What are the dimensions of Descartes’s rectangle?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 87
Answer:
GIVEN:
Perimeter of the rectangle = 10 meters
Length and Width have a product = 6 square meters
=> l x w = 6 square meters
=> Area of the rectangle = l x w = 6 square meters.
All possible dimensions of the rectangle =
6 = 1 x 6
6 = 2 x 3.
Hence, All possible dimensions of the rectangle =(1,6);(2,3).

12.4 Problem Solving: Perimeter and Area

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
You want to paint the wall. What is the area of the wall you will paint?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 88
Answer:
GIVEN:
Length of the outer rectangle = 14 feet
Width of the outer rectangle = 10 feet
Area of the outer rectangle = l x w
A = 14 x 10
A = 140 square feet.
Area of the outer rectangle = 140 square feet.
Length of the inside rectangle = 4 feet
Width of the inside rectangle = 1(1/2) feet = 3/2 = 1.5 feet
Area of the inside rectangle = l x w
A = 4 x 1.5
A = 6 square feet.
Area of the inside rectangle = 6 square feet.
SUBTRACTION:
Area of the wall for paint = Area of the outer rectangle  – Area of the inside rectangle
= 140 square feet – 6 square feet.
= 134 square feet.
Hence, the Area of the wall for paint = 134 square feet.

Question 12.
A park director orders 360 feet of fencing. Does he have enough to surround the tennis court?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas 89
Answer:
GIVEN:
Fencing length park director ordered = 360 feet.
Length of the rectangle = 40 yards
Width of the rectangle = 20 yards
Perimeter of the rectangle = 2l + 2w = 2 ( l + w)
P= 2( 40 + 20)
P = 2 x 60
P = 120 yards
CONVERTION:
1 yard = 3 feet
120 yards = ??
=> 120 x 3
=> 360 feet.
Hence, the director ordered fencing  360 feet is enough for fencing the tennis court because the required court perimeter is same 360 feet.

Conclusion:

I wish the information provided in the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 12 Use Perimeter and Area Formulas is helpful for you all. Share the pdf links with your friends and help them to overcome the difficulties in maths. If you any doubts feel free to post the comments in the below-mentioned comment box. Bookmark our page to get the updates of Big Ideas Math Grade 4 Answer Key for all Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 is designed to build knowledge when they are not in class. Our aim is to provide the best materials to students to enhance their math skills and to get interested in the subject. There are many ways to solve the problems know how to solve the problems in a simple manner on this page. With the help of the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 you can score good marks in the exams.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10

To excel in the exam you have to choose the best material to practice for the exams. Elementary School students can find detailed explanations for all the questions in the Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Solution Key Ch 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10. The Chapter Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 chapter includes Model and Count 6, Understand and Write 6, Model and Count 7, Understand and Write 7, and so on. Thus Download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 free pdf and start your preparation.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Model and Count 6

Lesson: 2 Understand and Write 6

Lesson: 3 Model and Count 7

Lesson: 4 Understand and Write 7

Lesson: 5 Model and Count 8

Lesson: 6 Understand and Write 8

Lesson: 7 Model and Count 9

Lesson: 8 Understand and Write 9

Lesson: 9 Model and Count 10

Lesson: 10 Understand and Write 10

Lesson: 11 Count and Order Numbers to 10

Performance Tasks

Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Vocabulary

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 1
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 2

Directions:

  • Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number.
  • Compare the number of lions to the number of cars. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.
    Answer:
    Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10

Chapter 3 Vocabulary Cards

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 3
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 4

Lesson 3.1 Model and Count 6

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 5
Directions:
Place 6 counters on the parking lot. Slide the counters to the frame.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 Model and Count 6

Think and Grow
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Think and Grow

Directions:
Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 7
Answer:
There are 6 objects
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Apply and Grow-Practice1.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 8
Answer:
There are 5 objects
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Apply and Grow-Practice2.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Apply and Grow-Practice3.

Directions:
1 – 3 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 10
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 10.1
Directions:
Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life-1

Model and Count 6 Homework & Practice 3.1

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Model and Count 6 Homework & Practice 3.1.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 13
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Model and Count 6 Homework & Practice 3.1.2

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 14
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Model and Count 6 Homework & Practice 3.1.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Model and Count 6 Homework & Practice 3.1.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Model and Count 6 Homework & Practice 3.1.5

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many. 5 Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Lesson 3.2 Understand and Write 6

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 17
Directions:
Use counters to show how many drums are in the story Music Class. Write how many drums are in the story.

Answer:
Number of Drums in the story = 2

Explanation:
blocks

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 18
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 19

Directions:

  • Count the objects. Say the number. Trace and write the number.
  • Count the instruments. Say the number. Write the number.
    Answer:
    Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Think and GrowBig-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Think and Grow...

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 20
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Apply and Grow-Practice.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 21

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Apply and Grow-Practice.2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 22

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Apply and Grow-Practice.3

Directions:
1 – 4 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 23
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Count the instruments in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Understand and Write 6 Homework & Practice 3.2

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 24
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Understand and Write 6 Homework & Practice 3.2.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 25
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Understand and Write 6 Homework & Practice 3.2.2

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the dots. Say the number. Write the number.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 26
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Understand and Write 6 Homework & Practice 3.2.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 27
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Understand and Write 6 Homework & Practice 3.2.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 28
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.1 -Understand and Write 6 Homework & Practice 3.2.5

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number. 5 Count the instruments in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Lesson 3.3 Model and Count 7

Explore and Grow
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 29
Directions:
Place 7 counters in the forest. Slide the counters to the frame.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.3 Model and Count 7

Think and Grow
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 70
Directions:
Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.3 Model and Count 7-Think and Grow

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 31
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.3 Model and Count 7-Apply and Grow-Practice1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 32
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.3 Model and Count 7-Apply and Grow-Practice2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 33
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.3 Model and Count 7-Apply and Grow-Practice3

Directions:
1 – 3 Count the animals. Color the boxes to show how many.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 34
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.3 Model and Count 7-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Count the animals in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Model and Count 7 Homework & Practice 3.3

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 36
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Model and Count 7 Homework & Practice 3.3.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 37
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Model and Count 7 Homework & Practice 3.3.2

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the animals. Color the boxes to show how many.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 38
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Model and Count 7 Homework & Practice 3.3.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 39
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Model and Count 7 Homework & Practice 3.3.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 40
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Model and Count 7 Homework & Practice 3.3.5

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the animals. Color the boxes to show how many. 5 Count the animals in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Lesson 3.4 Understand and Write 7

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 41
Directions:
Use counters to show how many raindrops are in the story Rainy Day. Write how many raindrops are in the story.
Answer:
Number of Rain drops in the story = one or 1

Explanation:
Rain drops in the story =
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.4 Understand and Write 7

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 42
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.4 Understand and Write 7-Think and Grow
Directions:

  • Count the objects. Say the number. Trace and write the number.
  • Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 43
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.4-Apply and Grow-Practice1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 44
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.4-Apply and Grow-Practice2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 45
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.4-Apply and Grow-Practice3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 46
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.4-Apply and Grow-Practice4

Directions:
1 – 4 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 47
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.4-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Count the objects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Understand and Write 7 Homework & Practice 3.4

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 48
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.4-Understand and Write 7 Homework & Practice 3.4.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 49
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.4-Understand and Write 7 Homework & Practice 3.4.2

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the dots. Say the number. Write the number.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 50
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.4-Understand and Write 7 Homework & Practice 3.4.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 51
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.4-Understand and Write 7 Homework & Practice 3.4.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 52
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.4-Understand and Write 7 Homework & Practice 3.4.5

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number. 5 Count the objects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Lesson 3.5 Model and Count 8

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 53
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.4-Lesson 3.5 Model and Count 8

Directions:
Place 8 counters in the desert. Slide the counters to the frame.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 54

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 55
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.5 Model and Count 8-Think and Grow

Directions:
Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 57.1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.5 Model and Count 8-Apply and Grow-Practice1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 57.2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.5 Model and Count 8-Apply and Grow-Practice2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 57.3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.5 Model and Count 8-Apply and Grow-Practice3

Directions:
1 – 3 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 58
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.5-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life
Directions:
Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Model and Count 8 Homework & Practice 3.5

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 59
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.5-Model and Count 8 Homework & Practice 3.5.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 60
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.5-Model and Count 8 Homework & Practice 3.5.2

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 61
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.5-Model and Count 8 Homework & Practice 3.5.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 62
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.5-Model and Count 8 Homework & Practice 3.5.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 63
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.5-Model and Count 8 Homework & Practice 3.5.5

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many. 5 Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Lesson 3.6 Understand and Write 8

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 65
Answer:
There are zero bugs on the Ladybug in the story….

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.6 Understand and Write 8
Directions:
Use counters to show how many spots are on the ladybug in the story Bugs, Bugs, Bugs. Write how many spots are on the ladybug.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 66

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 67
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.6 -Think and Grow
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.6 -Think and Grow...

Directions:

  • Count the objects. Say the number. Trace and write the number.
  • Count the bugs. Say the number. Write the number.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 69
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.6 -Apply and Grow-Practice1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 700
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.6 -Apply and Grow-Practice2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 71
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.6 -Apply and Grow-Practice3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 72
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.6 -Apply and Grow-Practice4

Directions:
1 – 4 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 73
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.6 -Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Count the objects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Understand and Write 8 Homework & Practice 3.6

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 74
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.6 -Understand and Write 8 Homework & Practice 3.6.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 75
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.6 -Understand and Write 8 Homework & Practice 3.6.2

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the dots. Say the number. Write the number.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 76
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.6 -Understand and Write 8 Homework & Practice 3.6.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 77
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.6 -Understand and Write 8 Homework & Practice 3.6.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 78
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.6 -Understand and Write 8 Homework & Practice 3.6.5

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number. 5 Count the objects in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Lesson 3.7 Model and Count 9

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 79
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.7 Model and Count 9

Directions:
Place 9 counters on the beach. Slide the counters to the frame.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 80
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.7 Model and Count 9-Think and Grow

Directions:
Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 83
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.7 Model and Count 9-Apply and Grow-Practice1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 84
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.7 Model and Count 9-Apply and Grow-Practice2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 85
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.7 Model and Count 9-Apply and Grow-Practice3

Directions:
1 – 3 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 86
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 87
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.7 Model and Count 9-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Model and Count 9 Homework & Practice 3.7

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 89
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.7 Model and Count 9-Model and Count 9 Homework & Practice 3.7.1

Question 2.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 90
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.7 Model and Count 9-Model and Count 9 Homework & Practice 3.7.2

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 91
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.7 Model and Count 9-Model and Count 9 Homework & Practice 3.7.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 92
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.7 Model and Count 9-Model and Count 9 Homework & Practice 3.7.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 93
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.7 Model and Count 9-Model and Count 9 Homework & Practice 3.7.5

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many. 5 Count the animals in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Lesson 3.8 Understand and Write 9

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 94

Directions:
Use counters to show how many baseballs are in the story My Baseball Game. Write how many baseballs are in the story.
Answer:
Number of balls in the story My Baseball Game = One or 1.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.7 Model and Count 9-Lesson 3.8 Understand and Write 9

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 95

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 96
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.7 Model and Count 9-Lesson 3.8 Understand and Write 9-Think and Grow

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson 3.7 Model and Count 9-Lesson 3.8 Understand and Write 9-Think and Grow....

Directions:

  • Count the objects. Say the number. Trace and write the number.
  • Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 97
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.8 Understand and Write 9-Apply and Grow-Practice1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 97.1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.8 Understand and Write 9-Apply and Grow-Practice2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 97.2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.8 Understand and Write 9-Apply and Grow-Practice3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 97.3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.8 Understand and Write 9-Apply and Grow-Practice4

Directions:
1 – 4 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 98
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.8 Understand and Write 9-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life
Directions:
Count the balls in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Understand and Write 9 Homework & Practice 3.8

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 99
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.8 Understand and Write 9-Understand and Write 9 Homework & Practice 3.8.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 100
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.8 Understand and Write 9-Understand and Write 9 Homework & Practice 3.8.2

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the dots. Say the number. Write the number.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 101
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.8 Understand and Write 9-Understand and Write 9 Homework & Practice 3.8.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 102
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.8 Understand and Write 9-Understand and Write 9 Homework & Practice 3.8.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 103
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.8 Understand and Write 9-Understand and Write 9 Homework & Practice 3.8.5

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number. 5 Count the bowling balls in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Lesson 3.9 Model and Count 10

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 104
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.9 Model and Count 10

Directions:
Place 10 counters in the soil. Slide the counters to the frame.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 105

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 106
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.9 Model and Count 10-Think and Grow

Directions:
Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 107
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.9 Model and Count 10-Apply and Grow-Practice1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 108
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.9 Model and Count 10-Apply and Grow-Practice2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 109
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.9 Model and Count 10-Apply and Grow-Practice3

Directions:
1 – 3 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 110
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.9 Model and Count 10-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Model and Count 10 Homework & Practice 3.9

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 111
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.9 Model and Count 10-Model and Count 10 Homework & Practice 3.9.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 112
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.9 Model and Count 10-Model and Count 10-Homework & Practice 3.9.2

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 113
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.9 Model and Count 10-Model and Count 10-Homework & Practice 3.9.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 114
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.9 Model and Count 10-Model and Count 10-Homework & Practice 3.9.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 115
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.9 Model and Count 10-Model and Count 10-Homework & Practice 3.9.5

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the objects. Color the boxes to show how many. 5 Count the objects in the picture. Color the boxes to show how many.

Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10

Explore and Grow
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 116
Answer:
Number of Star fishes in the story In the water = One or 1.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10
Directions:
Use counters to show how many starfish are in the story In the Water. Write how many starfish are in the story.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 117
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Think and Grow

Directions:

  • Count the objects. Say the number. Trace and write the number.
  • Count the sea creatures. Say the number. Write the number.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 119
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Apply and Grow-Practice1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 120
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Apply and Grow-Practice2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 121
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Apply and Grow-Practice3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 122
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Apply and Grow-Practice4

Directions:
1 – 4 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 123
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Count the sea creatures in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Understand and Write 10 Homework & Practice 3.10

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 124
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Understand and Write 10 Homework & Practice 3.10.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 125
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Understand and Write 10 Homework & Practice 3.10.2

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the dots. Say the number. Write the number.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 126
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Understand and Write 10 Homework & Practice 3.10.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 127
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Understand and Write 10 Homework & Practice 3.10.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 128
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Understand and Write 10 Homework & Practice 3.10.5

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the objects. Say the number. Write the number. 5 Count the sea creatures in the picture. Say the number. Write the number.

Lesson 3.11 Count and Order Numbers to 10

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 129
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Lesson 3.11 Count and Order Numbers to 10

Directions:
Place counters in the ten frame as you count forward to 10. Trace and write the missing numbers.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 130
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Think and Grow

Directions:
Count the dots in each ten frame. Say the number. Write the number. Write the numbers in order. Start with the given number.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 131
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Apply and Grow-Practice1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 132
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Apply and Grow-Practice2

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the dots in each ten frame. Say the number. Write the number. Then write the numbers in order.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 133
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Count backward from the number on the timer. Write the numbers.

Count and Order Numbers to 10 Homework & Practice 3.11

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 134
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Order Numbers to 10 Homework & Practice 3.11.1

Directions:
1 Count the dots. Say the number. Write the number. Then write the numbers in order.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 135
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Order Numbers to 10 Homework & Practice 3.11.2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 136
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Order Numbers to 10 Homework & Practice 3.11.3

Directions:
2 Count the dots on each domino. Say the number. Write the number. Write the numbers in order. Start with the number 7. 3 You are playing hide-and-seek. Count forward from 1. Write the numbers.

Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Performance Task

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 137

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 138
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Performance Task

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 139
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Performance Task2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 140
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Performance Task3

Directions:
1 Count the animals in the picture. Say the number. Write the number. Then write the numbers in order. 2 Draw dots to show 10 birds in the tree. 3 Show how many birds in another way.

Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Activity

Number Land
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 141
Directions:
Put the Subitizing Cards 5–10 into a pile. Start at Descartes. Take turns drawing a card and moving your piece to that matching number. Repeat this process until you have gone around the board and back to Descartes.

Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Chapter Practice 3

3.1 Model and Count 6

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 142
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Chapter Practice 3.1

3.2 Understand and Write 6

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 143
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Chapter Practice 3.2

3.3 Model and Count 7

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 144
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Chapter Practice 3.3

Directions:
1 Count the train engines. Color the boxes to show how many. 2 Count the music notes. Say the number. Write the number. 3 Count the foxes. Color the boxes to show how many.

3.4 Understand and Write 7

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 145
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Chapter Practice 3.4

3.5 Model and Count 8

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 146
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Chapter Practice 3.5

3.6 Understand and Write 8

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 147
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Chapter Practice 3.6

Directions:
4 Count the lightning bolts. Say the number. Write the number.
5 Count the grapes. Color the boxes to show how many.
6 Count the grasshoppers. Say the number. Write the number.

3.7 Model and Count 9

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 148
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Chapter Practice 3.7

3.8 Understand and Write 9

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 149
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Chapter Practice 3.8

3.9 Model and Count 10

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 150
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Chapter Practice 3.9

Directions:
7 Count the shovels. Color the boxes to show how many.
8 Count the softballs. Say the number. Write the number.
9 Count the potatoes. Color the boxes to show how many.

3.10 Understand and Write 10

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 151
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Chapter Practice 3.10

3.11 Count and Order Numbers to 10

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 152
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter 3-Count-and-Write-Numbers-6 to 10-Lesson-Lesson 3.10 Understand and Write 10-Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 Chapter Practice 3.11

Directions:
10 Count the shells. Say the number. Write the number. 11 Count the dots on each domino. Say the number. Write the number. Then write the numbers in order.

Conclusion:

We wish the details prevailed in the above article regarding Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 3 Count and Write Numbers 6 to 10 is helpful for you. So, the students of Kth Grade can make use of the above links and score good marks in the exams. Stay tuned to our page to get the latest updates and solutions for all Big Ideas Math Grade K Chapters from 1 to 13.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9

Get the free pdf link to Download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers from here. This Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers was designed by subject experts to assist the primary school students. We have provided the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers in the pdf format so that you can prepare offline.

Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers

Start your preparation by taking help from Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Solution Key Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers and learn the concepts from practice tests, cumulative tests, and others. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers helps both Students and Teachers out there to get all the concepts underlying. Score good marks in your exams with the help of Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Add Tens and Ones

Lesson: 2 Add Tens and Ones Using a Number Line

Lesson: 3 Make a 10 to Add

Lesson: 4 Add Two-Digit Numbers

Lesson: 5 Practice Addition Strategies

Lesson: 6 Problem Solving: Addition

Chapter-9: Add Two-Digit Numbers

Add Two-Digit Numbers Vocabulary

Organize It

Review Words:
120 chart
column
ones
row
tens

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 1
Answer:
Tens and ones.

Explanation:
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 3 lines 3 x 10 = 30.
In ones row there 7 boxes 7 x 1 = 7
so, total there are 37

Define It

Use the review words to complete the puzzle.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 2
Answer:
1) 120Chart
2) Column
3)Row

Explanation:
First figure shows the numbers from 1 to 120.
The vocabulary for the figure is 120 chart which is represented in the figure horizontally.
Second figure shows columns colored
The vocabulary for second figure is column
Third figure shows rows colored
The vocabulary for the third figure is row

Lesson 9.1 Add Tens and Ones

Explore and Grow

Show how you can use a model to solve.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 3
32 + 7 = _________

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 4
Answer:
32 + 7= 39 Three tens and 9 ones.
Explanation:
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 3 lines 3 x 10 = 30.
In ones row there 9 boxes 9 x 1 = 9
so, total there are 39

Show and Grow

Question 1.
25 + 12 = _________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 5
Answer:
25 + 12 = 37 Three tens and 7 ones
Explanation:
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 2 lines 2 x 10 = 20.
In ones row there 5 boxes 5 x 1 = 5
so, total there are 25.
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 1 lines 1 x 10 = 10.
In ones row there 2 boxes 2 x 1 = 2
so, total there are 12
By adding both the numbers the answer is 37.

Question 2.
36 + 3 = __________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 6
Answer:
36 +3= 39, three tens and 9 ones
Explanation:
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 3 lines 3 x 10 = 30.
In ones row there 6 boxes 6 x 1 = 6
so, total there are 36.
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 0 lines 0 x 10 = 0.
In ones row there 3 boxes 3 x 1 = 3
so, total there are 3
By adding both the numbers the answer is 39.

Question 3.
21 + 8 = __________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 7
Answer:
21+ 8 = 29, 2 tens and 9 ones.
Explanation:
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 2 lines 2 x 10 = 20.
In ones row there 1 boxes 1 x 1 = 1
so, total there are 1.
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 0 lines 0 x 10 = 0.
In ones row there 8 boxes 8 x 1 = 8
so, total there are 8
By adding both the numbers the answer is 29.

Question 4.
22 + 24 = __________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 8
Answer:
22 + 24 = 46, 4 tens and 6 ones
Explanation:
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 2 lines 2 x 10 = 20.
In ones row there 2 boxes 2 x 1 = 2
so, total there are 22.
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 2 lines 2 x 10 = 20.
In ones row there 4 boxes 4 x 1 = 4
so, total there are 24
By adding both the numbers the answer is 46.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 5.
34 + 4 = __________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 9
Answer:
34 + 4 = 38, 3 tens and 8 ones.
Explanation:
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 3 lines 3 x 10 = 30.
In ones row there 4 boxes 4 x 1 = 4
so, total there are 34.
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 0 lines 0 x 10 = 0.
In ones row there 4 boxes 4 x 1 = 4
so, total there are 4
By adding both the numbers the answer is 38.

Question 6.
43 + 15 = __________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 10

Answer:
43 + 15 = 58, 5 tens and 8 ones.

Explanation:
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 4 lines 4 x 10 = 40.
In ones row there 3 boxes 3 x 1 = 3
so, total there are 43.
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 1 lines 1 x 10 = 10.
In ones row there 5 boxes 5 x 1 = 5.
so, total there are 15
By adding both the numbers the answer is 58.

Question 7.
71 + 20 = __________
Answer:
71 + 20 = 91,
9 tens and 1 ones.

Explanation:
The number of choclates with rim is 71
The number of choclates with jim is 20
Total number of choclates is 91.

Question 8.
93 + 6 = __________
Answer:
93 + 6 = 99,
9 tens and 9 ones.

Explanation:
The number of choclates with rim is 93
The number of choclates with jim is 6
Total number of choclates is 99

Question 9.
55 + 23 = __________
Answer:
55 + 23 = 78, 7 tens and 8 ones.

Explanation:
The number of choclates with rim is 55
The number of choclates with jim is 23
Total number of choclates is 78.

Question 10.
62 + 32 = __________
Answer:
62 + 32 = 94, 9 tens and 4 ones.

Explanation:
The number of choclates with rim is 62
The number of choclates with jim is 32
Total number of choclates is 94.

Question 11.
MP Reasoning
Circle the number to complete the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 11
Answer:
41 + 5 = 46,
Circled the number 5.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You watch television for 24 minutes in the morning and 32 minutes at night. How many minutes do you spend watching television in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 12
Addition equation:

Model:

___________ minutes
Answer: 56

Explanation:
Models: television,
24 minutes in the morning and 32 minutes in the night
24 + 32 = 56.

Show and Grow

Question 12.
You do 42 jumping jacks in the morning and 46 at night. How many jumping jacks do you do in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 13
Addition equation:

Model:

___________ jumping jacks
Answer: 88

Explanation:
Models : Jumping jacks,
42 jumping jacks in the morning and 46 in the night
42 + 46 = 88. 88 Jumping jacks

Add Tens and Ones Practice 9.1

Question 1.
42 + 7 = _________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 14
Answer:
42 + 7 = 49, 4 tens and 9 ones.

Explanation:
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 4 lines 4 x 10 = 40.
In ones row there 2 boxes 2 x 1 = 2.
so, total there are 42.
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 0 lines 0 x 10 = 0.
In ones row there 7 boxes 7 x 1 = 7
so, total there are 7
By adding both the numbers the answer is 49.

Question 2.
61 + 35 = __________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 15
Answer:
61 + 35 = 96, 9 tens and 6 ones.

Explanation:
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 6 lines 6 x 10 = 60.
In ones row there 1 boxes 1 x 1 = 1
so, total there are 61.
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 3 lines 3 x 10 = 30.
In ones row there 5 boxes 5 x 1 = 5
so, total there are 35
By adding both the numbers the answer is 96.

Question 3.
74 + 11 = __________
Answer:
74 + 11 = 85, 8 tens and 5 ones.

Explanation:
The number of choclates with rim is 74
The number of choclates with jim is 11
Total number of choclates is 85.

Question 4.
86 + 2 = ___________
Answer:
86 + 2 = 88, 8 tens and 8 ones.

Explanation:
The number of choclates with rim is 86
The number of choclates with jim is 2
Total number of choclates is 88.

Question 5.
MP Reasoning
Circle the number to complete the equation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 16
Answer:
22 + 70 =  92, circled the 70 to complete the number.

Question 6.

Modeling Real Life
You eat 33 grapes. Your friend eats 23 grapes. How many grapes do you and your friend eat in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 17

___________ grapes
Answer: 55

Explanation:
Me ate 33 and my friend ate 23 in all
33 + 23 = 55.
We bote ate 55 in all.

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 18
__________ tens and _________ ones is _________ .
Answer:
8 tens and 2 ones is 82

Explanation:
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 8 lines 8 x 10 = 80.
In ones row there 2 boxes 2 x 1 = 2
so, total there are 82.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 19
__________ tens and _________ ones is _________ .
Answer:
4 tens and 6 ones is 46

Explanation:
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 4 lines 4 x 10 = 40.
In ones row there 6 boxes 6 x 1 = 6
so, total there are 46.

Lesson 9.2 Add Tens and Ones Using a Number Line

Explore and Grow

Color to show how you can use the hundred chart to find the sum.

23 + 34 = ___________

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 20
Answer:
23 + 34 = 57,
5 tens and 7 ones.

Explanation:
In the below figure 120 chart is shown in that 23 and 34 are colored
that two numbers are added
to get the total sum.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
22 + 7 = __________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 21
Answer: 29

Explanation:
22 + 7 = 29,
the addition is represented on number line

Question 2.
35 + 41 = __________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 22
Answer:
35 + 41 = 76.

Explanation:
35 + 41 is represented on the number line.

Apply and Grow: practice

Question 3.
53 + 40 = _________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 23
Answer:
53 + 40 = 93.

Question 4.
82 + 12 = __________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 24
Answer: 82 + 12 = 94.

Question 5.
48 + 31 = ___________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 24
Answer: 48 + 31 = 79.
From the above equation 48 is marked and from that point
3 points with 10 are taken and 1 with one is taken
48 + 31 = 79

Question 6.
MP Structure
Write an equation that matches the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 25
Answer: 37 + 23 = 60

Explanation:
From the point 37 to 60
2 points with 10 are taken and 3 points with 1 are taken
so, the total equation is 37 + 23 = 60.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

The home team scores 37 points. The visiting team scores 22 more. How many points does the visiting team score?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 26
Addition equation:

Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 27

__________ points
Answer: 37 + 22 = 59

Explanation:
A point on the number line is taken as 37
From there 2 poins with 10 that is 20
From there 2 more points with 2 are taken
total it makes 22

Show and Grow

Question 7.
Your friend scores 63 points. You score 25 more than your friend. How many points do you score?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 28
Addition equation:

Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 27

__________ points
Answer: 63 + 25 = 88
Explanation:
A point on the number line is taken as 63
From there 2 poins with 10 that is 20
From there 5 more points with 5 are taken
total it makes 88.

Add Tens and Ones Using a Number Line Practice 9.2

Question 1.
13 + 60 = __________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 29
Answer: 73

Question 2.
81 + 8 = _____________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 30
Answer: 89

Question 3.
56 + 42 = ____________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 30
Answer: 98

Question 4.
MP Structure
Write an equation that matches the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 31
Answer: 17 + 41= 58

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
There are 36 black keys on a piano. There are 16 more white keys than black keys. How many white keys are there?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 32
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 33

____________ white keys
Answer: 52 white keys

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
3 + 7 + 4 = ___________
Answer: 14

Question 7.
4 + 5 + 6 = ___________
Answer: 15

Lesson 9.3 Make a 10 to Add

Explore and Grow

How can you use the model to solve?

38 + 6 = ___________

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 34
Answer:
38 + 6 = 44

Explanation:
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 3 lines 3 x 10 = 30.
In ones row there 8 boxes 8 x 1 = 8
so, total there are 38.
The first row represents the tens and second row represents the ones
In tens row there are 0 lines 0 x 10 = 0.
In ones row there 6 boxes 6 x 1 = 6
so, total there are 6
By adding both the numbers the answer is 44.
Count one numbers from both the sides 8 + 6 = 14
It has 10 in it

Show and Grow

Question 1.
41 + 7 = ___________
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 35
Make a 10?           Yes         No
Answer: No

Explanation:
By adding ones place from both the sides
1 + 7 = 8
So, the answer is no

Question 2.
56 + 8 = ___________
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 36
Make a 10?           Yes         No
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
By adding ones place from both the sides
6 + 8 = 14
So, there is 10 in it.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
72 + 4 = _________
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 37
Make a 10?           Yes         No
Answer: No

Explanation:
By adding ones place from both the sides
2 + 4 = 6
So, There is no 10 in it.

Question 4.
63 + 9 = ___________
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 38
Make a 10?           Yes         No
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
By adding ones place from both the sides
3  + 9 = 11
So, there is 10 in it.

Question 5.
14 + 6 = __________
Make a 10?           Yes         No
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
By adding ones place from both the sides
4 + 6 = 10
so, there is 10 in it.

Question 6.
27 + 5 = __________
Make a 10?           Yes         No
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
By adding ones place from both the sides
7 + 5 = 12
So, there is 10 in it.

Question 7.
46 + 7 = ___________
Make a 10?           Yes         No
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
By adding ones place from both the sides
6 + 7 = 13
So, there is 10 in it

Question 8.
81 + 8 = ___________
Make a 10?           Yes         No
Answer: No

Explanation:
By adding ones place from both the sides
1 + 8 = 9
so, there is 10 in it.

MP Logic
Complete.
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 39

Answer: 62

Explanation:
56 + 6 = 62
56 + 4 makes 60 and 4 + 2 = 6
6 is divided as 4 + 2
60 + 2

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 40
Answer: 48


Explanation:
39 + 9 = 48
39 + 1 = 40, 9 is divided to 1 and 8.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You put 17 puzzle pieces together. There are 7 left. How many puzzle pieces are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 41
Addition equation:

Model:

Make a 10?           Yes         No

___________ Puzzle pieces
Answer: Yes.

Explanation:
17 puzzle pieces are together
7 added to it
17 + 7 = 24
The ones place of both sides are added 7 + 7 = 14
so, there is ten in it.

Show and Grow

Question 11.
You color 46 states. There are 4 left. How many states are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 42
Addition equation:

Model:

Make a 10?           Yes         No

___________ States
Answer: 50

Explanation:
Colored states are 46
uncolored states are 4
Total states are 46 + 4 = 50
6 + 4 = 10
Both the sides ones places are added

Make a 10 to Add Practice 9.3

Question 1.
66 + 5 = __________
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 43
Make a 10?           Yes         No
Answer: yes

Explanation:
Number of lines which represents 10 is 6 that in tens place
in ones place both the sides 6 + 5 = 11
so, there is 10 in it

Question 2.
74 + 3 = ____________
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 44
Make a 10?           Yes         No
Answer: No

Explanation:
Number of lines which represents 10 is 7 that in tens place
in ones place both the sides 4 + 3 = 7.
so, there is no 10 in it.

Question 3.
28 + 8 _____________
Make a 10?           Yes         No
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
2 represents tens place 2 x 10 = 20
In ones place from both the sides 8 + 8 = 16
so, There is ten in it.

Question 4.
52 + 9 = ______________
Make a 10?           Yes         No
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
5 represents tens place 5 x 10 = 50
In ones place from both the sides 2 + 9 = 11
so, There is ten in it.
52 + 9 = 61.

Question 5.
26 + 7 = ____________
Make a 10?           Yes         No
Answer: yes

Explanation:
2 represents tens place 2 x 10 = 20
In ones place from both the sides 6 + 7 = 13
so, There is ten in it.
26 + 7 = 33.

Question 6.
41 + 6 = ____________
Make a 10?           Yes         No
Answer: No

Explanation:
4 represents tens place 4 x 10 = 40
In ones place from both the sides 1 + 6 = 7
so, There is no ten in it.
41 + 6 = 47.

MP Logic
Complete.
Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 45
Answer: 41


Explanation:
37 + 4 = 41
4 is divided to 3 and 1
37 + 3 = 40
40 plus 1 is 41

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 46
Answer: 54

Explanation:
48 + 6 = 54
6 is divided in to 2 and 4
48 + 2 = 50 So, there is ten in it
50 + 4 = 54

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
A snake lays 24 eggs. Another snake lays 9 eggs. How many eggs are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 47
Answer:
33 eggs

Explanation:
A snake lays 24 eggs
another snake lays 9
there are 33 eggs in all.

Review & Refresh

Question 10.
Color the shapes that have 4 vertices.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 48
Answer:  Square and rectangle

Explanation:
For a square there are 4 vertices and for a rectangle there are 4 vertices. vertices are Nothing but corners or joining of the two lines.

Lesson 9.4 Add Two-Digit Numbers

Explore and Grow

Show how you can use a model to solve.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 49

43 + 28 = _________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 50
Answer: 43 + 28 = 61

Explanation:
4 tens and 3 ones
2 tens and 8 ones
The figure shows lines represents tens and
circls represent ones

Show and Grow

Question 1.
39 + 45 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 51
___________ tens __________ ones
Answer: 7 tens and 14 ones

Explanation:
The figure shows 39 represents 3 tens and 9 ones
and 4 tens 5 ones
3 + 4 = 7 and 9 + 5 = 14.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
19 + 35 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 52
Answer: 1 + 3 = 4 and 9 + 5 = 14

Explanation:
First figure shows 1 tens and 9 ones
3 tens and 5 ones
The second figure shows 1 + 3 = 4
and 9 + 5 = 14

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 53
Answer: 60
Explanation:
43 + 17 = 60
In the 4 and 3 are in tens place and 3 and 7 are in ones place
My friend has 43 choclates and me has 17 more of it.
Total choclates is 60.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 54
Answer: 81

Explanation:
67 + 41 = 81
my friend jim has 67 lollipops
and rim has 41 lollipops
in total jim and rim has 81 lollipops.

Question 5.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is the sum correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 55
Answer: 76
Explanation:

58 + 28 = 76
The line represents 10 and circles represents 1
5 tens and 8 ones
2 tens and 8 ones
by adding 8 from the both places we get 16 and there is 10 in it.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You earn a sticker for every 10 pages you read. You read 34 pages one week and 37 the next. How many stickers do you earn?
Addition problem:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 56
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 57
Write the missing numbers:
_________ tens _________ one
__________ stickers
Answer: 71

Explanation:
I earn a sticker for every 10 pages
first I read 34 pages and then 37 pages
34 + 37 = 71
so, total 71 pages for every 10 pages 1 sticker 7 stickers

Show and Grow

Question 6.
You earn a coin for every lo cans you recycle. You recycle 18 cans one week and 25 the next. How many coins do you earn?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 58
Addition problem:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 59
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 60
Write the missing numbers:
_________ tens _________ one
__________ coins
Answer:  4 tens and 3 ones 4 coins
Explanation:
If I recycle 10 cans I get 1 coin
in first week i recycled 18 cans and in next week 25 cans
18 + 25 = 43.

Add Two-Digit Numbers Practice 9.4

Question 1.
57 + 15 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 61
Answer: 57 + 15 = 72

Explanation:
In 57 5 tens and 7 ones
in 15 1 tens and 5 ones
If we add both we get 7 tens and 2 ones.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 62
Answer: 76

Explanation:
In 40 4 tens and 0 ones
in 36 3 tens and 6 ones
if we add both we get 7 tens and 6 ones.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 63
Answer: 81
Explanation:
In 29 2 tens and 9 ones
in 52 5 tens and  2 ones
If we add both 29 and 52 is 81
8 tens and 1 ones.

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
Do you need to use the make a 10 strategy to find each sum?
28 + 34 = ?      Yes      No
56 + 15 = ?      Yes      No
42 + 21 = ?      Yes      No
68 + 11 = ?      Yes      No
Answer:
28 + 34 = 62      Yes
56 + 15 = 71    Yes
42 + 21 = 63      No
68 + 11 = 79     No
Explanation:
In first sum 28 + 34
if we take 8 and 4 and add we get 12 taken from ones place
we get 10 in it.
In second sum 56 + 15
if we take 6 and 5 and add we get 11 taken from ones place
we get 10 in it.
In third sum 42 + 21
if we take 2 and 1 and add we get 3 taken from ones place
we didn’t get 10 in it
In fourth sum 68 + 11
if we take 8 and 1 and add we get 9 taken from ones place
we didn’t get 10 in it.

Question 5.
You need a box for every 10 muffins you make. You make 33 blueberry muffins and 47 banana muffins. How many boxes do you need?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 64

__________ boxes
Answer: 8 boxes
Explanation:
We need a box for 10 muffins that we make
We made 33 blueberry muffins
and 47 banana muffins
if we add we get 33 + 47 = 80
so, I get 8 boxes.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Is the equation true or false?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 65
Answer: 15 = 16 false

Explanation:
6+ 9 = 15 and 17 – 1= 16
15 is not equal to 16

Lesson 9.5 Practice Addition Strategies

Explore and Grow

Show two ways you can find the sum.

23 + 39 = __________

23 + 39 = __________

Answer:  23 + 39 = 62
Explanation: one method

second method

Show and Grow

Question 1.
47 + 24 = ________
Answer: 72

Explanation:
4 tens and 7 ones
2 tens and 4 ones
tens represents the lines and ones represents the circles

Question 2.
38 + 43 = ________
Answer: 81

Explanation:
3 tens and 8 ones
4 tens and 3 ones
tens represents the lines and ones represents circles

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
22 + 18 = ________
Answer: 40

Explanation:
2 tens and 2 ones
1 tens and 8 ones
tens represents the lines and ones represents the circles

Question 4.
57 + 34 = __________
Answer: 91

Explanation:
5 tens and 7 ones
3 tens and 4 ones
lines represents the tens and circles represents the ones

Question 5.
73 + 19 = __________
Answer: 92

Explanation:
lines represents the tens and circles represents the ones
7 ten and 3 ones
1 tens and 9 ones

Question 6.
81 + 11 = __________
Answer: 92

Explanation:
the lines represents tens and the circles represents ones
8 tens and 1 ones
1 tens and 1 ones
If we add both we get
92

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is the sum correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 66
Answer: No

Explanation:
no the sum is not correct.
But figure shown is correct
17 + 26 = 43

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You hove 48 songs. Your friend has 27 more than you. How many songs does your friend have?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 67
Addition equation:

Model:

____________ songs
Answer: 75 songs

Explanation:
Model : songs
I have 48 songs
and my friend had 27 more than me
Total songs that my friend had is 48 + 27 = 75 songs

Show and Grow

Question 8.
Your friend sells 56 candles. You sell 35 more than your friend. How many candles do you sell?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 68
Addition equation:

Model:

____________ candles
Answer: 91 candles

Explanation:
Models: candles
My friend has 56 candles
and me has 35 more than my friend
so, I had 91 candles with me

Practice Addition Strategies Practice 9.5

Question 1.
62 + 29 = _______
Answer: 99

Explanation:
6 tens and 2 ones
2 tens and 9 ones
by adding both the numbers i get is 99

Question 2.
84 + 8 = ________
Answer: 92

Explanation:
8 tens and 4 ones
0 tens and 8 ones
by adding both the numbers i get is 92

Question 3.
75 + 17 = ________
Answer: 92

Explanation:
7 tens and 5 ones
1 tens and 7 ones
by adding both the numbers i get is 92

Question 4.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is the sum correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 69
Answer:

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life You collect 12 leaves. Your friend collects 26 more than you. How many leaves does your friend collect?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 70

____________ leaves
Answer: 38 leaves

Explanation:
I collect 12 leaves and my friend collect 26 more than me
total leaves my friend had is
12 + 26 = 38 leaves.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Circle the measurable attributes of the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 71
Answer: length or height.

Explanation:
For table length or height is the measuring attribute
cubes represents to measure the length and height.

Lesson 9.6 Problem Solving: Addition

Explore and Grow

Model the story.

Newton has 15 dog bones. Descartes gives him 8 more. How many dog bones does Newton have now?

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 72
Answer: 23 bones

Explanation:
Newton has 15 bones and Descartes gave him 8 more
The total bones newton had is 23 bones.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
You have 49 toy soldiers. You buy some more. Now you have 84. How many toy soldiers did you buy?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 73
Circle what you know:

Underline what you need to find.

Solve:

_____________ toy soldiers
Answer: 35 toy soldiers

Explanation:
I have 49 toy soldiers
If i buy 35 more
Then i will have 84 in total.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
You have 55 pounds of dog food and some cat food. You have 63 pounds of pet food in all. How many pounds of cat food do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 74
Circle what you know.

Underline what you need to find.

Solve:

___________ pounds
Answer:  8 pounds

Explanation:
I have 55 pound of dog food
If i had 8 pounds of cat food
In total the pet food had is 63 pounds

Question 3.
A teacher has 34 erasers. There are 46 fewer erasers than pencils. How many pencils are there?

____________ pencils
Answer:

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 25 toys. Your friend has more than you. There are more than 60 toys in all. How many toys can your friend have?
29       33       24      38
Answer: 35 toys

Explanation:
I have 25 toys
and if had 35 then the total toys will be 60
according to the given options it might be less than 35
29, 33 or 24

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You need 60 invitations. You have 36 and buy 36 more. Do you have enough invitations?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 75
Circle what you know.

Underline what you need to find.

Solve:

Compare: ___________ ○ 60        Yes          No
Answer: yes

Explanation:
66 > 60
I had 6 more invitations
Yes they have enough invitations.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
You need 84 bottles of water. You have 48 and buy 32 more. Do you have enough bottles of water?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 76
Circle what you know.

Underline what you need to find.

Solve:

Compare: ___________ ○ 84        Yes          No
Answer:  No

Explanation:
The water bottles I had 80
The water bottles needed is 84
80 < 84
so, there are no enough waterbottles

Problem Solving: Addition Practice 9.6

Question 1.
You have 31 stuffed animals. You and your friend have 60 stuffed animals in all. How many stuffed animals does your friend have?

______________ stuffed animals
Answer:  29

Explanation:
31 + 29 = 60,
There are 29 stuffed animals with my friend.

Question 2.
A store has 56 shirts. There are 28 fewer shirts than pairs of pants. How many pairs of pants are there?

______________ Pairs of pants
Answer: 28

Explanation:
Total shirts is 56 and 56 – 28 = 28,
The pairs of paints are 28.
28 + 28 = 56.

Question 3.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
You have 25 movies. You have 18 more video games than movies. Your friend says you have (43 movies and video games in all. Is your friend correct? Explain.

___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________
Answer: 43:

Explanation
Me having 25 movies and 18 videogames 25 + 18 = 43,
Yes my friend is correct I have 43 movies and  videogames in all.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
Newton needs 9o chairs for a party. He has 51. He rents 3 more. Does Newton have enough chairs?

Circle:         Yes          No
Answer: No,

Explanation:
Newton doesn’t have enough chairs.
He needed is 90 he has 51 + 3 = 54.

Review & Refresh

Circle the longer object.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 77
Answer:
The scissor is longer than the brick
circled the scissor

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 78
Answer:
The first pencil is longer than the second pencil
First pencil is circled

Add Two-Digit Numbers Performance Task

Question 1.
You play a game. Each red ball you collect is worth 10 points. Each yellow ball you collect is worth 1 point.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 79

a. You collect 3 red balls and 13 yellow balls. How many points do you have?

___________ points
Answer: 30

Explanation
Red ball = 10
yellow = 1.
I have collected 3 red and 13 yellow,
3 × 10 = 30

39 + 13 = 52. Total points are 52.

b. Your teammates score 38 points and 24 points. How many points do your teammates have in all?

___________ points
Answer:
38 + 24 = 62,
62 points our teammates have in all.

c. Your learn wants to have 100 points. Does your team reach its goal?

Yes No
Answer: No,
we didn’t reach the goal.

d. Why do you think a red ball is worth more points?
Answer:
Because it is small in size and easy to handle to kids by seeing in the figure.

Add Two-Digit Numbers Change Practice

Add Tens and Ones Homework & Practice 9.1

Question 1.
56 + 3 = _________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 80
Answer:
53 + 3 = 56,
5 tens and 6 ones.

Question 2.
22 + 54 = __________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 81
Answer:
24 + 54 = 78,
7 tens and 8 ones.

Add Tens and Ones Using a Number Line Homework & Practice 9.2

Question 3.
62 + 25 = ___________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 82
Answer: 62 + 25 = 87

Explanation:
6 tens and 2 ones
2 tens and 5 ones
by adding both we get 87

Question 4.
38 + 51 = ___________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 82
Answer: 38 + 51 = 89

Explanation:
3 tens and 8 ones
5 tens and 1 ones
by adding both we get 89.

Question 5.
MP Structure
Write an equation that matches the number line.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 83
Answer: 16 + 52 = 68

Make a 10 to Add Homework & Practice 9.3

Question 6.
42 + 6 = ___________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 84
Make a 10?       Yes           No
Answer: No

Explanation:
lines represents the tens and circles represents the ones
4 tens and 2 ones
0 tens and 6 ones
By adding ones place from both the sides 2 + 6 = 8
so there is no 10 in it.

Question 7.
27 + 7 = ___________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 85
Make a 10?       Yes           No
Answer: yes

Explanation:
lines represents the tens and circles represents the ones
2 tens and 7 ones
0 tens and 7 ones
By adding ones place from both the sides 7 + 7 = 14
so there is 10 in it

MP Logic
Complete.
Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 86
Answer:
34 + 7 = 41.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 87
Answer:
59 + 8 = 67

Add Two-Digit Numbers Homework & Practice 9.4

Make quick sketches to find the sum.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 88
Answer:
28 + 33 = 61, 6 tens and 1 ones.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 89

____________ tens ___________ one
Answer:
49 + 24 =73, 7 tens and 3 ones.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
Your club earns a badge for every 10 trees planted. Your club plants 25 trees in the fall and 25 in the spring. How many badges does your club earn?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 90

_______________ badges
Answer:
One badge for 10, 25 in spring and 25 in fall.
Total trees planted is 25 + 25 = 50.
So, 5 badges.

Practice Addition Strategies Homework & Practice 9.5

Question 13.
19 + 43 = __________
Answer: 19 + 43 = 62, 6 tens and 2 ones.

Question 14.
66 + 28 = __________
Answer: 66 + 28 = 94, 9 tens and 4 ones.

Problem Solving: Addition Homework & Practice 9.6

Question 15.
Your friend has 5 marbles. You have 23 more than your friend. How many marbles do you have?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 91

_______________ marbles
Answer:  28 marbles

Explanation
My friend has 5 and me having 23 more
than my friend 23 + 5 = 28.

Question 16.
Modeling Real Life
You need 50 party hats. You have 24. You buy 16 more. Do you have enough party hats?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers 92

Yes           No
Answer: No

Explanation:
Me having 24 caps and bought 16 more
24 + 16 = 40,
No, I don’t have enough caps.

Conclusion:

Download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 9 Add Two-Digit Numbers pdf and start your preparation for the exams. Big Ideas Math Answer is the best platform for the students to improve their math skills. If you have any queries about Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapters you can post the comments in the below comment box. All the Best!!

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8

Are you searching for the Big Ideas Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 Answer Key? If yes, then stay on this page. Have a look at the detailed explanation for all the questions of Big Ideas Math 2nd Grade 8th Chapter Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 Book. The BIM Grade 2 Answer Key for Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 will help you to become a pro in solving questions. Hence Download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 PDF and begin the preparation as early as possible.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000

Every student has to prepare all the topics provided in BIM Grade 2 Answers Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 to score good marks in the exam. This answer key is also helpful to complete the homework and assignments within the given time. After practicing chapter 8, you can be able to understand counting. The different topics included in Big Ideas Math Book 2nd Grade Answers Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 are Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 Vocabulary, Count to 120 in Different Ways, Count to 1,000 in Different Ways, Place Value Patterns, Find More or Less, Compare Numbers Using Symbols, and Compare Numbers Using a Number Line.

Vocabulary

Lesson 1 Count to 120 in Different Ways

Lesson 2 Count to 1,000 in Different Ways

Lesson 3 Place Value Patterns

Lesson 4 Find More or Less

Lesson 5 Compare Numbers Using Symbols

Lesson 6 Compare Numbers Using a Number Line

Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 Vocabulary

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 1
Organize It
Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-and-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Vocabulary

Define It

Use your vocabulary cards to complete the puzzle.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 3

Chapter 8 Vocabulary cards

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 4
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 5

Lesson 8.1 Count to 120 in Different Ways

Explore and Grow

Start at 5. Skip count by fives. Circle the numbers you count. Start at 10. Skip count by tens. Color the numbers you count.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 6
What patterns do you notice?
____________________
____________________
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8 Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Lesson-8.1-Count-to-120-in Different-Ways-Explore-and-Grow
In column 5 we notice the pattern of count by tens and in column 10 we notice the pattern of count by tens.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Count by ones.
35, 36, 37, ___, ____, ___, ___, ___
Answer:
35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42 .

Question 2.
Count by fives.
55, 60, 65, __, ___, ___, ___, ___
Answer:
55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90

Question 3.
Count by tens.
21, 31, 41, ___, __, ___, ___, ___
Answer:
21, 31, 41, 51, 61, 71, 81, 91 .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Count by ones.

Question 4.
57, 58, 59, __, ___, ___, ___, ___
Answer:
57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64

Count by fives.

Question 6.
35, 40, 45, __, ___, ___, __, ___
Answer:
35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70

Question 5.
__, 106, __, 108, __, ___, ___
Answer:
105, 106, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111

Count by fives.

Question 6.
35, 40, 45, __, ___, ___, ___, ___
Answer:
35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70

Question 7.
__, 80, __, 90, __, __, ___
Answer:
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120 .

Count by tens.

Question 8.
12, 22, 32, __, ___, __, ___, __
Anwer:
12, 22, 32, 42, 52, 62, 72, 82 .

Question 9.
__, 50, __, 70, __, __, ___
Answer:
40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 .

Question 10.
Number Sense
Newton counts by ones from 47 to 53. Which numbers does he count?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 6.1
Answer:
counts by ones from 47 to 53 are :
47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53 .
numbers does he count are 49 and 52 numbers

Question 11.
Number Sense
Descartes counts by fives from 90 to 115. Which numbers does he count?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 7
Answer:
counts by fives from 90 to 115 are :
90, 95, 100, 105, 110, 115 .
numbers does he count are 105 and 110 .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Newton has 65 points. He captures small aliens worth 5 points. Descartes has 25 points. He captures large aliens worth 10 points.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 8
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 9
Answer:
Number of points Newton have = 65
Number of points for small aliens = 5.
Number of aliens did Newton have = 65 / 5 = 13.

Number of points Descartes have = 25
Number of points for Large aliens = 10.
Number of aliens did Descartes have = 25 / 10 = 2.5
Newton have more aliens than Descartes.so Descartes needs more aliens .

Show and Grow

Question 12.
Newton has 55 points. He collects gold coins worth 10 points. Descartes has 70 points. He collects silver coins worth 5 points. Who needs to collect more coins to reach 100 points?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 10
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 11
Answer:
Number of points Newton have = 55 points
he collects gold coins worth = 10 points each .
for 100 points newton requires 45 points
Number of coins required for 45 points for Newton= 45/ 10 = 4.5 coins.

Number of points Descartes have = 70 points
he collects silver coins worth = 5 points each .
for 100 points Descartes requires 30 points
Number of coins required for 30 points for Descartes= 30/ 5 = 6 coins.
Descartes requires more 6 coins to reach 100 points .

Question 13.
You and your friend count from 30 to 70. You count by fives. Your friend counts by tens. Who says more numbers? Explain.
Answer:
Count by fives:( by me)
30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70 = total 9 numbers.
Count by tens:( my friend)
30, 40, 50, 60, 70 = total 5 numbers.
I say more numbers than my friend .

Count to 120 in Different Ways Homework & Practice 8.1

Count by ones.

Question 1.
63, 64, 65, __, __, ___, ___, ___
Answer:
63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70 .

Question 2.
__, 112, __, 114, __, __, ___
Answer:
111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117 .

Count by fives.

Question 3.
10, 15, 20, __, __, ___, __, ___
Answer:
10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 .

Question 4.
__, 95, __, 105, __, __, ___
Answer:
90, 95, 100, 105, 110, 115, 120 .

Count by tens.

Question 5.
44, 54, 64, __, __, __, ___, __
Answer:
44, 54, 64, 74, 84, 94, 104 .

Question 6.
__, 20, __, 40, __, __, __
Answer:
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70 .

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton counts by fives. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 12
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 13
Answer:
No, Count by fives means 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 and so on …..
As per the above count 5, 15, 25, 35, 45, 55 they are count by tens as there is 10 differences between the sequence of numbers.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Who needs to make more shots to earn 50 points?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 14

Answer:
Newton
Number of points with Newton = 30 .
Newton requires more 20 points to make it 50 points
Points for one shot = 5 .
Number of shots required for Newton = 20 / 5 = 4 shots.

Descartes
Number of points with Descartes = 20 .
Descartes requires more 30 points to make it 50 points
Points for one shot = 10 .
Number of shots required for Descartes = 30 / 10 = 3 shots.

Therefor Newton needs to make more shots than Descartes .

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
34 – 16 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-to-120-Different-Ways-Homework-Practice-8.1-Question-9

Question 10.
75 – 32 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-to-120-Different-Ways-Homework-Practice-8.1-Question-10

Question 11.
93 – 28 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 17
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-to-120-Different-Ways-Homework-Practice-8.1-Question-11

Lesson 8.2 Count to 1,000 in Different Ways

Explore and Grow

Count by hundreds to 1,000.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 18
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000- Lesson-8.2-Count-to-1,000-Different Ways-Explore-Grow-1

Count by tens to 1,000.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 19
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000- Lesson-8.2-Count-to-1,000-Different Ways-Explore-Grow-2
Count by fives to 1,000.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 20
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000- Lesson-8.2-Count-to-1,000-Different Ways-Explore-Grow-3
Count by ones to 1,000.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 21
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000- Lesson-8.2-Count-to-1,000-Different Ways-Explore-Grow-4

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Count by fives.
675, 680, 685, __, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
675, 680, 685, 690, 695, 700, 705, 710 .

Question 2.
Count by tens.
850, 860, 870, __, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
850, 860, 870, 880, 890, 900, 910, 920 .

Question 3.
Count by hundreds.
100, 200, 300, __, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Count by fives.

Question 4.
520, 525, 530, __, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
520, 525, 530, 535, 540, 545, 550, 555 .

Question 5.
875, 880, __, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
875, 880, 885, 890, 895, 900, 905 .

Count by tens.

Question 6.
600, 610, 620, __, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
600, 610, 620, 630, 640, 650, 660, 670 .

Question 7.
460, 470, __, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
460, 470, 480, 490, 500, 510, 520 .

Count by hundreds.

Question 8.
200, 300, 400, __, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 .

Question 9.
400, 500, __, __, __, __, __
Answer:
400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000 .

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton counts by hundreds. Find the missing number. Think: How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 22
Answer:
The missing number is 0  as the count start from 0, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500 Each number is 100 more than the previous number.

Question 11.
Structure
Did Descartes count by tens or by hundreds? Think: How do you know?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 23
Answer:
It is count by tens as Each number is 10 more than the previous number .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A summer camp leader has 240 T-shirts. He buys 6 more colors with 10 shirts in each color. How many T-shirts does he have now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 24
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 25
Answer:
Number of T-Shirts = 240.
Number of T-shirts were bought = 6 X 10 ( 6 different colors ) = 60 T-shirts .
Total Number of T-Shirts = 240 + 60 = 300 .

Show and Grow

Question 12.
You have 100 bracelets. You buy 5 more boxes with 100 bracelets in each box. How many bracelets do you have now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 26
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 27
Answer:
Number of Bracelets = 100.
Number of Boxes bought = 5 x 100 = 500 bracelets.
Total Number of Bracelets = 100 + 500 = 600 bracelets.

Question 13.
You and your friend count from 370 to 420. You count by tens. Your friend counts by fives. Who says more numbers? Explain.
_________________________
_________________________
Answer:
Count by Tens:( by me)
370, 380, 390, 400, 410, 420 . = total 6 numbers.
Count by fives:( my friend)
370, 375, 380, 385, 390, 395, 400, 405, 410, 415, 420 = total 11 numbers.
My friends say more numbers than me .

Count to 1,000 in Different Ways Homework & Practice 8.2

Count by fives.

Question 1.
445, 450, 455, ___, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
445, 450, 455, 460, 465, 470, 475, 480 .

Question 2.
770, 775, __, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
770, 775, 780, 785, 790, 795, 800,

Count by tens.

Question 3.
520, 530, 540, __, __, __, __, __
Answer:
520, 530, 540, 550, 560, 570, 580, 590 .

Question 4.
660, 670, __, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
660, 670, 680, 690, 700, 710, 720 .

Count by Hundreds.

Question 5.
300, 400, 500, __, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000.

Question 6.
200, 300, __, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 .

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton starts at 950 and counts to 1,000 by fives. Complete the number line to show the last 6 numbers he counts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 28
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000- Count-to-1,000-Different-Ways-Homework-Practice-8.2-Question-7

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
A carnival worker has 380 stuffed animals. She buys 6 more boxes with 5 stuffed animals in each box. How many stuffed animals does she have now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 29
Answer:
Number of stuffed animals = 380 .
Number of animals bought = 6 x 5 = 30.
Total Number of stuffed animals = 380 + 30 = 410 Animals .

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
A water park shop owner has 100 goggles. He buys 4 more colors with 100 goggles in each color. How many goggles does the shop owner have now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 30
Answer:
Number of Goggles = 100.
Number of goggles bought = 4 x 100 = 400
Total Number of Goggles = 100 + 400 = 500 Goggles .

Question 10.
You see 14 geese in a pond. 17 more join them. Then you see 11 more fly to the pond. How many geese do you see in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 31
Answer:
Number of geese in a pond = 14.
Number of geese joined = 17 .
Total geese’s = 14 + 17 = 31 .
Number of geese’s flew to pond = 11 .
Total Geese’s = 31 + 11 = 42 .

Lesson 8.3 Place Value Patterns

Explore and Grow

What patterns do you see in the shaded row and column? Use the patterns to complete the chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 32
Answer:
The pattern in Rows = Count by ones.
The pattern in Columns = Count by Tens.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Lesson-8.3-Place-Value-Patterns-Explore-Grow

Show and Grow

Use place value to find the missing numbers.

Question 1.
485, 486, 487, __, __, ___, ___
Answer:
485, 486, 487, 488, 489, 490, 491 .

Question 2.
612, 622, 632, __, __, ___, ___
Answer:
612, 622, 632, 642, 652, 662, 672 .

Question 3.
267, 277, __, 297, ___, 317, __
Answer:
267, 277, 287, 297, 307, 317, 327 .

Question 4.
101, 201, ___, 401, __, __, ___
Answer:
101, 201, 301, 401, 501, 601, 701 .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use place value to find the missing numbers.

Question 5.
324, 325, ___, 327, __, __, ___
Answer:
324, 325, 326, 327, 328, 329, 330 .

Question 6.
194, 294, __, 494, __, __, ___
Answer:
194, 294, 394, 494, 594, 694, 794 .

Question 7.
463, 473, __, 493, __, __, __
Answer:
463, 472, 483, 493, 503, 513, 523 .

Question 8.
232, 332, __, 532, __, ___, __
Answer:
232, 332, 432, 532, 632, 732, 832 .

Question 9.
985, 986, __, 988, __, __, __
Answer:
985, 986, 987, 988, 989, 990 .

Question 10.
751, 761, __, 781, __, __, __
Answer:
751, 761, 771, 781, 791, 801, 811 .

Question 11.
606, 607, __, 609, __, __, __
Answer:
606, 607, 608, 609, 700, 701, 702 .

Question 12.
Repeated Reasoning
Use place value to describe each pattern.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 33
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Lesson-8.3-Place-Value-Patterns-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-12

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

There are 273 tickets in a bin. Some more are put in the bin. Now there are 973. How many groups of 100 tickets were put in the bin?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 34
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 35
Answer:

Number of tickets in bin = 273.
Number of tickets added in bin = X.
Total Number tickets in bin now = 973 = 273 + X
X = 973 – 273 = 700 .
Number of groups = 700/100 = 7 (Each group contains 100 tickets) .
Therefore 7 groups of 100 tickets were put in bin .

Show and Grow

Question 13.
You have 338 pennies in a jar. You put more in the jar. Now there are 388. How many groups of 10 pennies were put in the jar?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 36

Answer:
Number of pennies =338.
Number of pennies added = X.
Total Number of pennies = 388 = 338 + X.
X= 388 – 328 = 50.
Number of groups of 10 pennies were put in the jar = 50 / 10 = 5.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
There are 410 people at a show. 8 more rows of seats get filled. Now there are 490 people. How many people can sit in each row?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 37
Explain how you solved.
______________
______________
Answer:
Number of people = 410 .
Number of people added = X.
Total Number of people = 490.
490=410 + X.
X = 490 – 410 = 80 .
Number of people added = 80 .
Number of Rows = 8.
Number of people in each row = 80 /8 = 10.

Place Value Patterns Homework & Practice 8.3

Use place value to find the missing numbers.

Question 1.
710, 711, 712, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
710, 711, 712, 713, 714, 715, 716 .

Question 2.
822, 832, 842, __, __, __, __
Answer:
822, 832, 842, 852, 862, 872, 882 .

Question 3.
325, 425, 525, __, __, __, __
Answer:
325, 425, 525, 625, 725, 825, 925 .

Question 4.
669, 679, __, 699, __, __, ___
Answer:
669, 679, 689, 699, 709, 719, 729 .

Question 5.
534, 535, __, 537, __, __, __
Answer:
534, 535, 536, 537, 538, 539 , 540

Question 6.
368, 468, __, 668, __, __, ___
Answer:
368, 468, 568, 668, 768, 868, 968 .

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton says the hundreds digit in the numbers shown increases by 1. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 38

Answer:
No, There is increase in the tens place not in hundreds place .Each Number is 10 more than the previous number so it is count by tens.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
A farmer has 467 cornstalks. The farmer grows some more. Now there are 967 cornstalks. How many groups of 100 cornstalks did the farmer add?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 39

Answer:
Number of cornstalks = 467 .
Number of cornstalks grown =X
Total Number of cornstalks = 967.
467 + X =967.
X = 967- 467 = 500.
Number of cornstalks grown = 500 .
Number of groups of 100 cornstalks added = 500/100 = 5.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
There are 250 people at a party. 3 more tables get filled. Now there are 280 people. How many people can sit at each table?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 40

Answer:
Number of people in the party = 250 .
Number of more people added = X.
Total Number of people in the party = 280 .
250 + X = 280 .
X = 280- 250 = 30 .
Number of more people added = 30 .
Number of tables got filled with added people = 3.
Number of people in each table = 30 / 3 = 10 .

Review & Refresh

Question 10.
8 + 4 = __
Answer:
12.

Question 11.
15 – 8 = __
Answer:
7.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 41

Answer:
10.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Place-Value-Patterns-Homework-Practice-8.3-Question-12

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 42

Answer:
6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Place-Value-Patterns-Homework-Practice-8.3-Question-13

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 43

Answer:
13.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Place-Value-Patterns-Homework-Practice-8.3-Question-14

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 44
Answer:
9 .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Place-Value-Patterns-Homework-Practice-8.3-Question-15

Lesson 8.4 Find More or Less

Explore and Grow

Model 253. Use your model to complete the sentences.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 45

1 more than 253 is __.
1 less than 253 is __.
10 more than 253 is __.
10 less than 253 is __.
100 more than 253 is __.
100 less than 253 is __.
Answer:
1 more than 253 is 254.
1 less than 253 is 252.
10 more than 253 is 263.
10 less than 253 is 243.
100 more than 253 is 353.
100 less than 253 is 153.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
10 more than 452 is __.
Answer:
10 more than 452 is 462.

Question 2.
10 less than 813 is __.
Answer:
10 less than 813 is 803..

Question 3.
100 less than 729 is __.
Answer:
100 less than 729 is 629.

Question 4.
100 more than 386 is __.
Answer:
100 more than 386 is 486.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 5.
10 more than 571 is __.
Answer:
10 more than 571 is 581.

Question 6.
10 less than 333 is __.
Answer:
10 less than 333 is 323.

Question 7.
100 more than 604 is __.
Answer:
100 more than 604 is 704.

Question 8.
100 less than 592 is __.
Answer:
100 less than 592 is 492.

Question 9.
1 more than 934 is __.
Answer:
1 more than 934 is 935.

Question 10.
1 less than 101 is __.
Answer:
1 less than 101 is 100.

Question 11.
10 less than 286 is __.
Answer:
10 less than 286 is 276.

Question 12.
1 more than 467 is __.
Answer:
1 more than 467 is 468.

Question 13.
10 more than 763 is __.
Answer:
10 more than 763 is 773.

Question 14.
100 less than 846 is __.
Answer:
100 less than 846 is 746.

Question 15.
1 less than 999 is __.
Answer:
1 less than 999 is 998.

Question 16.
100 more than 28 is __.
Answer:
100 more than 28 is 128.

Question 17.
100 less than 135 is __.
Answer:
100 less than 135 is 35.

Question 18.
100 more than 900 is __.
Answer:
100 more than 900 is 1000.

Question 19.
Number Sense
Complete each sentence.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 46
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Lesson-8.4-Find-More-Less-Question-19

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

An orange tree has 639 oranges. A lemon tree has 100 fewer lemons. How many lemons does the tree have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 47

Answer:
Number of Oranges = 639.
Number of Lemons = 639 – 100 =539.

Show and Grow

Question 20.
A history book has 197 pictures. A science book has 10 more pictures. How many pictures are in the science book?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 48
Answer:
Number of pictures in history books = 197 .
Number of pictures in science book = 197 + 10  = 207.

Question 21.
DIG DEEPER!
A boat puzzle has 525 pieces. A bird puzzle has 100 more than the boat puzzle. A space puzzle has 10 fewer than the bird puzzle. How many puzzle pieces does the space puzzle have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 49
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 50
Answer:
Number of puzzles in boat puzzle = 525 .
Number of puzzles in bird puzzle = 100 + 525 = 625.
Number of puzzles in space puzzle = 625 – 10 = 615 .

Question 22.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 398 points. Newton has 100 fewer than you. Descartes has 10 more than Newton. How many points does Descartes have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 51
Answer:
Number of points = 398 .
Number of points Newton have = 398 – 100 = 298 .
Number of points Descartes have = 298 + 10 = 308 .

Find More or Less Homework & Practice 8.4

Question 1.
10 more than 106 is __.
Answer:
10 more than 106 is 116.

Question 2.
10 less than 467 is __
Answer:
10 less than 467 is 457.

Question 3.
100 more than 321 is __.
Answer:
100 more than 321 is 421.

Question 4.
100 less than 945 is __.
Answer:
100 less than 945 is 845.

Question 5.
1 more than 513 is __.
Answer:
1 more than 513 is 514.

Question 6.
1 less than 899 is __.
Answer:
1 less than 899 is 898.

Question 7.
1 less than 264 is __.
Answer:
1 less than 264 is 263.

Question 8.
100 more than 555 is __.
Answer:
100 more than 555 is 655.

Question 9.
1 more than 852 is __.
Answer:
1 more than 852 is 853.

Question 10.
100 less than 573 is __.
Answer:
100 less than 573 is 473.

Question 11.
10 less than 314 is __
Answer:
10 less than 314 is 304.

Question 12.
10 more than 687 is __
Answer:
10 more than 687 is 697.

Question 13.
Structure
Complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 52

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Find-More-Less-Homework-Practice-8.4-Question-13

Question 14.
Number Sense
Complete the sentence.
__ is 10 less than 546 and 10 more than __.
Answer:
536 is 10 less than 546 and 10 more than 556.

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
Your magic book has 163 tricks. Your friend’s magic book has 100 more tricks than yours. How many tricks does your friend’s magic book have?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 53
Answer:
Number of tricks in my magic books = 163 .
Number of tricks in my friends magic books = 100+163 = 263.

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 624 songs. Newton has 100 fewer than you. Descartes has 10 more than Newton. How many songs does Descartes have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 54

Answer:
Number of songs = 624.
Number of songs Newton have = 624 – 100 = 524.
Number of songs Descartes have = 524 + 10  = 534 .

Review & Refresh

Question 17.
A bookcase has 5 shelves. There are 2 stuffed animals on each shelf. How many stuffed animals are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 55
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 56
Answer:
Number of shelves = 5.
Number of stuffed animals in each shelf = 2
Total Number of stuffed animals in each 5 shelves = 2 added 5 times.
2+2+2+2+2 = 10 animals.

Lesson 8.5 Compare Numbers Using Symbols

Explore and Grow

Make a quick sketch of each number. Circle the greater number.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 57
How do you know which number is greater?
____________________
____________________
Answer:

When comparing the values of two numbers, you can use a number line to determine which number is greater. The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left. In the example Above, you can see that 472 is greater than 439 because 472 is to the right of 439 on the number line.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Compare.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 58
Answer:
652 > 614.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Compare

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 59
Answer:
324 > 317.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 60
Answer:
26 < 206 .

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 61
Answer:
546 < 564 .

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 62
Answer:
931 > 842.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 63
Answer:
700 + 30 + 5 = 735.
735 = 735 .

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 64
Answer:
400 + 20 = 420.
412 < 420.

Question 8.
Reasoning
Find the number that will make all three comparisons true.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 65
Answer:
105.

Question 9.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Newton correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 66
Answer:
625 < 631.
The given number is a 3-digit number .In 3-digit number Comparison First check the hundred place both the numbers having 6 in hundred place . so then go to the tens place in 625 we have 2 in tens place and in 631 we have 3 in tens place so 3 is greater than 2. so 631 is greater than 625.

Question 10.
There are 125 kids in a taekwondo club. There are 135 kids in a soccer club. Which club has fewer kids?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 67
Answer:
Number of kids in taekwondo club = 125 .
Number of kids in soccer club = 135.
Kids in taekwondo club are 10 fewer than soccer club .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Newton reads 200 pages on Monday, 70 on Tuesday, and 9 on Wednesday. Descartes reads 297 pages. Who reads more pages in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 68
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 69
Answer:
Number of pages read by Newton on Monday = 200.
Number of pages read by Newton on Tuesday = 70.
Number of pages read by Newton on Wednesday =9.
Total pages read by Newton all 3 days = 200 + 70 + 9 = 279.
Total pages read by Descartes = 297.
Descartes reads more pages.
279 < 297 .

Show and Grow

Question 11.
Newton counts train cars. The train has 100 boxcars, 40 tank cars, and 4 locomotives. Descartes counts a train with 142 cars. Who counts more cars in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 70
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 70.1
Answer:
Total cars counted by Newton = 100 + 40 = 140.
Total cars counted by Descartes = 142.
142 > 140 .
Descartes counts more cars .

Question 12.
You have 221 coins in your piggy bank. Your friend has 219 coins. Who has fewer coins?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 71
Answer:
Number of coins in my piggy bank = 221.
Number of coins my friend have = 219.
My friend have 2 coins fewer than me .

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
652 people go to a play on Friday. 625 people go on Saturday. 655 people go on Sunday. On which day are there fewer than 650 people at the play?
Answer:
People played on Friday = 652.
People played on Saturday =625
People played on Sunday =655.
On Saturday 25 people are fewer than 650 people at the play .

Compare Numbers Using Symbols Homework & Practice 8.5

Compare

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 72
Answer:
923 > 854.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 73
Answer:
386 < 389.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 74
Answer:
406 = 406 .

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 75
Answer:
621 > 63.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 76
Answer:
746 < 752 .

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 77
Answer:
235 > 130.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 78
Answer:
500 + 60 + 1 = 561.
562 > 561 .

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 79
Answer:
100 + 10 = 110.
110 = 110.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
What is Descartes’s number?

  • It is less than 300.
  • It is greater than 200.
  • The ones digit is 6 less than 10.
  • The tens digit is 2 more than the ones digit.

Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 80
Answer:
lies between 200 – 300.
ones digit = 10 – 6 = 4.
Tens digit = 4 + 2 = 6.
264.

Question 10.
There are 428 pages in a science book. There are 424 pages in a math book. Which book has more pages?
Big Ideas Math Answers 2nd Grade Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 81
Answer:
Number of pages in science book = 428
Number of pages in Math book = 424 .
science – 428 > 424 – math
Science book has more pages.

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
A concession stand sells 300 bags of popcorn on Saturday, 50 on Sunday, and 4 on Monday. They sell 345 drinks. Did they sell more bags of popcorn or drinks?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 82
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 83
Total Number of popcorn sold all 3 days = 300 + 50 + 4 = 354.
Number of drinks sold = 345 .
354 > 345 .
popcorn bags are sold more.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton climbs 136 stairs on Friday. He climbs 132 on Saturday. He climbs 128 on Sunday. On which day does he climb more than 134 stairs?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 84
Answer:
Friday = 136.
Saturday = 132.
Sunday = 128 .
On Friday he climbed 136 stairs more than 134 stairs.

Review & Refresh

Find the difference. Use addition to check your answer.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 85

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000- Compare-Numbers-Using-Symbols-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-13

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 86
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000- Compare-Numbers-Using-Symbols-Homework-Practice-8.5-Question-14

Lesson 8.6 Compare Numbers Using a Number Line

Explore and Grow

Identify a number that is less than 538. Identify a number that is greater than 538. Model the numbers on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 87

Explain how you know.
____________________
____________________
____________________
Answer:
The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Lesson-8.6-Compare-Numbers-Using-Number-Line-Explore-Grow

Show and Grow

Compare
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 88

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 89
Answer:
527 > 525.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 90
Answer:
521 < 524 .

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 91
Answer:
528 = 528 .

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 92
Answer:
530 > 520

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 93
Answer:
522 < 523

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 94
Answer:
529 > 526

Write a number that makes the statement true.

Question 7.
372 < __
Answer:
372 < 373

Question 8.
195 > __
Answer:
195 > 190

Apply and Grow: Practice

Compare.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 95

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 96
Answer:
714 = 714

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 97
Answer:
720 > 710

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 98
Answer:
718 > 717

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 99
Answer:
711 < 713

Write a number that makes the statement true.

Question 13.
736 = __
Answer:
736 = 736 .

Question 14.
461 > __
Answer:
461 > 460

Question 15.
__ < 295
Answer:
290 < 295

Question 16.
__ > 573
Answer:
574> 573

Question 17.
Logic
Is Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 100 greater than or less than Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 101? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 102
Answer:
The Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 101 is greater than Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 100.As the values goes towards 100. The Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 101 is close to 100 than Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 100.so Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 101has higher value than Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 100. Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 101 > Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 100.

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
What number might Newton be thinking?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 103
Answer:
342<350<356

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Order the race numbers from least to greatest.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 104
Model:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 105
Order from least to greatest: __, __, __, __
Your race number is greater than all of the other numbers but less than 900. What is a possible race number for you?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 105.1
Answer:
Order from least to greatest : 856 , 865 , 868 , 876 .
Possible race number = 878.

Show and Grow

Question 19.
Order the race times from least to greatest.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 106
DIG DEEPER!
Your time is less than all of the other times but greater than 320 seconds. What is a possible time for you?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 107
Answer:
The Race times from least to greatest = 329,  335, 340, 342 .
320<329.
Possible time 325

Compare Numbers Using a Number Line Homework & Practice 8.6

Compare.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 108

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 109
Answer:
450 < 460

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 110
Answer:
459 > 457

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 111
Answer:
455 > 451

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 112
Answer:
456 = 456

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 113
Answer:
455 > 454

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 114
Answer:
452 < 453

Write a number that makes the statement true.

Question 7.
529 > __
Answer:
529 > 528

Question 8.
815 < __
Answer:
815 < 820

Question 9.
__ < 142
Answer:
140 < 142

Question 10.
__ = 364
Answer:
364 = 364

Question 11.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Descartes correct? Explain.
______________
______________
______________
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 115
Answer:
986 < 987 .
The numbers which move to the right of the number line will increase in value .
The number on the right is always greater than the number on the left.
so the number 987 is greater than 986 .

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
I am not greater than 243. I am not less than 243. What number am I? Explain how you know.
Answer:
243

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
Order the numbers from least to greatest.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 116
Answer:
The numbers from least to greatest = 675 , 679, 689, 698 .

DIG DEEPER!
Your car’s number is greater than all of the others but less than 705. What is a possible number for your car?

Review & Refresh

Question 14.
Circle the shapes with flat surfaces that are circles.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 117

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Compare-Numbers-Using-Number-Line-Homework-Practice 8.6-Question-14

Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 Performance Task

The table shows the number of each type of fish in a tank.

Question 1.
Complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 118
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-Compare-Numbers-1,000-Performance-Task-Question-1
Question 2.
Compare the numbers of fish.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 119

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-Compare-Numbers-1,000-Performance-Task-Question-2

Question 3.
All of the purple, green, and pink fish are moved to a new exhibit. How many fish are left in the tank?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 120

Total Number of fishes = 351 + 529 + 312 + 458 + 312 = 1962.
Number of fishes moved to new exhibit = 312 + 529 + 351 = 1192
Number of fishes left = 1962 – 1192 = 770.

Question 4.
A school of 24 fish swim in an array. Draw an array for the fish.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-Compare-Numbers-1,000-Performance-Task-Question-4

Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 Activity

Number Boss

To Play: Place Number Cards 0–9 in a pile. Each player flips 3 cards and makes a three-digit number. Compare the numbers. The player with the greater number takes both sets of cards. If the numbers are equal, flip cards again. The person with the greater number takes all of the cards. Repeat until all of the cards have been used.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 121

Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 Chapter Practice

8.1 Count to 120 in Different Ways

Question 1.
Count by ones.
113, 114, 115, __, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120

Question 2.
Count by fives.
25, 30, 35, __, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60

Question 3.
Count by tens.
33, 43, 53, __, __, __, __, __
Answer:
33, 43, 53, 63, 73, 83, 93, 103

8.2 Count to 1,000 in Different Ways

Question 4.
Count by fives.
210, 215, 220, ___, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
210, 215, 220, 225, 230, 235, 240, 245

Question 5.
Count by tens.
740, 750, 760, __, __, __, __, __, ___
Answer:
740, 750, 760, 770, 780, 790, 800, 810

Question 6.
Count by hundreds.
300, 400, 500, __, __, __, __, __
Answer:
300 , 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000

8.3 Place Value Patterns

Use place value to find the missing numbers.

Question 7.
854, 855, 856, __, __, __, __
Answer:
854, 855, 856, 857, 858, 859, 860

Question 8.
940, 950, 960, __, __, __, __
Answer:
940, 950, 960, 970, 980, 990, 1000

Question 9.
275, 375, 475, ___, __, __, __
Answer:
275, 375, 475, 575, 675, 775, 875

Question 10.
Repeated Reasoning
Use place value to describe each pattern.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 122

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-8.3-Place-Value-Patterns-Question-10

8.4 Find More or Less

Question 11.
10 more than 813 is ___
Answer:
10 more than 813 is 823.

Question 12.
10 less than 976 is __
Answer:
10 less than 976 is 966.

Question 13.
100 more than 254 is __.
Answer:
100 more than 254 is 354.

Question 14.
100 less than 531 is __.
Answer:
100 less than 531 is 431.

Question 15.
1 more than 444 is ___
Answer:
1 more than 444 is 445.

Question 16.
1 less than 622 is __.
Answer:
1 less than 622 is 621

Question 17.
Modeling Real Life
Your craft book has 110 ideas. Your friend’s craft book has 10 fewer ideas than yours. How many ideas does your friend’s craft book have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 123
Answer:
Number of Ideas in my craft book = 110 .
Number of ideas in my friends craft book =110 – 10 =100 .

Question 18.
Modeling Real Life
You have 324 beads. Newton has 100 more than you. Descartes has10 fewer than Newton. How many beads does Descartes have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 124
Answer:
Number of beads = 324.
Number of beads newton have = 324 + 100 = 424 .
Number of beads Descartes have = 424 – 10 = 414 .

8.5 Compare Numbers Using Symbols

Compare

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 125
Answer:
583 = 583

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 126
Answer:
626 < 725

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 127
Answer:
932 > 910

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 128
Answer:
49 < 411

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 129
Answer:
300 + 40 + 6 = 346
328 <346

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 130
Answer:
200 + 10 + 8 = 218
280 > 218

Question 25.
There are 318 kids in a gymnastics club. There are 219 kids in a swim club. Which club has fewer kids?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 131
Answer:
Number of kids in Gymnastics club = 318.
Number of kids in Swim club =219.
Swim club has 99 fewer kids than Gymnastics club .

8.6 Compare Numbers Using a Number Line

Compare
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 132

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 133
Answer:
683 < 687

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 134
Answer:
689 > 688

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 135
Answer:
681 = 681

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 136
Answer:
690 > 680

Write a number that makes the statement true.

Question 30.
324 < __
Answer:
324 < 325

Question 31.
136 > __
Answer:
136 > 133

Question 32.
__ = 750
Answer:
750 = 750

Question 33.
__ < 871
Answer:
771 < 871

Question 34.
Number Sense
What number might Descartes be thinking?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 137
Answer:
238<___>325.
238<315>325

Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 Cumulative Practice 1 – 8

Question 1.
Which equation can you use to check your answer to 32 − 18?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 138
Answer:
32 – 18 =14.
Equation
18 + 14 = 32

Question 2.
Which number does not belong?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 139

Answer:
324, 334, 344, 354, 364, 374
345 does not belong

Question 3.
Find the missing digits.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 140

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-Compare-Numbers-1,000-Cumulative-Practice-1 - 8-Question-3

Question 4.
Use the number cards to decompose to subtract.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 141
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-Compare-Numbers-1,000-Cumulative-Practice-1 - 8-Question-4

Question 5.
Which choice does not show 124?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 142

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-Compare-Numbers-1,000-Cumulative-Practice-1 - 8-Question-5

Question 6.
Which quick sketch shows 43 − 25?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 143
Answer:
43 – 25 = 18
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-Compare-Numbers-1,000-Cumulative-Practice-1 - 8-Question-6

Question 7.
You have 4 fewer gel pens than your friend. You have 6 gel pens. Which picture shows how many gel pens your friend has?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 144

Answer:
Number of gel pens with me = 6.
Number of gel pens with my friend = 6 + 4 = 10.Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-Compare-Numbers-1,000-Cumulative-Practice-1 - 8-Question-7

Question 8.
Which number does not belong?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 145
Answer:
563<_____<567 . It can be 564, 565, 566
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-Compare-Numbers-1,000-Cumulative-Practice-1 - 8-Question-8

Question 9.
Your friend uses compensation to add. Complete the equation to show what numbers he added after using compensation.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 146

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-Compare-Numbers-1,000-Cumulative-Practice-1 - 8-Question-9

Question 10.
Which choices show 238?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 147
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-Compare-Numbers-1,000-Cumulative-Practice-1 - 8-Question-10

Question 11.
Which picture shows 2 groups of 3?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 148
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-Compare-Numbers-1,000-Cumulative-Practice-1 - 8-Question-11

Question 12.
Descartes wants to use addition to subtract 51 − 25. Help him complete the number line and equations.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 149

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-2nd-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Count-Compare-Numbers-to-1,000-Count-Compare-Numbers-1,000-Cumulative-Practice-1 - 8-Question-12

Conclusion:

The above mentioned data about Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 2 Chapter 8 Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000 is helpful for the students. Make use of the given pdf and begin your preparation. If you have any queries regarding BIM Book 2nd Grade 8th Chapter Count and Compare Numbers to 1,000, then please write a comment below.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Identify Measure and Compare Objects

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Identify Measure and Compare Objects

Big Ideas Math Answer is the best platform for students who wanna learn online. The Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Identify Measure and Compare Objects is available as both download version and as printed copies. Students who need a bit more practice can make use of our Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Identify Measure and Compare Objects pdf. The concepts of this chapter are explained in a very detailed manner.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects

Students can develop an understanding of Identify Measure and Compare Objects from here. Refer Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects to score the maximum marks in the exams. We make solving the problems more fun so that it creates interest in students to become masters in maths. Click on the below attached and link below and get the step by step explanation.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Compare Heights

Lesson: 2 Compare Lengths

Lesson: 3 Use Number to Compare Lengths

Lesson: 4 Compare Weights

Lesson: 5 Use Numbers to Compare Weights

Lesson: 6 Compare Capacities

Lesson: 7 Describe Objects by Attributes

Chapter 13: Measure and Compare Objects

Measure and Compare Objects Vocabulary

Review Words

fewer
more

Answers:
Fewer:
less amount or the small amount which is countable
more:
many or more amount which is rarely countable, In some cases uncountable
From the below diagram umbrellas are 4 which are less in amount
The water pounds are 6 when compared with umbrellas those water pounds are more

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects v 1

Vocabulary Cards

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects v 2
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects v 3

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects v 4
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects v 5

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects v 6
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects v 7

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects v 8
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects v 9

Lesson 13.1 Compare Heights

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 1

Directions:
Cut out the Height Sort Cards. Compare the objects to the children shown. Then sort the cards into the categories shown.
Answer:
The children shown for heights.

Explanation:
Compared the heights of the objects and cut the high sort cards and pasted them according to their heights.

Think and Grow

Directions: Compare the heights of the objects.
• Circle the taller slide.
• Draw a line through the shorter lamp.
Are the mugs the same height? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 2.1
Answer: circled the taller one.
Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

step 2: line drawn through the shorter lamp

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 2
Answer: Yes, the mugs are of the same height.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1
and 2 Circle the taller object. 3 and 4 Draw a line through the shorter object. 5 Are the lion and the giraffe the same height? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 3
Answer: Circled the taller object

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 4
Answer: circled the taller object

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 5
Answer: line drawn through small to big

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 6
Answer: line drawn through smaller one

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 7
Answer: lion and giraffe are not same height.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
• Draw a building that is taller than the building shown.
• Draw a building that is shorter than the building shown.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 8.1
Answer:
Building drawn taller than the building shown

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 8
Answer:
Building drawn shorter than the building shown

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Compare Heights Homework & Practice 13.1

Directions:
1 and 2 Circle the taller object. 3 and 4 Draw a line through the shorter object.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 9
Answer:
Circled the taller object

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 10
Answer:
Circled the taller object.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 11
Answer:
Drawn the line through the shorter object

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 12
Answer:
Drawn line through the shorter object

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Directions:
5
and 6 Are the objects the same height? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 7 Draw a building that is the same height as the building shown.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 13
Answer:
No they are not same height.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 14
Answer:
The two rockets are of same height

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.1 15
Answer:
Building drawn equal to the building shown.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Lesson 13.2 Compare Lengths

Explore and Grow

Directions: Cut out the Length Sort Cards. Compare the objects to the pencil shown. Then sort the cards into the categories shown.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 1
Answer:
The right giraffe is longer
the left giraffe is shorter

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

the second picture to represent height and short from the sort out pictures
first girraffe is longer than the second one
second geraffe is shorter than the first one.

Think and Grow

Directions: Compare the lengths of the objects.
• Circle the longer surfboard.
• Draw a line through the shorter watch.
• Are the shoes the same length? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 2.1
Answer:
Circle drawn through the longer surfboard.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.


step 2:
line drawn through the shorter watch.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.


Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 2
Answer:
The shoes are not in same height

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Circle the longer object. 3 and 4 Draw a line through the shorter object

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 3
Answer:
Circled the longer object

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 4
Answer:
Circled the longer object.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 5
Answer:
Line drawn through the shorter object

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 6
Answer:
Line drawn through the shorter object

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
• Draw a string that holds fewer beads than the string shown. Tell how you know.
• Draw a string that holds the same number of beads as the string shown. Tell how you know.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 7.1
Answer:
string that holds fewer beads than the string shown
the below figure shows the small string

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 7
Answer:
string that holds the same number of beads as the string shown
above figure shows equal strings

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Compare Lengths Homework & Practice 13.2

Directions:
1 and 2 Circle the longer object. 3 and 4 Draw a line through the shorter object.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 8
Answer:
Circled the longer object

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 9
Answer:
Circled the longer object

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 10
Answer:
Line drawn through the shorter object

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 11
Answer:
Line drawn through the shorter object

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Directions:
5 and 6 Are the objects the same length? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 7 Draw a string that holds more beads than the string shown. Tell how you know.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 12
Answer:
The above object has same length

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 13
Answer:
The above objects are not equall

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.2 14

Answer:
The below figure shows the string that holds more beads

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Lesson 13.3 Use Number to Compare Lengths

Explore and Grow

Directions: Build a linking cube train with 4 cubes. Circle the objects that are longer than the cube train.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.3 1
Answer:
All the objects are longer.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

Think and Grow

Directions: Compare the lengths of the cube trains with the given number of cubes.
• Circle the number of the train that is longer. Color to show how you know.
• Draw a line through the number of the train that is shorter. Color to show how you know.
• Are the cube trains the same length? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. Color to show how you know.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.3 2
Answer:
The longer number train is circled and colored.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

Answer:
Line drawn through the shorter train.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

 

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.3 3
Answer:
Both the trains are equal.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
Compare the lengths of the cube trains with the given number of cubes. 1 and 2 Circle the number of the train that is longer. Color to show how you know. 3 Draw a line through the number of the train that is shorter. Color to show how you know.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.3 4

Answer:
Circled the number of the train that is longer

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.3 5
Answer:
Circled the train which is longer and colored

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.3 6
Answer:
Line drawn through the shorter train

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: Each car on a roller coaster holds 2 people.
• Do the roller-coaster trains hold the same number of people? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. Tell how you know.
• Circle the roller-coaster train that holds more people. Tell how you know

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.3 7

Answer:
No, The roller-coaster trains does not  hold the same number of people.
the first roller -coaster contains two seats that means 4 people and the second has 5 seats with 10 people
second has more number of seats and more people

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

Answer: Circled the roller-coaster train that holds more people. The first roller-coaster has 4 seats with 8 people
and the second roller-coaster has 6 seats with 12 people.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.3 8

Use Number to Compare Lengths Homework & Practice 13.3

Directions:
1 and 2 Compare the lengths of the cube trains with the given number of cubes. Circle the number of the train that is longer. Color to show how you know.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.3 9
Answer:
Circled the number of the train that is longer

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.3 10
Answer:
Circled the longer train and colored.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

Directions:
3 Compare the lengths of the cube trains with the given number of cubes. Draw a line through the number of the train that is shorter. Color to show how you know. 4 Compare the lengths of the cube trains with the given number of cubes. Are the cube trains the same length? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. Color to show how you know. 5 Each car on a roller coaster holds 2 people. Draw a line through the roller-coaster train that holds fewer people. Tell how you know.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.3 11
Answer:
Line through the number train that is shorter.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.3 12
Answer:
No, The both trains are not equal

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.3 13
Answer:
Line drawn through the roller-coaster which contains fewer people

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

Lesson 13.4 Compare Weights

Explore and Grow

Directions: Cut out the Weight Sort Cards. Compare the objects to the lion shown. Then sort the cards into the categories shown.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 1
Answer:
The elephant is heavier and the mouse is lighter.

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Think and Grow

Directions: Compare the weights of the objects.
• Circle the heavier object.
• Draw a line through the lighter object.
• Are the markers the same weight? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 2
Answer:
stapler is heavier than measuring tape

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

step 2:
Line through lighter object

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 3
Answer:
Yes, the markers are same weight.

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Circle the heavier object. 3 and 4 Draw a line through the lighter object. 5 Are the objects the same weight? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 4
Answer:
crayon box is heavier than one crayon

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 5
Answer:
circled the heavier object

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 6
Answer:
Line drawn through the lighter object.

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 7
Answer:
line drawn through the lighter object.

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 8
Answer:
Brick is heavier than the tissue box
so, they are not equal

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
• Circle the object you can carry. Tell why you can carry the object.
• Circle the object you cannot carry. Tell why you cannot carry the object.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 9
Answer:
The folder is lighter in weight in can be easily carried

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 10
Answer:
The bus cannot be carried because it heavier in weight

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Compare Weights Homework & Practice 13.4

Directions:
1 and 2 Circle the heavier object. 3 and 4 Draw a line through the lighter object.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 11
Answer: The chair is heavier than the glue

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 12
Answer:
The line drawn through the file

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 13
Answer:
Line drawn through the lighter object

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 14
Answer:
Line drawn through the lighter object.

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Directions:
5 and 6 Are the objects the same weight? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 7 Circle the object you can carry. Tell why you can carry the object.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 15
Answer:
Both the objects are same weight

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 16
Answer:
Both the objects are not in equal weight

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.4 17
Answer:
We can carry the violin because it is lighter in weight

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Lesson 13.5 Use Numbers to Compare Weights

Explore and Grow

Directions: Hold some counting bears in one hand and a different amount of counting bears in your other hand. Place the groups of bears on the correct buckets on the scale.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.5 1

Think and Grow

Directions:
• Compare the weights of the groups of linking cubes. Match each group of linking cubes with the correct side of the balance.
• Compare the weights of the groups of linking cubes. Match each group of linking cubes with the correct side of the balance.
• Circle the number of linking cubes that makes the balance scale even.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.5 2
Answer:
Each group of linking measures show the correct sides

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.5 3
Answer:
Does not show the equal measures

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 3 Compare the weights of the groups of linking cubes. Match each group of linking cubes with the correct side of the balance scale.

Question 1.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.5 4
Answer:
when weight is more the machine goes down and which has less weight it comes up.

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Question 2.
6Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.5 5
Answer:
The three side should be up as it has less weight and 6 should be down as it has more weight.

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.5 6
Answer:
10 should be down as it has the more weight and 3 + 1 =4 should be up as it has less weight.

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
• Circle the basket that is lighter. Tell how you know.
• Circle the basket that is heavier. Tell how you know.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.5 7
Answer:
First basket is lighter in weight because number of bottles in first basket is less than the second one

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.5 8
Answer:
The first one is heavier because the number of bottle in the first basket is more than the second basket.

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Use Numbers to Compare Weights Homework & Practice 13.5

Directions:
1 and 2 Compare the weights of the groups of linking cubes. Match each group of linking cubes with the correct side of the balance scale.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.5 9
Answer:
As 5 has more linking cubes than 1, 5 should be down and 1 should be up.

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.5 10
Answer:
The weighing measure shows correct measures.

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Directions:
3 Compare the weights of the groups of linking cubes. Match each group of linking cubes with the correct side of the balance scale. 4 Circle the Circle the basket number of linking cubes that makes the balance scale even. 5 Circle the basket that is heavier. Tell how you know.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.5 11
Answer:
2 + 2 = 4 is lighter and 5 is heavier,
5 will be down and and 4 will be up

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.5 12
Answer: Line drawn through the correct measures

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Question 5.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.5 13
Answer:
The first basket is heavier than the second one

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Lesson 13.6 Compare Capacities

Explore and Grow

Directions: Cut out the Capacity Sort Cards. Compare the objects to the bucket shown. Then sort the cards into the categories shown.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 1

Think and Grow

Directions: Compare the capacities of the objects.
• Circle the object that holds more.
• Draw a line through the object that holds less.
• Do the recycling bins hold the same amount? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 2
Answer: The cup contains the more

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 3

Answer:
The recycling bins hold the same amount

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Circle the object that holds more. 3 and 4 Draw a line through the object that holds less. 5 Do the milk containers hold the same amount? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 4

Answer:
The bag contains the more amount

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 5
Answer:
The container contains more amount

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 6

Answer:
second figure holds the less

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 7
Answer:
line drawn through the object which contain less

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 8
Answer:
The milk container does not contain the equal amount

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
• You are going camping. Circle the backpack that can hold all of your camping supplies. Tell how you know.
• You are going to school. Circle the bag that cannot hold all of your school supplies. Tell how you know.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 9
Answer:
Circled the backpack that holds all of your camping supplies.
The second bag holds all the things.

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

 

Answer:
Circled the bag that cannot hold all of your school supplies.

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

Compare Capacities Homework & Practice 13.6

Directions: 1 and 2 Circle the object that holds more. 3 and 4 Draw a line through the object that holds less.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 11
Answer:
The second spoon contains the more amount.

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 12
Answer:
The Big bucket contains the more amount

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 13
Answer:
Line Drawn through the shorter object

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 14
Answer:
Line drawn through the shorter object

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

Directions:
5 and 6 Do the objects hold the same amount? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 7 Your class is going on a field trip. Circle the vehicle that can hold your class. Tell how you know.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 15
Answer:
Both the basket contains the same amount

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 16
Answer:
The objects does not contain the same amount

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.6 17
Answer:
The bus can hold all the children

Explanation:
The maximum amount that something can contain
The maximum is that holds more
and the minimum that holds less

Lesson 13.7 Describe Objects by Attributes

Explore and Grow

Directions: Cut out the Measurable Attribute Sort Cards. Place the objects that you can measure using length or height into the length or height box. Then place the objects that you can measure using weight into the weight box. Then place the objects that you can measure using capacity into the capacity box.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 1

Think and Grow

Directions: Circle the measurable attributes of the object

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 2
Answer:
cubes are the measuring attribute

Explanation:
The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

 

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 3
Answer:
weighing machine is the measuring attribute

The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 4
Answer:
Capacity is the measuring attribute

The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1– 4 Circle the measurable attributes of the object. 5 Circle the objects that have capacity as an attribute.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 5
Answer:
cubes are the measuring attribute

The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 6
Answer:
weighing is the measuring attribute

The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 7
Answer:
cubes are the measuring attribute

The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 8
Answer:
cubes are the measuring attribute

The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 9
Answer:
The glue is the capacity attribute

The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
• Draw an object that has capacity as an attribute.
• Draw an object that does not have capacity as an attribute.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 10

Answer:
Jar is the capacity object
pencil is not the capacity object

Explanation:
The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Describe Objects by Attributes Homework & Practice 13.7

Directions:
1 – 3 Circle the measurable attributes of the object.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 11
Answer:
Cubes are the measuring object

Explanation:
The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 12
Answer:
cubes are the measuring object

Explanation:
The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 13
Answer:
cube is the measuring object

Explanation:
The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Directions:
4 Circle the measurable attributes of the broccoli. 5 Circle the objects that have length as an attribute. 6 Draw an object that has length as an attribute. 7 Draw an object that has weight as an attribute.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 14
Answer:
Weighing is the measuring attribute

Explanation:
The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 15
Answer:
fork, tree, toy helicopter are length attributes

The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 16
Answer:
fork is the length attribute

The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 13.7 17
Answer:

The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

water bottle is the capacity attribute

Measure and Compare Objects Performance Task

Directions: You use one bucket to collect rainwater on Monday and a different bucket to collect rainwater on Tuesday. On Monday, you collect 1 less than 7 fluid ounces of rainwater. On Tuesday, you collect 1 more than 3 fluid ounces of rainwater. 1 Circle the number on each bucket that shows the amount of rainwater you collect. Then circle the day that you collect more rainwater. 2 Draw a bucket for Wednesday that is taller and holds more water than Monday’s bucket. 3 The amount of rainwater you collect on Wednesday is the same as the amount you collect in all on Monday and Tuesday. Write an addition sentence to tell how much rainwater you collect on Wednesday.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 1
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 2

Answer: the diagram is shown below.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 3
Answer:
1 less than 7 fluid ounces of rainwater = 6
1 more than 3 fluid ounces of rainwater = 4

The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Measure and Compare Objects Activity

Measurement Boss

Directions: Each player flips a Measurement Boss Card and places it on the page. Compare the objects based on the attribute of the card. The player with the object that is longer, taller, heavier, or holds more takes both cards. Repeat until all cards have been used.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects 4

Measure and Compare Objects Chapter Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Circle the taller object. 3 Draw a line through the shorter object. 4 Are the crayons the same length? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 5 Draw a string that holds the same number of beads as the string shown. Tell how you know.

13.1 Compare Heights

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 1

Answer:
The door is taller than the chair

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 2
Answer:
The dog is taller than the cat

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

13.2 Compare Lengths

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 3
Answer:
Line drawn through the shorter object

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 4
Answer: second crayon is shorter.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 5
Answer:
string drawn with equal length.

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.

Directions:
6 and 7 Compare the lengths of the cube trains that have the given number of cubes. Circle the number of the train that is longer. Color to show how you know. 8 Draw a line through the lighter object. Are the footballs the same weight? 9 Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

13.3 Use Numbers to Compare Lengths

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 6
Answer:
7 is the bigger train than the 5

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

 

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 7
Answer:
10 train is lengthier than the 9

Explanation:
Great or more than average height,
especially (with reference to an object) relative to width and height
measuring a specified distance from top to bottom.
the measurement or extent of something from end to end; the greater of two or the greatest of three dimensions of an object

13.4 Compare Weights

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 8
Answer:
Line drawn through the lighter object

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 9
Answer: Yes, the foot balls are same weight

Directions:
10 Compare the weights of the groups of linking cubes. Match each group of linking cubes with the correct side of the balance scale. 11 Circle the bag that is lighter. Tell how you know. 12 and 13 Draw a line through the object that holds less.

13.5 Use Numbers to Compare Weights

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 10
Answer: 4 comes down and 2 goes up

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight
.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 11
Answer: The bag that contains 3 balls are lighter.

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

13.6 Compare Capacities

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 12
Answer: Line drawn through the lighter object.

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 13
Answer: Line drawn through the lighter object.

Explanation:
heavier of great weight; difficult to lift or move
of great density; thick or substantial
lighter than the expected item or which weighs less weight

Directions:
14 Do the water bottles hold the same amount? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 15 – 17 Circle the measurable attributes of the object. 18 Circle the objects that have capacity as an attribute.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 14
Answer: The water bottles does not hold the same amount of water.

13.7 Describe Objects by Attributes

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 15
Answer:
Cubes are the measuring attribute of length.

Explanation:
The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 16
Answer:
capacity is the measuring attribute.

Explanation:
The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 17
Answer:
It can be measured with cubes length attribute.

Explanation:
The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects chp 18
Answer:
Circled the measuring attribute.

Explantion:
The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Measure and Compare Objects Cumulative Practice

Directions:
Shade the circle next to the answer. 1 Which group has a yellow pencil that is longer than the red pencil? 2 Which five frame shows how many sharks are in the picture? 3 Which group has all rectangles?
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects cp 1
Answer:
Second picture has yellow longer.

Explanation:
The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects cp 2
Answer:
There are 5 sharks in the picture.

Explanation:
The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects cp 3
Answer:
The third image shows all rectangles

Explantion:
The attributes we measure come in two main types, quantitative and categorical. Quantitative attributes are attributes we measure using numbers. For example, your height is a quantitative attribute. On the other hand, a categorical attribute is something measured without using numbers

Directions:
Shade the circle next to the answer. 4 Which subtraction sentence not tells how many geese are left? 5 Which shape is a solid shape? 6 Which solid shape does not stack or slide?

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects cp 4
Answer:
the first substraction sentence shows

Explanation:
There are 8 birds 3 are flying and 5 are sitting
and the picture shows 8 – 3 = 5

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects cp 5
Answer:
The pyramid shows the solid shape

Explanation:
Solid Shapes. Objects that occupy space are called solid shapes. Their surfaces are called faces. Faces meet at edges and edges meet at vertices. Some examples of solid shapes: Cone, Cuboid, Sphere, Cylinder, Cube

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects cp 6
Answer:
the box will not slide or stack

Explanation:
Solid Shapes. Objects that occupy space are called solid shapes. Their surfaces are called faces. Faces meet at edges and edges meet at vertices. Some examples of solid shapes: Cone, Cuboid, Sphere, Cylinder, Cube

Directions:
7 Circle the objects that have capacity as an attribute. 8 Circle the object that looks like a cylinder that is above the ball. 9 Find the number of dots on each domino. Write each number. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects cp 7
Answer: The aquarium is capacity attribute.

Explanation:
Capacity Attributes means any and all current or future defined characteristics, certificates, tag, credits, ancillary service attributes, or accounting construct

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects cp 8
Answer:
Nothing shows like a cylinder above the ball.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects cp 9
Answer:
Line drawn through the less number.

Explanation:
10 + 5 = 15
8 + 10 = 18
line drawn through the dice

Directions:
10 Trace the shapes that are hexagons. Write the number of sides and the number of vertices of a hexagon. 11 You have 10 apples. Classify the apples into 2 categories. Circle the groups. Then complete the number bond to match your picture. 12 Draw a larger triangle that can be formed by the 2 triangles shown.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects cp 10
Answer:
there are two hexagons of 6 sides and 6 vertices.

Explanation:
a plane figure with six straight sides and angles

Question 11.

Answer:
The apples are made into 2 groups of 5 each.

Explanation:
the total ten apples are made in to 2 groups 5 in each group
3 are red and big 2 are yellow and small
3 are red and small  and 2 are yellow and small.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 13 Measure and Compare Objects cp 12
Answer:
Drawn a big triangle with the help of two triangles

Explanation:
A triangle has 3 sides and 3 vertices
with equal length

Final Words:

Hope the solutions given on this page are helpful for you guys. Make your children ready by making them practice for the test using Big Ideas Math Kth Grade Solution Key Ch 13 Measure and Compare Objects. Get the solutions for each and every question with the simple tricks from Big Ideas Math Answer Grade K. Keep in touch with us to get the answers for all Big Ideas Math Grade K Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10

Download pdf link of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 is available here. So, the students of elementary school can Download Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Solution Key Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 for free of cost. This Compare Numbers to 10 chapter includes the topics like Vocabulary, Compare Groups to 10 by Matching, Compare Groups to 10 by Counting, Classify Objects into Categories, Classify and Compare by Counting, and so on. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 helps you to secure the highest marks in the exams and also to improve your math skills.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10

Check out the links given in the below section before you start practicing the problems. You can perform well in practice tests, Assessment tests, and chapter tests by referring to our Bigideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10. Also, it helps you to complete your homework without any delay by using the BIM Grade K Answers for Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Compare Groups to 10 by Matching

Lesson: 2 Compare Groups to 10 by Counting

Lesson: 3 Compare Numbers to 10

Lesson: 4 Classify Objects into Categories

Lesson: 5 Classify and Compare by Counting

Chapter: 4 – Compare Numbers to 10

Compare Numbers to 10 Vocabulary

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 1
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 2

Directions:
Count the number of dog toys in front of each dog. Write each number. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.
Answer:
The Number of Dog Toys are greater than the number Dogs.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Compare Numbers to 10 Vocabulary

Number of Dogs = 2
Number of Dog Toys = 5

Chapter 4 Vocabulary Cards

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 3
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 4

Lesson 4.1 Compare Groups to 10 by Matching

Explore and Grow
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 5

Directions:
Use cubes to show the number of letters. Use cubes to show the number of mailboxes. Tell which group has more and which group has less.

Answer:
The count of Letters is greater than the count of mailboxes.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-4.1-Compare-Groups-to-10-by-Matching1

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 6
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 6.1

Answer:
The number of fire extensions is greater than the count of caps, cameras, and minks.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-4.1-Think and Grow
a-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-4.1-Think and Grow.

The number of caps = Seven or 7.
The number of fire extension = Nine or 9.
A number of cameras = Five or 5.
The number of mink = Six or 6.
Directions:
Draw lines between the objects in each group.

  • Is the number of toothbrushes equal to the number of toothpaste tubes? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.
  • Circle the group that is greater in number than the other group.
  • Draw a line through the group that is less in number than the other group.
    Directions:
    Draw lines between the objects in each group.
    1 Is the number of paint palettes equal to the number of paintbrushes? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 2 Circle the group that is greater in number than the other group. 3 Draw a line through the group that is less in number than the other group.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 7

Answer:
The number of paintbrushes is greater than the number of paint palettes.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-4.1-Apply-and-Grow-Practice1
Number of paintbrushes = Seven or 7
The number of paint palettes = Six or 6.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 8

Answer:
The number of wooden spoons is greater than the number of chef cap.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-4.1-Apply-and-Grow-Practice2

The number of wooden spoons = Ten or 10.
The number of chef cap = Seven or 7.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 9

Answer:
The number of thermometers is greater than the number of nurse caps.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-4.1-Apply-and-Grow-Practice3

The number of thermometers = Eight or 8.
The number of nurse caps = Four or 4.

Directions:

  • Draw nails on the board so that the number of nails is greater than the number of hammers. Draw lines between the objects in each group to show that you are correct.
  • Draw nails on the board so that the number of nails is less than the number of hammers. Draw lines between the objects in each group to show that you are correct.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 10

Answer:
a. The number of nails on the board are greater than the number of hampers.

b. The number of hampers are greater than the number of nails on the board.

Explanation:
a.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-4.1-Think-and-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
The number of nails = Seventeen or 17.
The number of hampers = Fifteen or 15.
b.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-4.1-Think-and-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life

A number of nails = Twelve or 12.
Number of hampers = Fifteen or 15.

Compare Groups to 10 by Matching Homework & Practice 4.1

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 11
Answer:
The Number of Nurse caps are greater than the number of chakras.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-4.1-Compare-Groups-to-10-by-Matching-Homework-&-Practice 4.1-1.

The number of nurse caps = Eight or 8.
The number of wooden chakras = Six or 6.

Directions:
1 Draw lines between the objects in each group. Circle the group that is greater in number than the other group.
2 Draw lines between the objects in each group. Draw a line through the group that is less in number than the other group. 3 Draw wands on the cloth so that the number of wands is equal to the number of magician hats. Draw lines between the objects in each group to show that you are correct.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 12

Answer:
The number of Screw drives are greater than the Number of Caps.

Explanation:
Compare Groups to 10 by Matching Homework & Practice 4.1

Number of Caps = Seven or 7.
The number of Screw drives = Nine or 9.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 13

Answer:
The number of magical hats is equal to the number of wands.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-4.1-Compare-Groups-to-10-by-Matching-Homework-&-Practice 4.1-3
The number of magical hats = Six or 6.
The number of wands = Six or 6.

Lesson 4.2 Compare Groups to 10 by Counting

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 14

Directions:
Use cubes to show the number of penguins. Use cubes to show the number of eggs. Tell which group has more and which group has less.

Answer:
The number of Penguins is comparatively more than the number of Eggs.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-Lesson-4.2-Compare-Groups-to-10-by-Counting-EXPLORE

Number of Penguins = Eight or 8.
Number of Eggs = Six or 6.

Directions:
Count the objects in each group. Write each number.

  • Is the number of green dots equal to the number of purple dots? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.
  • Compare the numbers of blackberries and bears. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.
  • Compare the numbers of bears and fish. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 15

Answer:
a. No, the number of Green dots is not equal to the number of Purple dots.
b. The number of Blueberries is greater than the number of Bears.
c. The number of Bears is lesser than the number of Fishes.

Explanation:
a. Number of Green dots = 50
Number of Purple dots = 200

b.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-4.2-Think and Grow.

Number of Blueberries = Ten or 10.
Number of Bears = Four or 4.

c.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-4.2-Think and Grow1.

Number of Bears = Four or 4.
Number of Fishes = Seven or 7.

Directions:
Count the objects in each group. Write each number. 1 Is the number of panda bears equal to the number of bamboo sticks? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 2 Circle the number that is greater than the other number. 3 Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 16

Answer:
The number of Bears is equal to the number of Bamboo Sticks.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-4.2-Apply and Grow-Practice

Number of Bears = Six or 6.
The number of Bamboo Sticks = Six or 6.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 17

Answer:
The number of Leaves is greater than the number of Koala Bears.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-4.2-Apply and Grow-Practice2
The number of Leaves = Ten or 10.
The number of Koala Bear = Seven or 7.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 18

Answer:
The number of Leaves are greater than the number of Kangaroos.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Lesson-4.2-Apply and Grow-Practice3
Number of Kangaroos = Eight or 8.
Number of Leaves = Nine or 9.

Directions:

  • Draw bananas hanging from the tree so that the number of bananas is greater than the number of monkeys. Write the number of each object. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.
  • Draw bananas hanging from the tree so that the number of bananas is less than the number of monkeys. Write the number of each object. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.


Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 19

Answer:
a. The number of Bananas are greater than the number of Monkeys.
b. The number of Bananas are lesser than the number of Monkeys.

Explanation:
a. Number of Bananas = Eight or 8.
Number of Monkeys = Seven or 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare-Numbers-to-10-Compare Numbers to 10 Vocabulary

b. Number of Bananas = Six or 6.
Number of Monkeys = Nine or 9.

Compare Groups to 10 by Counting Homework & Practice 4.2

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 20

 

Answer:
The number of Rabbits are Equal to the number of Carrots.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare Groups to 10 by Counting Homework & Practice 4.2.1

Number of Rabbits = Eight or 8.
Number of Carrots = Eight or 8.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 21

Answer:
The number of  Trees are greater than the number of Giraffes.
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare Groups to 10 by Counting Homework & Practice 4.2.2

Number of Giraffes = Six or 6.
Number of Trees = Nine or 9.

Directions:
1 Count the objects in each group. Write each number. Is the number of yellow counters equal to the number of red counters? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.
2 Count the objects in each group. Write each number. Circle the number that is greater than the other number. 3 Draw hay bales in the pen so that the number of hay bales is less than the number of donkeys. Write the number of each object. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 22
Answer:
The Number of Donkeys are greater than the number of hay bales.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare Groups to 10 by Counting Homework & Practice 4.2.3

Number of Donkeys = 8
Number of Hay Bales = 5

Lesson 4.3 Compare Numbers to 10

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 23
Answer:
The Number of Yellow boxes in the cubes are greater than the number of Blue boxes in the cubes.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.3

Number of Blue boxes in the cubes = Six or 6
Number of Yellow boxes in the cubes = Nine or 9

Directions:
Which number is greater than the other number? Which number is less than the other number? Use counters to show how you know.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 24
Answer:
The number of Yellow Stars above the line are greater than the number of  Gray Stars below the line.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.3-Think and Grow

Number of Yellow Stars above the line = Ten or 10.
The number of Gray Stars below the line = Seven or 7.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 25
Answer:
The number of Smiles below the line are greater than the number of Smiles above are line.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.3-Think and Grow..
Number of Smiles above are line = One or 1.
Number of Smiles below the line = Six or 6.

Directions:
Compare the numbers.

  • Are the numbers equal? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. Draw to show how you know.
  • Circle the number that is greater than the other number. Draw to show how you know.
  • Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number. Draw to show how you know.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 26
Answer:
The number of Blue Plus symbols above the line are greater than the number of Green Plus symbols above the line.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.3-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-1
Number of Green Plus symbols above the line = Five or 5
The number of Blue Plus symbols above the line = Nine or 9.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 27
Answer:
The number of Yellow Moon above the line are greater than the number of Blue Moon.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.3-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-1.

Number of Yellow Moon above the line = Eight or 8
The number of Blue Moon below the line = Six or 6.

Question 3.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 28
Answer:
The number of Blue arrows above the line are greater than the number of Black arrows below the line.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.3-Apply-and-Grow-Practice-2.

The number of Blue arrows above the line = Nine or 9.
The number of Black arrows below the line = Eight or 8.

Directions:
Compare the numbers. 1 Are the numbers equal? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. Draw to show how you know. 2 Circle the number that is greater than the other number. Draw to show how you know. 3 Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number. Draw to show how you know.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 29

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 30
Answer:
a. The number of Flowers I have are greater than the number of Flowers my Friend has.
b. The number of Flowers my friend has are lesser than the number of Flowers I have.

Explanation:
a. Number of Flowers I have = Seven or 7.
Number of Flowers my Friend has = Six or 6.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.3-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life
b. Number of Flowers I have = Ten or 10.
Number of Flowers my Friend has = Nine or 9.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.3-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life.

Directions

  • You have a number of flowers that is greater than 6 and less than 8. Your friend has a number of flowers that is one more than 5. Write and draw how many flowers you each have. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.
  • You have a number of flowers that is one more than 9. Your friend has a number of flowers that is one less than 10. Write and draw how many flowers you each have. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

Compare Numbers to 10 Homework & Practice 4.3

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 31

Answer:
The number of clouds above the line are greater than the number of clouds below the line.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.3-Compare Numbers to 10 Homework & Practice 4.3.1
Number of clouds above the line = 10
Number of clouds below the line = 5

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 32
Answer:
The number of Triangles above the line are greater than the number of Triangles below the line.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.3-Compare Numbers to 10 Homework & Practice 4.3.2
Number of Triangles above the line = Nine or 9.
Number of Triangles below the line = Seven or 7.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 33
Answer:
Number of Marbles I have are greater than the number of Marbles my Friend has.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.3-Compare Numbers to 10 Homework & Practice 4.3.3
Number of Marbles I have = Six or 6.
Number of Marbles my Friend has = Five or 5.


Directions:
1
Compare the numbers. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number. Draw to show how you know.
2 Compare the numbers. Are the numbers equal? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. Draw to show how you know. 3 You have a number of marbles that is greater than 5 and less than 7. Your friend has a number of marbles that is one more than 4. Write and draw how many marbles you each have. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.

Lesson 4.4 Classify Objects into Categories

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 34

Directions:
Place a yellow counter on each tree that is yellow. Place a red counter on each tree that is not yellow.

Answer:
The number of Red counters on the Trees are greater than Number of Yellow counter on the Trees

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.4-Classify-Objects-into-Categories-
Answer:
Number of Yellow counter on the Trees = Four or 4.
Number of Red counters on the Trees = Eight or 8.

Directions:

  • Circle the objects that are green. Cross out the objects that are not green.
  • Circle the animals that are brown. Cross out the animals that are not brown.
  • Circle the animals that have wings. Cross out the animals that do not have wings.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 35

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 36

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.4-Think and Grow

Directions:
1 Circle the pigs that have spots. Cross out the pigs that do not have spots.
2 Circle the blocks that have letters. Cross out the blocks that do have letters.
3 Circle the animals that have tails. Cross out the animals that do not have tails.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 37

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.4-Apply-and-Grow-Practice1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 38
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.4-Think and Grow

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 39
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.4-Think and Grow

 

Directions:

  • Circle the dogs that are black. Cross out the dogs that are not black.
  • Classify the dogs another way. Circle the dogs that belong in the new category. Cross out the dogs that do not belong in the new category. Tell how you classified the dogs.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 40
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 40.1

Answer:
a.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.4-Think-and-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life

b.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.4-Think-and-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life..

The New type of Dogs appearance is completely different from normal dogs like different nose, eyes, tail and many more.

Classify Objects into Categories Homework & Practice 4.4

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 41
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Classify Objects into Categories Homework & Practice 4.4.1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 42

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Classify Objects into Categories Homework & Practice 4.4.2

Directions:
1 Circle the cars that are blue. Cross out the cars that are not red. 2 Circle the toys that are balls. Cross out the toys that are not balls.
3 Circle the animals that have stripes. Cross out the animals that do not have stripes. 4 Circle the animals that have 2 legs. Cross out the animals that do not have 2 legs. 5 Classify the books into 2 categories. Circle the books in one category. Cross out the books in the other category. Tell how you classied the books.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 43

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Classify Objects into Categories Homework & Practice 4.4.3

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 44

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Classify Objects into Categories Homework & Practice 4.4.4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 45

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Classify Objects into Categories Homework & Practice 4.4.5
The two types of Books  are:
1. Closed book
2. Open Book

Lesson 4.5 Classify and Compare by Counting

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 46
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.5-Classify and Compare by Counting-Explore and Grow

Directions:
Classify the animals into the categories shown. Write the marks in the chart. Count the marks and write the numbers to tell how many animals are in each category. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.

Think and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 47

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 48
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.5-Classify-and-Compare by Counting-Think and Grow...

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.5-Classify-and-Compare-by-Counting-Think-and-Grow...

Directions:
1 and 2 Classify the animals into the categories shown. Write the marks in the chart. Count the marks and write the numbers to tell how many animals are in each category. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number

Apply and Grow: Practice

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 49

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 50

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.5-Apply-and-Grow-Practice1

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson-4.5-Apply-and-Grow-Practice1
Number of Four legs Animals = Five or 5.
Number of  not Four legs Animals = Eight or 8.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 51
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson-4.5-Apply-and-Grow-Practice2

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson-4.5-Apply-and-Grow-Practice2..
Number of

.

Directions:

  • Classify the buttons into the categories shown. Write the marks in the chart. Count the marks and write the numbers to tell how many buttons are in each category. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.
  • Classify the buttons by color. Count the number of buttons in each category. Write each number. Circle the numbers that are equal.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 52

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Lesson 4.5-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life....

  • Directions:
    1 Classify the animals into the categories shown. Write the marks in the chart. Count the marks and write the numbers to tell how many animals are in each category. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.

Classify and Compare by Counting Homework & Practice 4.5

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 53

Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Classify and Compare by Counting Homework & Practice 4.5.1

Directions:
2 Classify the frogs into the categories shown. Write the marks in the chart. Count the marks and write the numbers to tell how many frogs are in each category. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number. 3 Classify the frogs by color. Count the number of frogs in each category. Write each number. Circle the numbers that are equal.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 54

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 55

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Classify and Compare by Counting Homework & Practice 4.5.2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 56
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Classify and Compare by Counting Homework & Practice 4.5.3.

 

Compare Numbers to 10 Performance Task

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 57

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 58
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-Compare Numbers to 10 Performance Task1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 59
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-Compare Numbers to 10 Performance Task-2.3

Directions:
1 Count the toys in each group. Write each number. Is the number of spring toys equal to the number of balls? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 2 Classify the toys into the categories shown. Write the marks in the chart. Count the marks and write the numbers to tell how many toys are in each category. Circle the number that is greater than the other number. 3 More balls are delivered in a box. The number of balls in the box is less than the number of balls in the picture. Draw the balls in the box. Write the number of balls in the box.

Compare Numbers to 10 Activity

Toss and Compare

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 60

Directions:
Take turns tossing a counter onto the board. If the counter lands on Newton or Descartes, choose any number from 0 to 10. Write the numbers on your Toss and Compare Numbers from 0 to 10 Recording Sheet. Circle the number that is greater than the other number. Circle both numbers if they are equal. Repeat this process until you fill your sheet.

Compare Numbers to 10 Chapter Practice

4.1 Compare Groups to 1o by Matching

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 61

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-4.1 Compare Groups to 1o by Matching1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 62

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-4.1 Compare Groups to 1o by Matching2

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 63

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-4.1 Compare Groups to 1o by Matching3

Directions:
Draw lines between the objects in each group.
1 Is the number of red cherries equal to the number of black cherries? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 2 Circle the group that is greater in number than the other group. 3 Draw a line through the group that is less in number than the other group.

4.2 Compare Groups to 1o by Counting

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 64
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-4.1 Compare Groups to 1o by Matching4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 65
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-4.1 Compare Groups to 1o by Matching5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 66
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-4.1 Compare Groups to 1o by Matching6.

Directions:
Count the objects in each group. Write each number.
4 Is the number of squirrels equal to the number of acorns? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 5 Circle the number that is greater than the other number. 6 Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

4.3 Compare Numbers to 10

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 67
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-4.3 Compare Numbers to 10.1

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 68
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-4.3 Compare Numbers to 10.2

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 69

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-4.3 Compare Numbers to 10.9

Directions:
Compare the numbers. 7 Are the numbers equal? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no. 8 Circle the number that is greater than the other number. Draw to show how you know. 9 Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number. Draw to show how you know.

4.4 Classify Objects into Categories

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 70
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-4.3 Compare Numbers to 10.10

4.5 Classify and Compare by Counting

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 71
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-4.3 Compare Numbers to 10.11.

Directions:
10 Circle the buttons that have 4 holes. Cross out the buttons that do not have 4 holes. 11 Classify the animals into the categories shown. Write the marks in the chart. Count the marks and write the numbers to tell how many animals are in each category. Circle the number that is greater than the other number.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 72
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-Compare Numbers to 10 Cumulative Practice 1 - 4.1.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 73
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-Compare Numbers to 10 Cumulative Practice 1 - 4.2.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 74
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-Compare Numbers to 10 Cumulative Practice 1 - 4.3.

Directions:
Shade the circle next to the answer. 1 Which five frame shows the number of puzzle pieces? 2 Which basket has 0 apples? 3 Which number is greater than 8?

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 75
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-Compare Numbers to 10 Cumulative Practice 1 - 4.4.
Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 76
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-Compare Numbers to 10 Cumulative Practice 1 - 4.5.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 77
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-Compare Numbers to 10 Cumulative Practice 1 - 4.6.

Directions:
Shade the circle next to the answer. 4 Which block belongs in the group? 5 Which ticket shows the numbers 1 to 5 in order? 6 Which group does not have 7 balls?

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 78
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-Compare Numbers to 10 Cumulative Practice 1 - 4.7.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 79

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-Compare Numbers to 10 Cumulative Practice 1 - 4.8.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 80

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-Compare Numbers to 10 Cumulative Practice 1 - 4.9.

 

Directions
7 Count the flowers. Color the boxes to show how many. 8 Count the salamanders. Say the number. Write the number. 9 Draw lines between the objects in each group. Is the number of detective hats equal to the number of magnifying glasses? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 81
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-Compare Numbers to 10 Cumulative Practice 1 - 4.10.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 82
Answer:
The number of Frogs are greater than the Number of Lotus.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-Compare Numbers to 10 Cumulative Practice 1 - 4.11.

Number of Frogs = Five or 5.
Number of Lotus = Three or 3.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10 83
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-Grade-K-Answer-Key-Chapter-4-4.5-Compare Numbers to 10 Cumulative Practice 1 - 4.12.

Directions:
10 Count the objects in each group. Write each number. Circle the number that is greater than the other number. 11 Draw lines between the objects in each group. Draw a line through the group that is less in number than the other group. 12 Draw 4 pieces of string. Is the number of pieces of string equal to the number of buttons? Circle the thumbs up for yes or the thumbs down for no.

Final words:

After practicing the problems test yourself by solving the problems given at the end of the chapter. The solutions are prepared from Big Ideas Math – Modeling Real Life Grade K Student Edition Set. Even teachers can make use of the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 4 Compare Numbers to 10. Bookmark our page to get the free pdf of all Big Ideas Math Grade K Answers for Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics

To enhance your knowledge you have to practice all the problems of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics. You can get the pdf’s of Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Statistics from bigideasmathanswers.com for free of cost. Refer to the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics book and score the maximum marks in the exam. Follow the reference problems and attend the exam with good preparation.

It is necessary to know the important questions according to the latest syllabus. Follow the complete article and you will come to know the various important points regarding Statistics. You can find the complete syllabus in one pdf of Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Solutions Chapter 8 Statistics. Maximize your scores with the help of the given information in the below sections.

Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Statistics

We provide the weightage key of each topic by which you can figure out the important topics and prepare a schedule according to it. The schedule helps you to prepare each topic within the time period. Know the various methods of solving each problem. Become perfect in the concept of statistics with the given solved examples, guide, exploration, and also the formulae, etc.

There are various topics involved in Statistics like Samples and Populations, Using Random Samples to Describe Populations, Comparing Populations, Using Random Samples to Compare Populations, Statistics, etc. Big Ideas Math Book 7th Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Statistics pdf download link is available in the next sections. You can also get the video links to understand the concept more clearly.

Performance Task

Lesson: 1 Samples and Populations

Lesson: 2 Using Random Samples to Describe Populations

Lesson: 3 Comparing Populations

Lesson: 4 Using Random Samples to Compare Populations

Chapter: 8 – Statistics 

Statistics STEAM Video/Performance Task

STEAM Video

Comparing Dogs
Although dogs and wolves are the same species, they can have very different characteristics. How are dogs and wolves similar?
Watch the STEAM Video “Comparing Dogs.” Then answer the following questions.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 1
1. In the video, the dogs Devo and Etta are walking in a population park. Describe the of the dogs shown in the sample video. Then describe a of the dogs shown in the video. Explain your reasoning.
2. Dogs, wolves, and dingos are all the same species. This species is called Canis lupus
a. Describe one possible sample of the species. Explain your reasoning.
b. You want to know the average height of an animal in the Canis lupus species. Would you use the entire population of the species or would you use a sample to gather data? Explain.
c. The entire Canis lupus species is a sample of what population? Explain.

Answer:
1. In the video, the dogs Devo and Etta are walking in a population park. The population of the dogs is very big. They may differ from color, size, hair, size and skin yet they all are the same species. Here they have shown Canis Lupus bread dogs. They all are the same bone body structured dogs yet  are differently living for their specification of work performance.

2. Dogs, wolves, and Dingo’s are all the same species. This species is called Canis lupus.
a. A wolf with a grey coat living in forested northern regions of North America is one possible sample of the species for Canis Lupus because they resemble like wolfs yet they match to dogs bone structure and near to dogs D.N.A.

b. If you want to know the average height of an animal in the Canis lupus species you should  use a sample to gather data because they are grand children of extinct dogs species having same D.N.A yet different in color, shapes, hair because they having been changing from one generation to another.

c. The entire Canis lupus species is a sample of what population of mammals and under this genus he listed the dog-like carnivores including domestic dogs, wolves, and jackals.

Performance Task

Estimating Animal Populations
After completing this chapter, you will be able to use the concepts you learned to answer the questions in the STEAM Video Performance Task. You will be given a double box-and-whisker plot that represents the weights of male and female gray wolves.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 2
You will be asked to compare the weights of male and female gray wolves. Why might a researcher want to compare data from two different groups of wildlife?

Statistics Getting Ready for Chapter 8

Chapter Exploration
A population is an entire group of people or objects. A sample is a part of the population. You can use a sample to make an inference, or conclusion about a population.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 3
1. Work with a partner. Identify the population and the sample in each pair.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 4
Answer:
A population is an entire group of people or objects. A sample is a part of the population.

a) In the given picture, the school bus students is the population and the class room students  is sample because individual class strength is used for collecting total school population.

b) In the given picture, the grizzly bear with GPS collars in a park is used as sample to collect the population of grizzly bear in a park.

c) In the given picture, 150 quarters coins are used as sample for the calculating all the total  collection in all quarters circulation .

d) In the given picture, 10 fiction books in the library are used as sample to get the total count of all fiction books present in the library.

2. Work with a partner. When a sample is random, each member of the population is equally likely to be selected. You want to know the favorite activity of students at your school. Tell whether each sample is random. Explain your reasoning.
a. members of the school band
b. students in your math class
c. students who enter your school in a morning
d. school newspaper readers

Answer:
c) Students who enter your school in a morning is a random sample because every student data entering into the school is collected and can help to know the favorite activity of them.

Explanation:
2. a) Members of the school band is a not random sample because it gives only the data of the students in the school band not others.

b) Students in your math class is a not random sample because it gives the data of the students who like math.

c) Students who enter your school in a morning is a random sample because every student data entering into the school is collected and can help to know the favorite activity of them.

d) School newspaper readers is not a random sample because here it only collects the data of the students who are in that respective activity of newspaper readers not other students.

Vocabulary
The following vocabulary terms are defined in this chapter. Think about what each term might mean and record your thoughts.
population
unbiased sample
sample
biased sample

Lesson 8.1 Samples and Populations

A population is an entire group of people or objects. A sample is a part of a population. You can gain information about a population by examining samples of the population.

EXPLORATION 1

Using Samples of Populations
Work with a partner. You want to make conclusions about the favorite extracurricular activities of students at your school.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 1
a. Identify the population. Then identify five samples of the population.
b. When a sample is selected at random, each member of the population is equally likely to be selected. Are any of the samples in part (a) selected at random? Explain your reasoning.
c. How are the samples below different? Is each conclusion valid? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 2
d. Write a survey question about a topic that interests you. How can you choose people to survey so that you can use the results to make a valid conclusion?

Answer:
Option B is correct to make conclusions about the favorite extracurricular activities of students at your school.

Explanation:
Option B is correct because the information is collected randomly and gives the accurate result conclusions about the favorite extracurricular activities of students at your school.

An unbiased sample  is representative of a population. It is selected at random unbiased sample and is large enough to provide accurate data. A biased sample is not representative of a population. One or more parts of the population are favored over others
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 3

Try It

Question 1.
WHAT IF?
You want to estimate the number of twelfth-grade students in a high school who ride a bus to school. Which sample is unbiased? Explain.
Answer:
Option A is correct.

Explanation:
Option A is correct to collect the twelfth- grade population. Then identity five samples of the population n make a conclusion of the students who come in bus to school.

Question 2.
You want to estimate the number of eighth-grade students in your school who find it relaxing to listen to music. You consider two samples.

  • fifteen randomly selected members of the band
  • every fifth student whose name appears on an alphabetical list of eighth-grade students
    Which sample is unbiased? Explain.

Answer:
Every fifth student whose name appears on an alphabetical list of eighth-grade students.

Explanation:
Every fifth student whose name appears on an alphabetical list of eighth-grade students is a unbiased sample because here it covers large data n gives us the correct data about the students who are relaxed while listening to music.

Question 3.
Four out of five randomly chosen teenagers support the new land fill. So, you conclude that 80% of the residents of your town support the new land fill. Is the conclusion valid? Explain.
Answer:
Yes, its a valid conclusion.

Explanation:
Yes, its a valid conclusion because 4 out of 5 people in the town means 80% of the people are supporting the new land bill mathematically.

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
WRITING
You want to estimate the number of students in your school who play a school sport. You ask 40 honors students at random whether they play a school sport. Is this sample biased or unbiased? Explain.
Answer:
Yea, its a unbiased sample.

Explanation:
Yes, its a unbiased sample because it gives the information about the number of students who play a school sport in the school randomly and accurate data.

Question 5.
ANALYZING A CONCLUSION
You survey 50 randomly chosen audience members at a theater about whether the theater should produce a new musical. The diagram shows the results. You conclude that 80% of the audience members support production of a new musical. Is your conclusion valid? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 4
Answer:
Yes, its a valid conclusion.

Explanation:
Yes, its a valid conclusion because 80% of 50 people in the audience members at a theater is equal to 40 people, they support production of a new musical. Out of which 20% of 50 people is equal to 10 people, who are against the production of a new musical.

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 6.
You want to estimate the mean photo size on your cell phone. You choose 30 photos at random from your phone. The total size of the sample is 186 megabytes. Explain whether you can use the sample to estimate the mean size of photos on your cell phone. If so, what is your estimate?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 5
Answer:
Yes, we can use it for sample to estimate the mean size of photos on your cell phone.

Explanation:
Yes, we can use it for sample to estimate the mean size of photos on your cell phone because it allows to estimate the size of the cell phone.
Mean size of photos = total size of the sample / photos chose
= 186 × 30
= 6.2 bytes.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
You ask 50 randomly chosen employees of a company how many books they read each month. The diagram shows the results. There are 600 people employed by the company. Estimate the number of employees who read at least one book each month.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 6
Answer:
Number of employees who read at least one book each month = 12

Explanation:
Total number of chosen employee = 50
Total number of people employed = 600
Number of employees who read at least one book each month = Total number of chosen employee / Total number of people employed
= 600 × 50
= 12.

Samples and Populations Homework & Practice 8.1

Review & Refresh

Design a simulation that you can use to model the situation. Then use your simulation to find the experimental probability.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 7
Question 1.
The probability that a meal at a restaurant is overcooked is 10%. Estimate the probability that exactly 1 of the next 2 meals is overcooked.

Answer:
The probability that exactly 1 of the next 2 meals is overcooked = 3.34%

Explanation:
The probability that a meal at a restaurant is overcooked is 10%
The probability that exactly 1 of the next 2 meals is overcooked = out of 3  meals 1 meal is overcooked of 10%
= 1 × 3 × 10%
= 10 × 3 %
= 3.34 %

Question 2.
The probability that you see a butterfly during a nature center tour is 80%. The probability that you see a turtle is 40%. What is the probability of seeing both?

Answer:
The probability of seeing both = 60%

Explanation:
The probability that you see a butterfly during a nature center tour = 80%.
The probability that you see a turtle = 40%
The probability of seeing both = 80 % + 40%/2
= 120 × 2%
= 60%

Solve the inequality. Graph the solution.
Question 3.
2x – 5 < 9
Answer:
Graph:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-Solve the inequality.-Graph the solution3

Explanation:
2x – 5 < 9
add 5 on both sides
=> 2x – 5 + 5 < 9 + 5
=>2x < 14
=> Divide both sides by 2
=> 2x ÷ 2 < 14 ÷ 2
=> x < 7.

Question 4.
5q + 2 ≥ – 13
Answer:
Graph:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-Solve the inequality.-Graph the solution4

Explanation:
5q + 2 ≥ – 13
Subtract 2 from both sides
=> 5q + 2 – 2 ≥ – 13 – 2
=> 5q ≥ –  15
Divide both sides by 5
=> 5q ÷  5 ≥ – 15 ÷ 5
=> q ≥ – 3

Question 5.
2 > 6 – 3r
Answer:
Graph :
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-Solve the inequality.-Graph the solution5

Explanation:
2 > 6 – 3r
subtract 6 from both sides.
2 – 6 > 6 – 3r – 6
=> -4 > -3r
=> -4 ÷ -3 > r
=> 1. 333 > r

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
USING SAMPLES OF POPULATIONS You ask 50 randomly chosen artists in your town about their favorite art form. Determine whether your conclusion is valid. Justify your answer. Favorite Art Form(See Exploration 1, p. 325.)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 8
Question 6.
You conclude that drawing is the favorite art form of 60% of artists in your town.
Answer:
The conclusion made is not valid that drawing is the favorite art form of 60% of artists in your town.

Explanation:
Total strength of town people = 50
Number of people interested in drawing = 20
Percentage of people interested in drawing = Total strength of town people \times Number of people interested in drawing
= 20 × 50 ×100
= 40%
Hence, the conclusion made is not valid that drawing is the favorite art form of 60% of artists in your town.

Question 7.
You conclude that ceramics is the favorite art form of 10% of people in your town.

Answer:
The conclusion made is  valid that ceramics is the favorite art form of 10% of people in your town.

Explanation:
Total strength of town people = 50
Number of people interested in ceramics = 5
Percentage of people interested in drawing = Total strength of town people / Number of people interested in ceramics
= 5 × 50 × 100
= 10%
Hence, the conclusion made is  valid that ceramics is the favorite art form of 10% of people in your town.

IDENTIFYING POPULATIONS AND SAMPLES Identify the population and the sample.
Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 9
Answer:
Residents of New Jersey is the population.
Residents of Ocean Country is the sample.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 10
Answer:
4 cards is the sample.
All cards in a desk is the population.

IDENTIFYING BIASED AND UNBIASED SAMPLES Determine whether the sample is biased or unbiased. Explain.
Question 10.
You want to estimate the number of books students in your school read over the summer. You survey every fourth student who enters the school.

Answer:
Its a unbiased sample.

Explanation:
You can estimate the number of students who are reading books over the summer by the survey every fourth student who enters the school  because its a unbiased sample which gives you the accurate rate of information.

Question 11.
You want to estimate the number of people in a town who think that a park needs to be remodeled. You survey every 10th person who enters the park.

Answer:
Its a biased sample.

Explanation:
You cannot estimate the number of people in a town who think that a park needs to be remodeled by the survey asking every 10th person who enters the park because its a biased sample as every person entering into the park would like it to be remodeled and its not going to be accurate.

Question 12.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You want to determine the number of students in your school who have visited a science museum. You survey 50 students at random. Twenty have visited a science museum, and thirty have not. So, you conclude that40% of the students in your school have visited a science museum. Is your conclusion valid? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 11
Answer:
Its a valid Conclusion that 40% of the students in your school have visited a science museum.

Explanation:
Total number of students the survey taken = 50
Number of students in visited science museum = 20
Number of students who did not visit science museum = 30
Percentage of students visited a science museum = Total number of students the survey taken – Number of students in visited science museum
= 20 ×50 × 100
= 40%

Question 13.
USING A SAMPLE
Which sample is better for making an estimate? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 12

Answer:
Sample B -A random sample of 500 pencils from 1 machines  is better than Sample A – A random sample of 500 pencils from 20 machines

Explanation:
Sample A = A random sample of 500 pencils from 20 machines.
Sample B = A random sample of 500 pencils from 1 machines.

Sample B -A random sample of 500 pencils from 1 machines  is better than Sample A – A random sample of 500 pencils from 20 machines  because its gives us the accurate and sufficient data of pencils produced and how many are defective among them. Its a biased sample with correct data.

CONDUCTING SURVEYS Determine whether you should survey the population or a sample. Explain.

Question 14.
You want to know the average height of seventh graders in the United States.
Answer:
Survey on sample of the seventh graders should be taken.

Explanation:
Survey on sample of  the seventh graders should be taken because the total population in United States is very large and its very difficult to survey on the population. Sample survey will be easy and we can get the information  regarding the average height of seventh graders in the United States accurately.

Question 15.
You want to know the favorite types of music of students in your homeroom.
Answer:
Survey on Population should be taken.

Explanation:
Survey on the population in your homeroom should be taken because its a very small area of some limited people and its better to take than sample survey to know the favorite types of music of students.

Question 16.
CRITICAL THINKING

Does increasing the size of a sample necessarily make the sample more representative of a population? Give an example to support your explanation.

Answer:
Yes, increasing the size of the sample necessarily makes the sample more representative of a population. A representative sample is a group or set chosen from a larger statistical population according to specified characteristics. A random sample is a group or set chosen in a random manner from a larger population.

Explanation:
Yes, increasing the size of the sample necessarily makes the sample more representative of a population lead to more accurate or representative results at the same time when it comes to surveying large populations, bigger isn’t always better.
For Example:
You want to know the average height of students in the UK .

Question 17.
LOGIC
A person surveys residents of a town to determine whether a skateboarding ban should be overturned. Describe how the person can conduct the survey so that the sample is biased toward overturning the ban.
Answer:
Yes, the sample is biased toward overturning the ban.

Explanation:
If the person takes the survey on a skateboarding ban should be overturned from every tenth person living in a town then the person surveys is  going to be a biased  sample toward overturning the ban because every tenth person wishes to overturning on the ban.

Question 18.
MODELING REAL LIFE
You ask 20 randomly chosen environmental scientists from your state to name their favorite way to eliminate waste. There are 200 environmental scientists in your state. Estimate the number of environmental scientists in your state whose favorite way to eliminate waste is recycling.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 13
Answer:
Number of environmental scientists in your state whose favorite way to eliminate waste is recycling = 20

Explanation:
Total number of scientists in your state = 200
Number of scientists randomly ask in your state = 20
Out of 20 randomly asked scientists whose favorite way to eliminate waste is recycling = 2
=> 2 × 20 = 10%
Number of environmental scientists in your state whose favorite way to eliminate waste is recycling = Total number of scientists in your state x Out of 20 randomly asked scientists whose favorite way to eliminate waste is recycling \times100
= 200  × 10 × 100 = 20.

Question 19.
MODELING REAL LIFE
To predict the result of a mayoral election, you survey 50 likely voters at random. The diagram shows the results. Describe whether the sample can be used to predict the outcome of the election. If so, what is your prediction for the number of votes received by the winner assuming that500 people vote?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 14
Answer:
Yes,  the sample can be used to predict the outcome of the election because  it lets us know how voters are going to vote and whose going to be the winner.
Number of votes candidate A gets  = 330

Explanation:
Number of voters randomly taken in the survey = 50
Total number of people voting = 500
Yes,  the sample can be used to predict the outcome of the election because  it lets us know how voters are going to vote and whose going to be the winner.
According to survey candidate A gets 33 out of 50.
=> 33 ÷ 50 ×100 = 66 %
According to survey candidate B gets 12 out of 50.
=> 12 ÷ 50 ×100 = 24%
According to survey others gets 5 out of 50.
=> 5 ÷ 50 ×100 = 10%
So, the winner according to survey prediction is candidate A.
Number of votes candidate A gets  = 66% of 500
=> 330 votes.

Question 20.
DIG DEEPER!
You ask 100 randomly chosen dog owners in your town how many dogs they own. The results are shown in the table. There are 500 dog owners in your town.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.1 15
a. Estimate the median number of dogs per dog owner in your town. Justify your answer.
b. Estimate the mean number of dogs per dog owner in your town. Justify your answer.

Answer:
a) The median number of dogs per dog owner in your town = 4.
b) The mean number of dogs per dog owner in your town = 20.

Explanation:
a) The median is the middle number in a sorted, ascending or descending, list of numbers and can be more descriptive of that data set than the average.
The sorted order of the frequency = 1 3 4 38 54
The median number of dogs per dog owner in your town = 4

b) Explanation:
The mean is the average  of the numbers.
Number of  listed dogs = 5
Total sum of the frequency of the dogs listed = 54 + 38 + 3 + 1 + 4 = 100
The mean number of dogs per dog owner in your town = 100 ÷ 5 = 20

Lesson 8.2 Using Random Samples to Describe Populations

EXPLORATION 1

Exploring Variability in Samples
Work with a partner. Sixty percent of all seventh graders have visited a planetarium.
a. Design a simulation using packing peanuts. Mark 60% of the packing peanuts and put them in a paper bag. What does choosing a marked peanut represent?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 1
b. Simulate a sample of 25 students by choosing peanuts from the bag, replacing the peanut each time. Record the results.
c. Find the percent of students in the sample who have visited a planetarium. Compare this value to the actual percent of all seventh graders who have visited a planetarium.
d. Record the percent in part(c) from each pair in the class. Use a dot plot to display the data. Describe the variation in the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 2

Try It

Question 1.
Use each sample to make an estimate for the number of students in your school who prefer rap music. Describe the center and the variation of the estimates.

Answer:
The Variance is defined as the average of the squared differences from the Mean.
The center of the estimates = 2
The variation of the estimates = 0.64
The Standard Deviation of the estimates = 0.8

Explanation:
Survey randomly took in the school = 20
Total number of students in the school = 840
Number of students who choose rap music by me =  1
Number of students who choose rap music by friend A = 2
Number of students who choose rap music by friend B = 1
Number of students who choose rap music by friend C = 1
Number of students who choose rap music by friend D = 3
The center of the estimates =  1 2 3 = 2
Mean of the estimates =  1+ 2 + 1 + 1 + 3 ÷5= 8 ÷ 5 = 1.6
The variation of the estimates =  (1- 1.6)^2 + (2 – 1.6)^2 +(1- 1.6)^2 + (1- 1.6)^2 + (3 – 1.6)^2 ÷ 5
= (-0.6)^2 + (0.4)^2 + (-0.6)^2 + (-0.6)^2 + (1.4)^2 ÷ 5
= 0.36 + 0.16 + 0.36 + 0.36 + 1.96  ÷  5
= 3.20 ÷ 5
= 0.64
The Standard Deviation of the estimates = \sqrt{0.64} = 0.8

Question 2.
Repeat Example 2, but estimate the medians instead of the means.
Answer:
Median of the students who choose pop music = 5

Explanation:
The six estimates are that students with part time jobs work = 5 7 7 3 7 7
8 and 9 hours per week. The estimates have an average  range from 9 – 5 = 4 hours.
Sorted estimates that students with part time jobs work =  3 5 7
Median of the students who choose pop music = 5

Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 3.
USING MULTIPLE RANDOM SAMPLES
Use each sample in Example 1 to make an estimate for the number of students in your school who prefer rock music. Describe the variation of the estimates.

Answer:
The variation of the estimates = 1.84

Explanation:
Estimate for the number of students in your school who prefer rock music = 4 7 5 4 3
Sorted estimate for the number of students in your school who prefer rock music = 3 4 5  7
Mean of the estimate for the number of students in your school who prefer rock music = 4 +7 +5 +4 +3 ÷  5
= 4.6
The variation of the estimates = (4-4.6)^2 + ( 7-4.6)^2 + ( 5 – 4.6)^2 + ( 4-4.6)^2 + ( 3 – 4.6)^2 ÷ 5
= (-0.6)^2 + ( 2.4)^2 + ( 0.4)^2 + (-0.6)^2  + (- 1.6)^2 ÷ 5
= 0.36 + 5.76 + 0.16 + 0.36 + 2.56 ÷ 5
= 9.2 ÷ 5
= 1.84

Question 4.
ESTIMATING AN AVERAGE OF A POPULATION
You want to know the mean number of hours music students at your school practice each week. At each of three music classes you randomly survey 10 students. Your results are shown. Use all three samples to make one estimate for the mean number of hours music students practice each week.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 3
Answer:
Mean value of hours for number of students practiced for each week for all three classes A,B,C
= 4.93

Explanation:
Mean value  of hours for number of students practiced for each week of class A
= 6 + 5 + 5 + 6 + 4 + 6 + 8 + 5 + 5 + 2+ 6 \div 10
= 58 ÷ 10
= 5.8
Mean value of hours for number of students practiced for each week of class B
= 0 + 6 + 6 + 5 + 4 + 5 + 6 + 3 + 4 + 9 ÷ 10
= 48 ÷ 10
=4.8
Mean value of hours for number of students practiced for each week of class C
= 4 + 5 + 6 + 4 + 3 + 2 + 2 + 3 + 12 + 1 ÷ 10
=  42 ÷10
= 4.2
Mean value of hours for number of students practiced for each week for all three classes A,B,C
= 5.8 + 4.8 + 4.2 ÷3
= 14.8 ÷ 3
= 4.93

Self-Assessment for Problem Solving
Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
Repeat Example 3 with the assumption that 50% of all seventh graders have visited a planetarium.

Answer:
So, most of the samples are within 10% of the actual population that of all seventh graders have visited a planetarium.

Explanation:
The actual percentage of 60% , the number of samples is 200 and the sample size is 50.
The estimates are clustered around 50% , most are between 45 and 60.
So, most of the samples are within 10% of the actual population.

Question 6.
Forty percent of all seventh graders have visited a state park. How closely do 200 random samples of 50 students estimate the percent of seventh graders who have visited a state park? Use a simulation to support your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 4
Answer:
Its a biased sample of 200 random samples of 50 students for  estimating  the percent of seventh graders who have visited a state park.

Explanation:
40% of the all seventh graders have visited a state park.
Total samples taken = 200
Number of students randomly taken = 50
Its a biased sample of 200 random samples of 50 students for estimating the percent of seventh graders who have visited a state park because it does not gives the correct information of the seventh graders and they  may or may not be the visitors of the park.

Using Random Samples to Describe Populations Homework & Practice 8.2

Review & Refresh

You ask 100 randomly chosen high school students whether they support a new college in your town. Determine whether your conclusion is valid.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 5
Question 1.
You conclude that 85% of high school students in your town support the new college.
Answer:
No, its not a valid conclusion.

Explanation:
Because it is randomly chosen for only 100 people for one set.
It can be 85  do not support for another set of 100 people who are randomly chosen.
You support the statement if total 85 % of the people in the town support the new college .

 

Question 2.
You conclude that 15% of residents in your town do not support the new college.
Answer:
No, its not a valid conclusion.

Explanation:
No, its not a valid conclusion because this percentage which is taken is only for respected chosen students not on the total population of the town who does not prefer new colleges in the town.

Write and solve a proportion to answer the question.
Question 3.
What percent of 30 is 12?
Answer:
3.6 is the percent of 30 is 12.

Explanation:
30 = 100 %
X = 12
Cross multiply the equation
=> X × 100 = 30 ×  12
=> X ×  100 = 360
=> X = 360 × 100
=> X = 3.6

Question 4.
17 is what percent of 68?
Answer:
25 percent of 68 is 17.

Explanation:
68 = 100%
17 = X%
Cross multiply the equation
X × 68 = 17 × 100
=> X × 68 = 1700
=> X = 1700 ÷ 68
=> X = 25

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving
EXPLORING VARIABILITY IN SAMPLES Thirty percent of all seventh graders own a bracelet. Explain whether the sample closely estimates the percentage of seventh graders who own a bracelet. (See Exploration 1, p. 331.)
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 6
Question 5.
50 seventh graders, 14 own a bracelet
Answer:
Its  not a valid conclusion that 50 seventh graders 14 own a bracelet.

Explanation:
Thirty percent of all seventh graders own a bracelet.
30 percent of 50 seventh graders.
=> 30 × 50 ÷ 100
=> 1500 ÷ 100
=> 15.
Its  not a valid conclusion that 50 seventh graders 14 own a bracelet because 15 out of 30 own a bracelet.

Question 6.
30 seventh graders, 3 own a bracelet
Answer:
Its  not a valid conclusion that 30 seventh graders 3 own a bracelet.

Explanation:
30 percent of 30 seventh graders.
30 × 30 ÷ 100
=> 900 ÷ 100
=> 9.

Question 7.
USING MULTIPLE RANDOM SAMPLES
A store owner wants to know how many of her 600 regular customers prefer canned vegetables. Each of her three cashiers randomly surveys 20 regular customers. The table shows the results.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 7
a. Use each sample to make an estimate for the number of regular customers of the store who prefer fresh vegetables.
b. Describe the variation of the estimates.

Answer:
a) The Estimation for the number of regular customers of the store who prefer fresh
vegetables = 47.
b) The variation of the estimates = 12.6889.

Explanation:
a) Total number of regular customers to the store = 600
Total number of cashier who takes the survey = 3
Number of customers they have taken survey = 3 × 20 = 60
According to the three survey, number of customers who willing to take fresh vegetables
= (11 + 14 + 12) = 47

b. Describe the variation of the estimates.
Mean of estimates = (11 + 14 + 12) ÷ 3 = 47 ÷ 3 = 15.67
Variation of the estimates = (11 – 15.67)^2 + (14 – 15.67)^2  + (12 – 15.67)^2 ÷ 3
= ( -4.67)^2 + (-1.67)^2 + (-3.67)^2 ÷ 3
= 21.8089 + 2.7889 + 13.4689 ÷ 3
= 38.0667 ÷ 3
= 12.6889

Question 8.
USING MULTIPLE RANDOM SAMPLES
An arcade manager wants to know how many of his 750 regular customers prefer to visit in the winter. Each of five state members randomly surveys 25 regular customers. The table shows the results.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 8
a. Use each sample to make an estimate for the number of regular customers who prefer to visit in the winter.
b. Describe the variation of the estimates.
Answer:
a) An estimate for the number of regular customers who prefer to visit in the winter according to survey sample = 52.

b) Variation of the estimates = 1.04

Explanation:
a) Total number of regular customers who prefer to visit in the winter taken in the five survey sample = 25 × 5 = 125
An estimate for the number of regular customers who prefer to visit in the winter according to survey sample = 11 + 10 +9 + 10 +12
= 52

b) Mean of estimates = 11 + 10 +9 + 10 +12 ÷ 5 = 52 ÷ 5 = 10.4
Variation of the estimates = (11 – 10.4)^2 + ( 10 -10.4)^2 + (9  – 10.4)^2 + ( 10 – 10.4)^2 + ( 12 -10.4)^ 2 ÷5
= ( 0.6)^2 + ( -0.4)^2 + ( -1.4)^2 + ( -0.4)^2 + (1.6)^2 ÷5
= 0.36 + 0.16 + 1.96 + 0.16 + 2.56 ÷5
= 5.2 ÷5
= 1.04

Question 9.
ESTIMATING A MEAN OF A POPULATION
A park ranger wants to know the mean number of nights students in your school plan to camp next summer. The park ranger randomly surveys 10 students from each class. The results are shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 9
a. Use each sample to make an estimate for the mean number of nights students in your school plan to camp next summer. Describe the variation of the estimates.
b. Use all four samples to make one estimate for the mean number of nights students plan to camp next summer.

Answer:
a) The variation of the estimates is quite increasing from one to other sample.

b) One estimate for the mean number of nights students plan to camp next summer = 3.3.

Explanation:
a)  Mean value of  Sample A= 0+5+2+3+0+6+0+10+3+0 ÷ 10 =  29 ÷ 10 = 2.9
Variation of Sample A= (0-2.9)^2 + (5-2.9)^2 + (2-2.9)^2 + (3-2.9)^2 + (0-2.9)^2 + (6-2.9)^2 + (0-2.9)^2 + (10-2.9)^2 + (3-2.9)^2 + (0-2.9)^2  ÷ 10
= (-2.9)^2 + (2.1)^2 + (-0.9)^2 + (0.1)^2 + (-2.9)^2 + (3.1)^2 + (-2.9)^2 + (3.1)^2 + (0.1)^2 + (-2.9)^2  ÷ 10
= 8.41 + 4.41 + 0.81 + 0.01 + 8.41 + 9.61 + 8.41 + 9.61 +0.01 + 8.41 ÷ 10
= 58.1 ÷ 10
=5.81

Mean value of Sample B= 14+0+0+6+5+0+1+2+2+5 ÷ 10 = 35 ÷ 10 = 3.5
Variation of Sample B= (14-3.5)^2 + (0-3.5)^2 + (0-3.5)^2 + (6-3.5)^2 + (5-3.5)^2 + (0-3.5)^2 + (1-3.5)^2 + (2-3.5)^2 + (2-3.5)^2 + (5-3.5)^2 ÷ 10
= (10.5)^2 + (-3.5)^2 + (-3.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (1.5)^2 + (-3.5)^2 + (-2.5)^2 + (-1.5)^2 + (-1.5)^2 + (1.5)^2 ÷ 10
= 110.25 + 12.25 + 12.25 + 6.25 + 2.25 + 12.25 + 6.25 +2.25 + 2.25 +2.25 ÷ 10
= 168.5 ÷ 10
= 16.85

Mean value of Sample C = 8+8+2+3+4+1+0+0+0+6 ÷ 10 = 32 ÷ 10 = 3.2
Variation of Sample C= (8-3.2)^2 + (8-3.2)^2 + (2-3.2)^2 + (3-3.2)^2 + (4-3.2)^2 + (1-3.2)^2 + (0-3.2)^2 + (0-3.2)^2 + (0-3.2)^2 + (6-3.2)^2 ÷ 10
= (4.8)^2 + (4.8)^2 + (-1.2)^2 + (-0.2)^2 + (0.8)^2 + (-2.2)^2 + (-2.2)^2 + (-2.2)^2 + (-3.2)^2 + (2.8)^2 ÷ 10
= 23.04 + 23.04 + 1.44 + 0.04 + 0.64 + 4.84 + 4.84 + 4.84 + 10.24 + 7.84 ÷ 10
= 80.8 ÷ 10
= 8.08

Mean value = 10+10+5+6+1+0+0+0+4+0 ÷ 10 = 36 ÷ 10 = 3.6
Variation of Sample D= (10-3.6)^2 + (10-3.6)^2 + (5-3.6)^2 + (6-3.6)^2 + (1-3.6)^2 + (0-3.6)^2 + (0-3.6)^2 + (0-3.6)^2 + (4-3.6)^2 + (0-3.6)^2 ÷ 10
= (6.4)^2 + (6.4)^2 + (1.4)^2 + (2.4)^2 + (-2.6)^2 + (-3.6)^2 + (-3.6)^2 + (-3.6)^2 + (0.4)^2 + (-3.6)^2 ÷ 10
= 40.96 + 40.96 + 1.96 + 5.76 + 6.76 + 12.96 + 12.96 + 12.96 + 0.16 +12.96 ÷ 10
= 148.4 ÷ 10
= 14.84

b) One estimate for the mean number of nights students plan to camp next summer
= 2.9 +3.5+3.2+3.6 ÷ 4
= 13.2 ÷ 4
= 3.3

Question 10.
ESTIMATING A MEDIAN OF A POPULATION
Repeat Exercise 9, but estimate the medians instead of the means.
Answer:
Median value of Sample A = 3 + 5 ÷2 = 8 ÷ 2 = 4.
Median value of Sample B = 2 + 5 ÷2 = 7 ÷ 2 = 3.5.
Median value of Sample C = 3 + 4 ÷ 2 = 7 ÷ 2 = 3.5.
Median value  of Sample C = 4 + 5 ÷ 2 = 9 ÷ 2 = 4.5.

Explanation:
Sample A= 0+5+2+3+0+6+0+10+3+0
Ascending order of  Sample A= 0 2 3 5 6 10
Median value of Sample A = 3 + 5 ÷2 = 8 ÷ 2 = 4

Sample B = 14+0+0+6+5+0+1+2+2+5
Ascending order of Sample B = 0 1 2 5 6 14
Median value of Sample B = 2 + 5 ÷2 = 7 ÷ 2 = 3.5

Sample C = 8+8+2+3+4+1+0+0+0+6
Ascending order of Sample C = 0 1 2 3 4 6 8
Median value of Sample C = 3 + 4 ÷ 2 = 7 ÷ 2 = 3.5

Sample D = 10+10+5+6+1+0+0+0+4+0
Ascending order of Sample D = 0 1 4 5 6 10
Median value  of Sample C = 4 + 5 ÷ 2 = 9 ÷ 2 = 4.5

Question 11.
DESCRIBING SAMPLE VARIATION
Fifty-five percent of doctors at a hospital prescribe a particular medication. A simulation with 200 random samples of 50 doctors each is shown. Describe how the sample percentages vary.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 10
Answer:
There is a lot of change in the range of the sample percentages with respective to the frequency. The graph increases from 0 range and reaches to the highest range and later it declines to zero in the last.

Explanation:
The range of sample variation  of frequency from 0.30 to 0.50 is from 0 to 18, here the graph range constantly increases from low to some extent.
The range of the sample variation of frequency from 0.50 to 0.60 is from 18 to 22, here the graph range continuously increased and reached to the highest range and declines to middle range.
The range of the sample variation of frequency from 0.60 to 0.80 is from  18 to 0 , here the graph declines and in between its increases and in the last it declines to zero completely.

Question 12.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Sixty percent of vacationers enjoy water parks. Use technology to generate 20 samples of size 100. How closely do the samples estimate the percent of all vacationers who enjoy water parks?
Answer:
Samples vary slightly in terms of their estimation of  the percent of all vacationers who enjoy water parks compared to the people who does not enjoy the water parks. Out of 2000 total vacationers,  50.65% of  people loves the water parks that compared to 49.35% of  the people who does not like water parks.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-MODELING-REAL-LIFE-12
Total number of vacationers = 20 × 100 = 2000
Total number of vacationers who enjoys the water parks = 48 + 53+ 65 + 79+ 87 +11 + 54 + 25 + 36 + 68 + 51 + 45 + 85 + 73 + 44 + 66 + 33 + 28 + 2 + 60 = 1013
Percent of Total number of vacationers who enjoys the water parks = 1013 ÷2000 ×100
= 50. 65 %
Total number of vacationers who enjoys the water parks  = 52 + 47 + 35 + 21 + 13 + 89 + 46 + 75 + 64 + 32 + 49 + 55 + 15 + 27 + 56 + 34 + 67 + 72 + 98 + 40 = 987.
Percent of Total number of vacationers who enjoys the water parks  = 987 ÷2000 ×100
= 49.35%

Question 13.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Thirty percent of all new wooden benches have a patch of chipped paint. Use technology to simulate 100 random samples of 10 wooden benches. How closely do the samples estimate the percent of all wooden benches with a patch of chipped paint?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 11
Answer:
The samples estimate the percent of all wooden benches with a patch of chipped paint are completely differ because almost 79 % are having chipped paint on the wooden bench and 21 % does not have chipped paint on the wooden bench. Majority goes with yes.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-MODELING-REAL-LIFE-13
This means 79% of the students are having patch of chipped paint and 21% of the students are not having patch of chipped paint.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
You want to predict whether a proposal will be accepted by likely voters. You randomly sample 3 different groups of 100 likely voters. The results are shown. Do you expect the proposal to be accepted? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics 8.2 12
Answer:
No, I think proposal is not to be accepted because out of 300 people opposing people strength is more than supporting people the proposal.

Explanation:
Number of people in the each group = 100
Total number of people in the three groups = 3 × 100 = 300
Number of people who are supporting the proposal in three samples A, B and C
= 48 + 52 +47 = 147
Number of people who are opposing the proposal in three samples A, B and C
= 52 + 48 + 53 = 153
No, I think proposal is not to be accepted because out of 300 people opposing people strength is more than supporting people the proposal.

Question 15.
CRITICAL THINKING
Explain why public opinion polls use sample sizes of more than 1000 people instead of using a smaller sample size.
Answer:
Public opinion polls use sample sizes of more than 1000 people instead of using a smaller sample size because sampling more than 1000 people normally wont add much to the accuracy  given the extra time an money it would cost.

Explanation:
Opinion polls are usually designed to represent the opinions of a population by conducting a series of questions and then extrapolating generalities in ratio or within confidence intervals.
Public opinion polls use sample sizes of more than 1000 people instead of using a smaller sample size because sampling more than 1000 people normally wont add much to the accuracy  given the extra time an money it would cost.
For example, in a population of 5000, 10% would be 500. In a population of 200,000, 10% would be 20,000. This exceeds 1000, so in this case the maximum would be 1000. Even in a population of 200,000, sampling 1000 people will normally give a fairly accurate result.

Lesson 8.3 Comparing Populations

EXPLORATION 1

Comparing Two Data Distributions
Work with a partner.
a. Does each data display show? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 1
b. How can you describe the overlap of two data distributions using words? How can you describe the overlap numerically?
c. In which pair of data sets is the difference in the measures of center the most significant? Explain your reasoning.

Answer:
a)  Yes, the female students and male students data is overlapping as they are having same common sleeping hours in them from 8.5 to 10.5 hours and other data distribution gets overlapping from 59 to 63 inches.

b) The data distribution hours for sleeping for both female and male students is commonly same and in the heights both of them are completely different as they is no common height point in them as same. The female students and male students data is overlapping as they are having same common sleeping hours in them  from 8.5 to 10.5 hours. Here, the data distribution gets overlapping from 59 to 63 inches.

c) There is a lot of difference in the graph of age chart data distribution that of  the first and second data distribution because in the center of 4, there is a big difference of 25 in this set.

Explanation:
a) Overlap means to have something in common with. Female students sleeping hours starts from 5 to 10.5 hours, whereas male students sleeping hours starts from 6 to 10.5 hours. The female students and male students data is overlapping as they are having same common sleeping hours in them  from 8.5 to 10.5 hours.

b) In the first data distribution, Female students and male students maximum sleep for 4 hours. Female students sleeping hours are maximum from 5 to 9 hours and male students sleeping hours are maximum from 6 to 8.5 hours. In the second distribution, Female students height starts from 57 to 63 inches. Male students height starts from 59 to 65 inches. Here, the data distribution gets overlapping from 59 to 63 inches. Maximum height of male students is 62 inches whereas female students is 60 inches.

c) The data distribution in the center is more significant because it shows almost same difference. the center difference in data set 1 of  9.5 – 8.5 = 1hour  for female students and male students 9 – 7 = 2hours. And maximum height of the both female and male students and who attended the class more. In the chart, the center of difference  of exercises at  the center of 4, class of 10am has total 9+7+3+2+2+2= 25 and the 8pm class strength is zero, which is a big difference in this set.


Try It
Question 1.
Which data set is more likely to contain a value of 70?
Answer:
No data sets has more likely to contain a value of 70 in them.

Explanation:
About 25% in the data set A data values are between 80 to 130.
About 50%  in the data set B data values are between  80 to 100.

Question 2.
Which data set is more likely to contain a value that differs from the center by no more than 3?
Answer:
Data set B has more likely to contain a value that differs from the center by no more than 3.

Explanation:
Data set A center is 60.
Data set B center is 90.
Difference in the intervals from center of set A = 60 to 30 = 3
Difference in the intervals from center of set B = 90 to 80=1

Question 3.
WHAT IF?
Each value in the dot plot for Data set A increases by 30. How does this affect your answers? Explain.
Answer:
If each value in the dot plot for Data set A increases by 30 there is going to be a difference of 2 increased value in the mean value and MAD Value of both the Data Sets.

Explanation:
Data Set A                                                            Data Set B
Mean = 810 ÷ 15 = 54                                         Mean = 420 ÷ 15 = 28
MAD = 244 ÷ 15 = 16                                        MAD = 236 ÷ 15 = 16
Difference in Mean ÷ MAD = 26 ÷ 16 = 1.6
If 30 increased in Data Set A:
=> Mean = 810+30 ÷ 15 = 840 ÷ 15 = 56
=> MAD = 244 + 30 ÷ 15 = 274 ÷ 15 = 18.267


Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 4.
COMPARING POPULATIONS
The double dot plot shows two data sets. Compare the data sets using measures of center and variation. Then express the difference in the measures of center as a multiple of the measure of variation.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 2
Answer:
So, the difference in the means is about 1.25 times the MAD.

Explanation:
Total value of Data Set A = 1 +2+2+3+3+3+3+4+4+5 = 30
Mean of Data Set A = 30 ÷ 10 = 3
MAD of Data Set A = |∣−3∣ + |2−3∣ +|2−3∣ +|3−3∣ +|3−3∣ + |3−3∣ + |3−3∣ + |4−3∣ + |4−3∣ + |5−3∣ ÷ 10
= 2 + 1 + 1 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0+ 1 + 1 +2 ÷ 10
= 8 ÷ 10
= 0.8
Variance of Data Set A :
= (1 – 3 )^2 + (2 – 3 )^2 + (2 – 3)^2 + (3 – 3)^2 + (3 – 3)^2 + (3 – 3)^2 + (3 – 3)^2 + (4 – 3)^2 + (4 – 3)^2 +
(5 -3)^2  ÷10
= (-2)^2 + (-1)^2 + (-1)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (1)^2 + (1)^2 + (2)^2  ÷10
= 4 + 1 + 1 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 1 +1 + 4 ÷10
= 12 ÷10
= 1.2

Total value of Data Set B = 1+1+1+1+2+2+2+2+3+3+3+3 = 24
Mean of Data Set B = 24 ÷ 12 = 2
MAD of  Data Set B = |∣−2∣ + |1−2∣ +|1−2∣ +|1−2∣ +|2−2∣ + |2−2∣ + |2−2∣ + |2−2∣ + |3−2∣ + |3−2∣ +  |3−2∣ + |3−2∣ ÷ 12
= 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1
= 8
= 0.8
Variance of Data Set B :
(1 -2)^2 + (1 -2)^2 + (1 -2)^2 + (1 -2)^2 + (2 – 2)^2 + (2 – 2)^2 + (2 – 2)^2 + (2 – 2)^2 + (3 -2)^2 +
(3 -2)^2 + (3 -2)^2 + (3 -2)^2  ÷12
= (-1)^2 + (-1)^2 + (-1)^2 + (-1)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (1)^2 + (1)^2 + (1)^2 + (1)^2 ÷12
= 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 1 + 1 + 1 + 1 ÷ 12
= 8 ÷ 12
= 0.67
Difference in mean ÷ MAD = 3 – 2 ÷ 0.8 = 1 ÷ 0.8 = 1.25
So, the difference in the means is about 1.25 times the MAD.

Question 5.
WHICH ONE DOESN’T BELONG?
You want to compare two populations represented by skewed distributions. Which measure not does belong with the other three? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 3
Answer:
IQR of first data set does not belong to the other three measurements because its the difference between the first and third quartiles, whereas median is related to the center value of the data and MAD of a data set is the average distance between each data value and the mean.

Explanation:
Data of first set = 1 2 4
Median of first data =  2
Data of second set = 3
Median of second data = 3
MAD of second data set = 0.8
IQR of first data set = 4 – 1 = 3


Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 6.
The double box-and-whisker plot represents the weights of cats at two shelters. Are the cats significantly heavier at one shelter than at the other? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 4
Answer:
The cats are  not significantly heavier at one shelter than at the other.

Explanation:
Data of cats weights in shelter A =  4 5 7 9 12 pounds
Data of cats weights in shelter B =  6  7 8 11 12 pounds
Median of shelter A cats = 7                                                      Median of shelter B cats = 8
IQR of shelter A cats = 9 – 5 = 4                                                IQR of shelter B cats =11 – 7 = 4
Because the variables are same, you can describe the vision overlap by the expression of  the difference in the medians as a multiple of the IQR .
Difference in Median ÷ IQR = 8 – 7 ÷ 4 = 1 ÷ 4 = 0.25
Because the quotient is less than 2, the difference in the medians is not significant.
The cats are  not significantly heavier at one shelter than at the other.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Tornadoes in Region A travel significantly farther than tornadoes in Region B. The tornadoes in Region A travel a median of 10 miles. Create a double box-and-whisker plot that can represent the distances traveled by the tornadoes in the two regions.
Answer:
Double box-and-whisker plot that can represent the distances traveled by the tornadoes in the two regions.

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-8.3-DIG DEEPER7

Explanation:
Data of Tornadoes in Region A = 4 6 10 14 20
Median of Tornadoes in Region A = 10 miles
Data of Tornadoes in Region B = 8 10 12 18 20
Median of Tornadoes in Region B =12

Comparing Populations Homework & Practice 8.3

Review & Refresh

Twenty percent of all seventh graders have watched a horse race. Explain whether the sample closely estimates the percentage of seventh graders who have watched a horse race.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 5
Question 1.
In a sample of 15 seventh graders, 4 have watched a horse race.
Answer:
No, the sample  estimation of  the percentage of 15 seventh graders  who have watched a horse race is not valid.

Explanation:
Number of seventh graders = 15
Twenty percent of all seventh graders have watched a horse race.
=> 20 % of the number of seventh graders = 20 % × 15 = 3
Hence, 3 only watched the horse race not 4.

Question 2.
In a sample of 10 seventh graders, 6 have watched a horse race.
Answer:
No, the sample  estimation of  the percentage of 10 seventh graders  who have watched a horse race is not valid.

Explanation:
Number of seventh graders = 10
Twenty percent of all seventh graders have watched a horse race.
=> 20 % of the number of seventh graders = 20 % × 10 = 2
Hence, 2 only watched the horse race not 6.

 

Find the unit rate.
Question 3.
60 kilometers in 2 hours
Answer:
60 kilometers in 2 hours = 30 kilometer per hour.

Explanation:
Time taken to cover 60 kilometers = 2 hours
Time taken to cover 1 kilometer = 60kilometers ÷ 2 hours
= 30 kilometer per hour

Question 4.
$11.40 for 5 cans
Answer:
Cost for 1 can = $2.28.

Explanation:
Cost for 5 cans = $11.40
Cost for 1 can = $11.40 ÷ 5
= $2.28

 

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

COMPARING TWO DATA DISTRIBUTIONS The double box-and-whisker plot represents the values in two data sets. (See Exploration 1, p. 337.)
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 6
Question 5.
Does the data display show overlap? Explain.
Answer:18.2
Yes, the data display show overlap.

Explanation:
Data of set A = 1 3 5 7 9
Mean  of set A = 1 + 3 +  5 + 7 + 9  ÷ 5
= 25 ÷ 5 = 5
MAD of set A = |∣−5∣ + |3−5∣ +|5−5∣ +|7−5∣ + |9−5∣  ÷ 5
= 4 + 2 + 0 + 2 + 4 = 20 ÷ 5
= 20 ÷ 5 =4

Data of set B = 10 11 14 15 16
Mean  of set B = 8.2 + 6.7 + 4.2 + 3.2 + 2.2 ÷ 5
=  24.5 ÷ 5 = 4.9
MAD of set B = |∣0−18.2∣ + |11.5−18.2∣ +|14−18.2∣ +|15−18.2∣ + |16−18.2∣  ÷ 5
= 8.2 + 6.7 + 4.2 + 3.2 + 2.2 ÷ 5
= 24.5 ÷ 5 = 4.9
Differences in means ÷ MAD = 18.2 – 4.9 ÷ 5
= 13.3 ÷ 5 = 2.66
So, the differences in means is about  2.66 times the MAD.

Question 6.
Is there a significant difference in the measures of center for the pair of data sets? Explain.
Answer:
No, there is no significant difference in the measures of center for the pair of data sets because the quotient is less than 2, the difference in the medians is not significant.

Explanation:
Data of set A = 1 3 5 7 9                                     Data of set B = 10 11 14 15 16
Median of set A = 5                                            Median of set B = 14
IQR of set A = 7 – 3 = 4                                      IQR of set B = 15 – 11.5 = 3.5
Differences in Median ÷ IQR of set A = 5 – 4 ÷ 4 = 1 ÷ 4 =  0.25
Differences in Median ÷ IQR of set B = 5 – 4 ÷ 3.5 = 0.286

 

COMPARING POPULATIONS Two data sets contain an equal number of values. The double box-and-whisker plot represents the values in the data sets.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 7
Question 7.
Compare the data sets using measures of center and variation.
Answer:
Comparison:
Variation of set A  and Variation of set B
=> 0.5432  is greater than 0.1576.

Explanation:
Data of set A = 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.5
Mean of set A = 0.8 + 1.0 + 1.1 + 1.2 + 1.5 ÷ 5 = 5.6 ÷ 5 = 1.12
Variation of set A = (0.8 -1.12)^2 + (1.0-1.12)^2 + (1.1 -1.12)^2 + (1.2 – 1.12)^2 + (1.5 – 1.12)^2 ÷ 5
= (-0.32)^2 + (-0.12)^2  + (-0.02)^2  + (0.08)^2  + (0.38)^2  ÷ 5
= 0.1024 + 0.0144 + 0.004 + 0.0064 + 0.1444 ÷ 5
= 0.2716 ÷ 5
= 0.5432

Data of set B = 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.9 1.4
Mean of set B = 0.3 + 0.4 + 0.6 + 0.9 + 1.4 ÷ 5 = 3.6 ÷ 5 = 0.72
Variation of set B = (0.3 -0.72)^2 + (0.4 – 0.72)^2 + (0.6 -0.72)^2 + (0.9 – 0.72)^2 + (1.4 – 0.72)^2 ÷ 5
= (-0.42)^2 + (-0.32)^2  + (-0.12)^2  + (0.18)^2  + (0.68)^2  ÷ 5
= 0.1764 + 0.1024 + 0.0144 + 0.0324 + 0.4624 ÷ 5
= 0.788  ÷ 5
= 0.1576

Comparison:
Variation of set A  and Variation of set B
=> 0.5432  is greater than 0.1576.

Question 8.
Which data set is more likely to contain a value of 1.1?
Answer:
Data of set A is more likely to contain a value of 1.1.

Explanation:
Data of set A = 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.5                                  Data of set B = 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.9 1.4
Median of set A = 1.1                                                     Median of set B = 0.6

Question 9.
Which data set is more likely to contain a value that differs from the center by 0.3?
Answer:
No, data set is more likely to contain a value that differs from the center by 0.3.

Explanation:
Data of set A = 0.8 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.5                                      Data of set B = 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.9 1.4
Median of set A = 1.1                                                         Median of set B = 0.6

Question 10.
DESCRIBING VISUAL OVERLAP
The double dot plot shows the values in two data sets. Express the difference in the measures of center as a multiple of the measure of variation.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 8
Answer:
Because the quotient is less than 2, the difference in the median is not significant of data set A.
Because the quotient is more than 2, the difference in the median is significant of data set B.

Explanation:
Data of set A = 30 35 40 45 50 55                                            Data of set B = 10 15 20 25 30
Median of set A = 40 +45 ÷ 2 = 85 ÷ 2 = 42.5                        Median of set B = 20
IQR of set A = 50 – 35 = 15                                                      IQR of set B = 30 – 10 = 20
Differences in medians ÷ IQR of set A = 42.5 – 20 ÷ 15 = 22.5 ÷ 15 = 1.5
Because the quotient is less than 2, the difference in the median is not significant of data set A.
Differences in medians ÷ IQR of set B = 42.5 – 20 ÷ 10 = 22.5 ÷ 10 = 2.25
Because the quotient is more than 2, the difference in the median is significant of data set B.

Question 11.
The distributions of attendance at basketball games and volleyball games at your school are symmetric. Your friend makes a conclusion based on the calculations shown below. Is your friend correct? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 9
Answer:
No, my friend is not correct.

Explanation:
Volleyball Game attendance:
Mean = 80
MAD = 20
Basketball Game attendance:
Mean = 160
MAD = 20
The difference in means is 4 times the MAD, so attendance at basketball games is significantly greater than the attendance at volleyball games. Since the MAD is “large”, it implies that the mean of 160 is not a reliable indicator of the other values within the data set.

Question 12.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The double box-and-whisker plot represents the goals scored per game by two hockey teams during a 20-game season. Is the number of goals scored per game significantly greater for one team than the other? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 10
Answer:
Yes, the number of goals scored per game significantly greater for one team than the other.

Explanation:
Data of Team A = 0 2 3 4 6                                              Data of Team B = 0 6 7 8 10
Median of data Team A = 3                                             Median of data Team B = 7
IQR of Team A =  4 – 2 = 2                                               IQR of Team B = 8 – 6 = 2
Differences in medians ÷ IQR = 7 – 3 ÷ 2 = 4  ÷ 2 = 2
So, the quotient is equal to 2 the difference in the medians is significant.

Question 13.
MODELING REAL LIFE
The dot plots show the test scores for two classes taught by the same teacher. Are the test scores significantly greater for one class than the other? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 11
Answer:
No, the test scores  are not significantly greater for one class than the other.

Explanation:
Data of Class A = 70 75 80 85 90 95 100                              Data of Class B = 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
Median of data Class A = 85                                                 Median of data Class B = 85
IQR of Class A =  95 – 85 = 10                                               IQR of Class B = 80 – 70 = 10
Both the variables and the center are similar. So, it is not significant.

Question 14.
PROBLEM SOLVING
A scientist experiments with mold colonies of equal area. She adds a treatment to half of the colonies. After a week, she measures the area of each colony. If the areas are significantly different, the scientist will repeat the experiment. The results are shown. Should the scientist repeat the experiment? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.3 12
Answer:
Yes,  the scientist should repeat the experiment because areas are significantly different from one to other.

Explanation:
Order of Data of untreated Mold = 2 3 4 5 6 7                               Order of Data of treated Mold = 0 1 2 3 6
Median of untreated Mold = 4 + 5 ÷ 2 = 9 ÷ 2 = 4.5                    Median of treated Mold = 2
IQR of untreated Mold = 4 – 2 = 2                                                  IQR of treated Mold = 2 – 0 = 2
Because the variables are same, you can describe the overlap in areas by expressing the difference in the medians as a multiple of the IQR.
Difference in Medians ÷ IQR = 4.5 – 2 ÷ 2
= 2.5 ÷ 2 = 1.25
Because the quotient is  less than 2, the differences in the medians is not significant.
The areas are not significantly greater than one and other colony.

Lesson 8.4 Using Random Samples to Compare Populations

EXPLORATION 1

Using Random Samples
Work with a partner. You want to compare the numbers of hours spent on homework each week by male and female students in your state. You take a random sample of 15 male students and 15 female students throughout the state.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 1
a. Compare the data in each sample.
b. Are the samples likely to be representative of all male and female students in your state? Explain.
c. You take 100 random samples of 15 male students in your state and 100 random samples of 15 female students in your state and record the median of each sample. The double box-and-whisker plot shows the distributions of the sample medians. Compare the distributions in the double box-and-whisker plot with the distributions of the data in the tables.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 2
d. What can you conclude from the double box-and-whisker plot? Explain. d. How can you use random samples to make accurate comparisons of two populations?
Answer:
a) According to the given data in the table, the center of the Female students is greater than the center of the Male students.

b) Yes, the samples likely to be representative of all male and female students in your state because they are randomly selected students allover the state.

c) The data given in the table and the data given in the double box-and-whisker plot are both completely different and there is a lot of variation in the values. The double box-and-whisker plot has greater values than in the table.

d) According to the data in double box-and-whisker plot, the medians of male students is less than female students. So, the hours of male students spent are less than female students.

Explanation:
a)Data of Male students = 1.5  3  0  2.5  1  8  2.5  1  3  0  6.5  1  5  0  5
Arrange the data in order : 0  1  1.5  2.5  3  5  6.5  8
Median of Male students =  2.5 + 3 ÷ 2 = 5.5 ÷ 2 = 2.75

Data of Female students = 4   0  3  1  1  5  1  3  5.5  10  2  0  6  3.5  2
Arrange the data in order : 0  1  2  3  3.5  4  5.5  6
Median of Female students = 3 + 3.5 ÷ 2 = 6.5 ÷  2 = 3.25

b) Data of Male students = 1.5  3  0  2.5  1  8  2.5  1  3  0  6.5  1  5  0  5
Data of Female students = 4   0  3  1  1  5  1  3  5.5  10  2  0  6  3.5  2
Yes, the samples likely to be representative of all male and female students in your state because they are randomly selected students allover the state.

c)                                                                         Data in the Table:
Data of Male students = 1.5  3  0  2.5  1  8  2.5  1  3  0  6.5  1  5  0  5
Median of Male students =  2.5 + 3 ÷ 2 = 5.5 ÷ 2 = 2.75
Mean of Male students = 1.5 + 3 + 0 + 2.5 + 1 + 8 + 2.5 + 1 + 3 + 0 + 6.5 + 1 + 5 + 0 + 5 ÷ 15
= 40  ÷ 15
=  2.67
Data of Female students = 4   0  3  1  1  5  1  3  5.5  10  2  0  6  3.5  2
Median of Female students = 3 + 3.5 ÷ 2 = 6.5 ÷  2 = 3.25
Mean of Female students = 4  + 0  +  3 + 1 + 1 + 5  + 1 + 3 + 5.5 + 10 + 2 + 0 + 6 + 3.5 + 2 ÷ 15
= 47  ÷ 15
= 3.13
Data in the double box-and-whisker plot:
Data of Male students = 1.5  2.5  3  3.5   6                          Data of Female students = 2  3.5  4  5  7
Mean of Male students = 1.5 + 2.5 + 3 + 3.5 + 6 ÷ 5        Mean of Female students = 2 + 3.5 + 4 + 5 + 7 ÷ 5
=  16.5 ÷ 5 = 3.3                                                                  = 21.5 ÷ 5 = 4.3

d)                                                                  Data in the double box-and-whisker plot:
Data of Male students = 1.5  2.5  3  3.5   6                          Data of Female students = 2  3.5  4  5  7
Median of Male students = 3                                              Median of Female students = 4

 

Try It

Question 1.
The double dot plot shows the weekly reading habits of a random sample of 10 students in each of two schools. Compare the samples using measures of center and variation. Can you determine which school’s students read less? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 3
Answer:
According to the data of distribution, school A students are reading less compared to that of school B students.

Explanation:
Data of school A = 0  0  1  2  2  3  3  4  5  5
Mean of school A = 0 + 0 + 1 + 2 + 2 +3 + 3 + 4 + 5 + 5 ÷ 10
= 25 ÷ 10 = 2.5
Variation of school A = (0-2.5)^2 + (0-2.5)^2 + (1-2.5)^2 + (2-2.5)^2 + (2-2.5)^2 + (3-2.5)^2 + (3-2.5)^2 + (4-2.5)^2 + (5-2.5)^2 + (5-2.5)^2 ÷ 10
= (-2.5)^2 + (-2.5)^2  + (-1.5)^2 + (-0.5)^2 + (-0.5)^2 + (0.5)^2 + (0.5)^2  + (-1.5)^2  + (2.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 ÷ 10
=  6.25 + 6.25 + 2.25 + 0.25 + 0.25 +  0.25 +  0.25 + 2.25 + 6.25 + 6.25 ÷ 10
= 30.5 ÷ 10
= 3.05

Data of school B = 0  2  3  3  3   4  4  4 5  7
Mean of school B = 0 + 2 + 3 + 3 + 3 + 4 + 4 + 4+ 5 +7 ÷ 10
= 60 ÷ 10 = 6
Variation of school A = (0-6)^2 + (2-6)^2 + (3-6)^2 + (3-6)^2 + (3-6)^2 + (4-6)^2 + (4-6)^2  + (4-6)^2  + (5-6)^2 + (7-6)^2 ÷ 10
= (-6)^2 + (-4)^2 + (-3)^2 + (-3)^2 + (-3)^2 + (-2)^2 + (-2)^2 + (-2)^2 + (-1)^2 + (1)^2 ÷ 10
= 36 + 16 + 9 + 9+ 9 + 4 + 4 + 4 + 1 + 1÷ 10
= 93 ÷ 10
= 9.3

Question 2.
WHAT IF?
Each value in the box-and-whisker plot of the sample medians for Bag A decreases by2. Does this change your answer?
Answer:
Yes, this changes the answer because which makes the medians of Bag A and Bag B same.

Explanation:
Data of bag A = 4  5  5.5  6  6.5                                                        Data of bag B = 2.5  3  3.5  4  5
Median of bag A = 5.5                                                                      Median of bag B = 3.5
IQR of bag A = 6 – 5 = 1                                                                    IQR of bag B = 4 – 3 = 1
If the sample medians for Bag A decreases by 2:
Median of bag A = 5.5 – 2 = 3.5


Self-Assessment for Concepts & Skills

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 3.
COMPARING RANDOM SAMPLES
Two boxes each contain 600 numbered tiles. The double dot plot shows a random sample of 8 numbers from each box. Compare the samples using measures of center and variation. Can you determine which box contains tiles with greater numbers? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 4
Answer:
Box A contains greater numbers more than Box B because its has greater median and also in variation.

Explanation:
Data of Box A = 3  4  5  5  6  6  7  8
Order of Box A =3 4 5 6 7 8
Median of Box A = 5 + 6 ÷ 2 = 11 ÷ 2 =5.5
Mean of Box A = 3 + 4 + 5 + 5 + 6 + 6 + 7 + 8 ÷ 8
= 44 ÷ 8
= 5.5
Variation of Box A = (3 -5.5)^2 + (4-5.5)^2 + (5-5.5)^2 + (5-5.5)^2 + (6-5.5)^2 + (6-5.5)^2 + (7-5.5)^2 + (8-5.5)^2 ÷ 8
=  (-2.5)^2 + (-1.5)^2 + (-0.5)^2 + (-0.5)^2 + (0.5)^2 + (1.5)^2 + (1.5)^2 + (2.5)^2   ÷ 8
=  6.25 + 2.25 + 0.25 + 0.25 + 0.25 + 2.25 + 2.25 + 6.25 ÷ 8
= 20 ÷ 8
= 2.5

Data of Box B = 0  0  0 1  2  3  3  3
Order of Box B = 0 1 2 3
Median of Box B =  1 +2 ÷ 2 = 3 ÷ 2 =1.5
Mean of Box B = 0 + 0 + 0 + 1 + 2 + 3 + 3 + 3 ÷ 8
= 12 ÷ 8
= 1.5
Variation of Box B = (0-1.5)^2 + (0-1.5)^2 + (0-1.5)^2 + (1-1.5)^2 + (2-1.5)^2 + (3-1.5)^2 + (3-1.5)^2 + (3-1.5)^2  ÷ 8
=  (-1.5)^2 + (-1.5)^2 + (-1.5)^2 + (-0.5)^2 + (0.5)^2 + (1.5)^2 + (1.5)^2 + (1.5)^2  ÷ 8
=  2.25 + 2.25 +2.25 + 0.25 +0.25 + 2.25  + 2.25 + 2.25  ÷ 8
=  14 ÷ 8
= 1.75

Question 4.
USING MULTIPLE RANDOM SAMPLES
Two crates each contain 750 objects. The double box-and-whisker plot shows the median weights of 50 random samples of 10 objects from each crate. Can you determine which crate weighs more? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 5
Answer:
Crate B weighs more than Crate A.

Explanation:
Data of crate A = 6   6.5   7.5   9   9.5
Median of crate A = 7.5
Mean of crate A = 6 + 6.5 + 7.5 + 9 + 9.5 ÷ 5 = 38.5 ÷5 = 7.7
IQR = 9 – 6.5 = 2.5
Data of crate B =  9   10   11   12.5   13.5
Median of crate B = 11
IQR = 12.5 – 10 = 2.5
Mean of crate B = 9 + 10  + 11  + 12.5  + 13.5 ÷ 5 = 56 ÷ 5 = 11.2
The variation in the center of crate B is greater than the measure of crate A. The variation of crate A is similar to the variation of crate B.


Self-Assessment for Problem Solving

Solve each exercise. Then rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.

Question 5.
The double box-and-whisker plot represents the medians of 100 random samples of 20 battery lives for two cell phone brands. Compare the battery lives of the two brands.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 6
Answer:
The variation in the center of Brand B batteries is greater than the measure of Brand A batteries and the variation of Brand A batteries is similar to the variation of Brand B batteries.

Explanation:
Data of Brand A = 16.5  20  26  28   30                                 Data of Brand B = 24  26  30  34  36
Median of Brand A = 26                                                        Median of Brand B =  30
IQR of Brand A = 28 – 20 = 8                                                IQR of Brand B = 34 – 28 = 6

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
The double box-and-whisker plot represents the medians of 50 random samples of 10 wait times at two patient care facilities. Which facility should you choose? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 7
Answer:
Facility B should be chosen than the Facility A.

Explanation:
Data of Facility A =  10  15  20  25  30                      Data of Facility B =  5   15   20   35  45
Median of Facility A = 20                                           Median of Facility B = 20
IQR of Facility A = 25 – 15 = 10                                  IQR of Facility B = 35 – 15 = 20
The variation in the center of  Facility A  is similar to  the measure of Facility B and the variation of Facility B  is greater than  the variation of Facility A .

Using Random Samples to Compare Populations Homework & Practice 8.4

Review & Refresh

The double dot plot shows the values in two data sets.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 8
Question 1.
Compare the data sets using measures of center and variation.
Answer:
The measures of center of set B is greater and the variation of it greater than that of  the variation of set A.

Explanation:
Data of Set A = 10 10 20 20 20 30 30 30  30 40 40 50          Data of set B = 30 40 40 40 50 50 50 50 60 60 70 70
Order: 10 20 30 40 50                                                              Order: 30 40 50 60 70
Median of set A = 30                                                              Median of set B = 50
Mean of set A =  10+10 + 20 + 20 + 20 + 30 + 30 + 30 + 30 + 40 + 40 + 50  ÷ 12
=  330  ÷ 12
= 27.5
Variation of set A = (10 -27.5)^2 + (10-27.5)^2 + (20-27.5)^2 + (20-27.5)^2 + (20-27.5)^2 + (30-27.5)^2 + (30-27.5)^2 + (30-27.5)^2 + (30-27.5)^2 + (40-27.5)^2 + (40-27.5)^2 + (50-27.5)^2  ÷ 12
= (-17.5)^2 + (-17.5)^2 + (-7.5)^2 + (-7.5)^2 + (-7.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (12.5)^2 + (12.5)^2 + (22.5)^2  ÷ 12
= 306. 25 + 306.25 + 56.25  + 56.25 + 56.25 + 6.25 + 6.25 +6.25 + 6.25 + 156.25 + 156.25 + 506.25 ÷ 12
=  1625  ÷ 12
= 135.42

Mean of set B= 30 + 40 + 40 + 40 + 50 + 50 + 50 + 50 + 60 + 60 + 70 + 70 ÷ 12
=  610  ÷ 12
= 50.83
Variation of set B = (30-50.83)^2 + (40-50.83)^2 + (40-50.83)^2 + (40-50.83)^2 + (50-50.83)^2 + (50-50.83)^2 + (50-50.83)^2 + (50-50.83)^2 + (60-50.83)^2 + (60-50.83)^2 + (70-50.83)^2 + (70-50.83)^2 ÷ 12
= (-20.83)^2 + (-10.83)^2 + (-10.83)^2 + (-10.83)^2 + (-0.83)^2 + (-0.83)^2 + (-0.83)^2 + (-0.83)^2 + (10.83)^2 + (10.83)^2 + (20.83)^2 + (20.83)^2  ÷ 12
= 433.89 +  117.29 + 117.29 + 117.29 + 0.6889  +  0.6889 + 0.6889 + 0.6889 + 117.29 + 117.29 +  433.89 + 433.89 ÷ 12
= 1890.8756 ÷ 12
= 157.57

Question 2.
Are the values of one data set significantly greater than the values of the other data set? Explain.
Answer:
Yes, the variation of center of set B is greater than the measure of set A and the variation of set B is greater than the variation of set A.

Explanation:
Median of set A = 30                                                              Median of set B = 50
Variation of set A = 135.42                                                    Variation of set B = 157.57

 

Solve the equation. Check your solution.
Question 3.
5b – 3 = 22
Answer:
b= 5.

Explanation:
5b – 3 = 22
5b =  22 + 3
5b = 25
b = 25/5
b= 5.

Check: substitute b =  5 in 5b – 3 = 22.
LHS => 5b – 3 = 22.
=> (5 x 5) -3 = 22
=> 25 – 3 = 22 = RHS

Question 4.
1.5d  + + 3 = – 4.5
Answer:
d = -5

Explanation:
1.5d  + 3 = – 4.5
=>1.5d = -4.5 -3
=> 1.5d = -7.5
=> d = -7.5 ÷ 1.5
=> d = – 5
Checking:
Substitute d = – 5 in Equation:
LHS:    1.5d  + 3
=> (1.5 × -5) + 3
=> -7.5 + 3
=> -4.5 = RHS

Question 5.
4 = 9z – 2
Answer:
z = 0.67

Explanation:
4 = 9z – 2
=> 4 + 2 = 9z
=> 6 = 9z
=>6 ÷ 9 = z
=> 0.67 = z
Checking:
Substitute z = 0.67 in Equation:
RHS:  9z – 2
=> (9 × 0.67) – 2
=> 6 – 2
= 4 = LHS

Concepts, Skills, & Problem Solving

USING RANDOM SAMPLES You want to compare the numbers of hours spent on recreation each week by teachers and non-teachers in your state. You take100 random samples of 15 teachers and 100 random samples of 15 non-teachers throughout the state and record the median value of each sample. The double box-and-whisker plot shows the distributions of sample medians. (See Exploration 1, p. 343.)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 9

Question 6.
Are the samples likely to be representative of all teachers and non-teachers in your state?

Answer:
Yes, the samples are likely to be representative of all teachers and non-teachers in your state because it has been given in the question.

Question 7.
What can you conclude from the double box-and-whisker plot? Explain.

Answer:
The number of hours spent by Non-teachers is more than the teachers.

Explanation:
Median of Non-Teachers = 7
Median of Teachers = 5

Question 8.
COMPARING RANDOM SAMPLES
The double dot plot shows the weekly running habits of athletes at two colleges. Compare the samples using measures of center and variation. Can you determine which college’s athletes spend more time running? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 10
Answer:
Data of College B has the  greater measure of center and in the measure of variation that of data of college B.
College B athletes spend more time running than college A.

Explanation:
Data of College A = 2  2  4  4  5  5  5  5  6  6  8  8
Order : 2 4 5 6 8
Median of Data A =  5
Variation of Data A = (2-5)^2 + (2-5)^2 + (4-5)^2 + (4-5)^2 + (5-5)^2 + (5-5)^2 + (5-5)^2 + (5-5)^2 + (6-5)^2 + (6-5)^2 + (8-5)^2 + (8-5)^2 ÷  12
= (-3)^2 + (-3)^2 + (-1)^2 + (-1)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (1)^2 + (1)^2 + (3)^2 + (3)^2 ÷  12
= 9 + 9 + 1 + 1 + 0+ 0 + 0 + 0  + 1 + 1 + 9 + 9 ÷ 12
= 40 ÷ 12
= 3.33

Data of College B = 3  4  5  5  5  6  6  7  7  7  8  9
Order : 3 4 5 6  7 8
Median of Data A =  5 + 6 ÷ 2 = 11 ÷ 2 = 5.5
Variation of Data A = (3-5.5)^2 + (4-5.5)^2 + (5-5.5)^2 + (5-5.5)^2 + (5-5.5)^2 + (6-5.5)^2 + (6-5.5)^2 + (7-5.5)^2 + (7-5.5)^2 + (7-5.5)^2 + (8-5.5)^2 + (9-5.5)^2  ÷  12
= (-2.5)^2 + (-1.5)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (0)^2 + (1.5)^2 + (1.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (2.5)^2 + (3.5)^2 + (4.5)^2 ÷  12
= 6.25 + 2.25 + 0 + 0 + 0 + 2.25 + 2.25 + 6.25 + 6.25 + 6.25 + 12.25 + 20.25 ÷ 12
=  64.25  ÷ 12
= 5.35

Question 9.
USING MULTIPLE RANDOM SAMPLES
Two lakes each contain about 2000 fish. The double box-and-whisker plot shows the medians of 50 random samples of 14 fish lengths from each lake. Can you determine which lake contains longer fish? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 11

Answer:
Lake A is the Lake contains longer fish because the measure in the variation is comparatively greater than the measure of variation of Lake B.

Explanation:
Data of Lake A = 6  7  8  9  10                    Data of Lake B =  3  4  5  6  7
Median of Lake A = 8                                 Median of Lake B = 5
IQR of Lake A = 9 – 7 = 2                          IQR of Lake B = 6 – 4 = 2

Question 10.
MODELING REAL LIFE
Two laboratories each produce 800 chemicals. A chemist takes 10 samples of 15 chemicals from each lab, and records the number that pass an inspection. Are the samples likely to be representative of all the chemicals for each lab? If so, which lab has more chemicals that will pass the inspection? Justify your answer.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 12

Answer:
Yes, the samples are likely to be representative of all the chemicals for each lab.
Research Lab B is having the more chemicals that will pass the inspection.

Explanation:
Data of Research Lab A = 14 14 13 15 1515 15 13 14 12
Order : 12  13  14  15
Median of Research Lab A =13 +14 ÷ 2=27 ÷ 2 = 3.5
Mean of Research Lab A = 14 +14 +13+ 15 +15 +15 + 15 + 13 + 14 + 12 ÷ 10
=  140 ÷ 10
=    14

Data of Research Lab B = 12 9 10 14 12 11 14 11 11 15
Order : 9  10  11  12  14  15
Median of Research Lab B = 11+12 ÷ 2 = 23 ÷ 2 = 11.5
Mean of Research Lab B = 12  + 9 + 10 +14 + 12 +11 + 14 + 11 + 11 + 15 ÷ 10
= 119 ÷ 10
=  11.9
So, the variation of Research Lab A is having greater values and the measure of the center  Research Lab B is  greater than the center of the Research Lab A.

Question 11.
MODELING REAL LIFE
A farmer grows two types of corn seedlings. There are 1000 seedlings of each type. The double box-and-whisker plot represents the median growths of 50 random samples of 7 corn seedlings of each type. Compare the growths of each type of corn seedling. Justify your result.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 13
Answer:
The growth of Type B type of corn seedling is more that of growth of Type B of corn seedling.

Explanation:
Data of Type A = 1.5  3  3.5  4  5.5                                                    Data of Type B = 2.5  5  6.5  7  9
Median of Type A = 3.5                                                                     Median of  Type B = 6.5
IQR of Type A = 4 – 3 = 1                                                                   IQR of Type B = 7 – 5 = 2
So, the Variation of Type B is having greater than the measure of Variation of Type A . The measure of the center  of Type B is  greater than the center of the Type A.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
You want to compare the number of words per sentence in a sports magazine to the number of words per sentence in a political magazine.
a. The data represent random samples of the number of words in 10 sentences from each magazine. Compare the samples using measures of center and variation. Can you use the data to make a valid comparison about the magazines? Explain.
Sports magazine: 9, 21, 15, 14, 25, 26, 9, 19, 22, 30
Political magazine: 31, 22, 17, 5, 23, 15, 10, 20, 20, 17
b. The double box-and-whisker plot represents the means of 200 random samples of 20 sentences from each magazine. Compare the variability of the sample means to the variability of the sample numbers of words in part(a).
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics 8.4 14
c. Make a conclusion about the numbers of words per sentence in each magazine.

Answer:
a) Variation of Sports magazine is having greater measure in variation and Median of  Sports magazine  is having greater value of center.

b) The variability of the sample is similar  to the variability of the sample numbers of words in part(a).

c) Number of words per sentence in political magazine are more than the number of words per sentence in  sports magazine.

Explanation:
a)
Data of Sports magazine =  9, 21, 15, 14, 25, 26, 9, 19, 22, 30
Order : 9 14 15 19  21 22 25  26 30
Median of  Sports magazine = 21
Mean of Sports magazine = 9 + 21 + 15 + 14 + 25 + 26 + 9 + 19 + 22 + 30 ÷ 10 = 190 ÷ 10 = 19
Variation of Sports magazine = (9-19)^2 + (21-19)^2 + (15-19)^2 + (14-19)^2 + (25-19)^2 + (26-19)^2 + (9-19)^2 + (19-19)^2 + (22-19)^2 + (30-19)^2  ÷ 10
= (-10)^2 + (2)^2 + (-4)^2 + (-5)^2 + (6)^2 + (7)^2 + (-10)^2 + (0)^2 + (3)^2 + (11)^2  ÷ 10
= 100 + 4 + 16 + 25 + 36 + 49 + 100 + 0 + 9 +121 ÷ 10
= 460 ÷ 10
= 46
Data of Political magazine = 31, 22, 17, 5, 23, 15, 10, 20, 20, 17
Order : 5  10 15  17  20  22  23  31
Median of Political magazine = 17 + 20 ÷ 2 = 37 ÷ 2 = 13.5
Mean of Political magazine = 31+ 22 +17 + 5 +23 + 15 +10 + 20 + 20 + 17 ÷ 10
= 180÷ 10
= 18
Variation of Sports magazine = (31-18)^2 + (22-18)^2 + (17-18)^2 + (5-18)^2 + (23-18)^2 + (15-18)^2 + (10-18)^2 + (20-18)^2 + (20-18)^2 + (17-18)^2  ÷ 10
= (13)^2 + (4)^2 + (-1)^2 + (-13)^2 + (5)^2 + (-3)^2 + (-8)^2 + (2)^2 + (2)^2 + (-1)^2  ÷ 10
= 169 + 16 + 1 + 169 + 25 + 9 + 64 + 4 + 4 + 1    ÷ 10
= 462 ÷ 10
= 46.2

b)
Data of Sports magazine = 16  19  20  21 23                  Data of Political magazine = 18  22  23  24  26
Median of Sports magazine = 20                                    Median of Political magazine = 23
IQR of Sports magazine = 21 – 9 = 2                               IQR of Political magazine = 24 -22 = 2
Mean of Sports magazine = 16 + 19 + 20 + 21 + 23  ÷ 5
= 99 ÷ 5  = 19.8
Mean of Political magazine = 18 + 22 + 23 + 24 + 26 ÷ 5
= 113 ÷ 5 = 22.6

c)
Data of Sports magazine = 16  19  20  21 23
Maximum used words in Political magazine = 16 to 23
=> 23 – 16 = 7
Data of Political magazine = 18  22  23  24  26
Maximum used words in Political magazine = 18 to 26.
=> 26 – 18 = 8

Question 13.
PROJECT
You want to compare the average amounts of time students in sixth, seventh, and eighth grade spend on homework each week.
a. Design an experiment involving random sampling that can help you make a comparison.
b. Perform the experiment. Can you make a conclusion about which grade spends the most time on homework? Explain your reasoning.
Answer:
a)Number of hours :
Total number of students of sixth spent = 26 + 33 +30 = 89
Total number of students of seventh spent = 32  + 46 + 40 = 118
Total number of students of Eighth spent = 42 +21 +25 = 88

b) Number of students who spent most time on homework  are the seventh grades students.

Explanation:
a) In a school, randomly chosen students are asked  about amounts of time students in sixth, seventh, and eighth grade spend on homework each week. The school has 1000 students.  Randomly 100 students are asked and three different sampling is taken.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-PROJECT-13

b) Average of students spent on homework of sixth grades = 26 + 33 +30 ÷ 3 = 89 ÷ 3= 29.67
Average of students spent on homework of seventh grades = 32  + 46 + 40 ÷ 3 = 118 ÷ 3 = 39.33
Average of students spent on homework of eighth grades = 42 +21 +25 ÷ 3 = 88 ÷ 3 = 29.33

Statistics Connecting Concepts

Using the Problem-Solving Plan

Question 1.
In a city, 1500 randomly chosen residents are asked how many sporting events they attend each month. The city has 80,000 residents. Estimate the number of residents in the city who attend at least one sporting event each month.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cc 1
Understand the problem.
You are given the numbers of sporting events attended each month by a sample of 1500 residents. You are asked to make an estimate about the population, all residents of the city.
Make a plan.
The sample is representative of the population because it is selected at random and is large enough to provide accurate data. So, find the percent of people in the survey that attend at least one sporting event each month, and use the percent equation to make an estimate.
Solve and .check.
Use the plan to solve the problem. Then check your solution

Answer:
Number of residents attended one sports events = 30
Number of residents in the city who attend at least one sporting event each month = 30÷ 1500 × 80000
= 0.02 × 80000 = 1600

Explanation:
Number of residents attended zero sports events = 660
Number of residents attended zero sports events in the city = 660 ÷ 1500 = 0.44 × 80000 = 35200
Number of residents attended one or two sports events = 447
Number of residents attended one or two sports events in the city = 447 ÷ 1500 = 0.298 × 80000 =23840
Number of residents attended three or four sports events = 276
Number of residents attended three or four sports events in the city= 276 ÷ 1500 = 0.184 × 80000 = 14720
Number of residents attended five or more sports events = 87
Number  of residents attended five or more sports events in the city= 87 ÷ 1500 = 0.058 × 80000 =4640
Total number of residents sample taken = Number of residents attended zero sports events + Number of residents attended one or two sports events + Number of residents attended three or four sports events + Number of residents attended five or more sports events  + Number of residents attended one sports events
=>1500 = 660 + 447 + 276 + 87 + Number of residents attended one sports events
=> 1500 = 1470 + Number of residents attended one sports events
=> 1500 – 1470 = Number of residents attended one sports events
=> 30 = Number of residents attended one sports events
Check :
Total number of all events add = Total population in the city
LHS:
=> 35200 + 23840 + 14720 + 4640 + 1600
=> 80000
= RHS
Hence, LHS = RHS

Question 2.
The dot plots show the values in two data sets. Is the difference in the measures of center for the data sets significant?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cc 2
Answer:
Yes, the difference in the measures of center for the data set of A is not significant because the quotient is not less than 2.
No, the difference in the measures of center for the data set of B is significant because the quotient is less than 2.

Explanation:
Data of set A= – 6 – 5 -4 -4 – 4 -4 -3 -3 -3 -3
Order: -3 -4 -5 -6
Median of set A = -4 + – 5 ÷ 2 = -9 ÷ 2 = -4.5
Mean of set A = – 6 + -5 + -4 + -4 + -4 + -4 + -3 + -3 + -3 + -3 ÷10
= 35 ÷10 = 3.5
IQR of set A = -6 – (-4) = -6 + 4 = -2
Data of set B = -6 -6 -2 -2 -1 -1 -1 -1 0 0
Order : 0 -1 -2 -6
Median of set B = -1 + -2 ÷ 2 = -3 ÷ 2 = -1.5
Mean of set B = -6 + -6 + -2 + -2 + -1 + -1 + -1 + -1 + 0 + 0 ÷10
=  20  ÷10 = 2.0
IQR of set B = -6 – (-1) = -6 +1 = -5
Differences in medians ÷ IQR = -4.5 – (-1.5) ÷ -2 = -4.5 + 1.5 ÷ -2 = -3.0 ÷ -2 = 1.5
Differences in medians ÷ IQR = -4.5 – (-1.5) ÷ -5 = -4.5 + 1.5 ÷ -5 = -3.0 ÷ -5 = 0.6

Question 3.
You ask 60 randomly chosen students whether they support a later starting time for school. The table shows the results. Estimate the probability that at least two out of four randomly chosen students do not support a later starting time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cc 3
Answer:

Explanation:

Performance Task

Estimating Animal Populations
At the beginning of the this chapter, you watched a STEAM Video called “Comparing Dogs.” You are now ready to complete the performance task related to this video, available at BigIdeasMath.com. Be sure to use the problem-solving plan as you work through the performance task.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cc 4

Statistics Chapter Review

Review Vocabulary

Write the definition and give an example of each vocabulary term.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 1

Answer:
Population: Population is an entire group of objects or people.
Sample: A Sample  is a part of the population.
Unbiased Sample: Unbiased Sample is a representative of a population. It is selected random and is a large enough to provide accurate data.
Biased Sample: Biased Sample is a not representative of a population. One or more parts of the population are favored over others.

Graphic Organizers
You can use a Definition and Example Chart to organize information about a concept. Here is an example of a Definition and Example Chart for the vocabulary term sample.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 2
Choose and complete a graphic organizer to help you study each topic.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 3
1. population
2. shape of a distribution
3. mean absolute deviation (MAD)
4. interquartile range
5. double box-and-whisker plot
6. double dot plot

Answer: Its a double box-and-whisker plot.
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-Graphic Organizers

Chapter Self-Assessment

As you complete the exercises, use the scale below to rate your understanding of the success criteria in your journal.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 4


8.1 Samples and Populations (pp. 325–330)

Learning Target: Understand how to use random samples to make conclusions about a population.

Question 1.
You want to estimate the number of students in your school whose favorite subject is biology. You survey the first 10 students who arrive at biology club. Determine whether the sample is biased or unbiased. Explain.
Answer:
The sample is a Biased Sample because the students in the biology club are not representative of a population. One or more parts of the students are favored over others.

Question 2.
You want to estimate the number of athletes who play soccer. Give an example of a biased sample. Give an example of an unbiased sample.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 5
Answer:
Example of Biased sample :
What is your favorite sport? Sample is chosen from people attending a soccer game.
Example of Unbiased sample :
What is your favorite sport? Sample is chosen by picking names out of a register of school.

Question 3.
You want to know how the residents of your town feel about building a new baseball stadium. You randomly survey 100 people who enter the current stadium. Eighty support building a new stadium, and twenty do not. So, you conclude that80% of the residents of your town support building a new baseball stadium. Is your conclusion valid? Explain.
Answer:
The conclusion is valid.

Explanation:
Number of randomly chosen = 100
Number of people support new stadium = 80
Number of people does not support new stadium = 20
Percentage of people support new stadium = 80 ÷100 × 100= 80%

Question 4.
Which sample is better for making an estimate? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 6

Answer:
Sample B is better for making an estimate about predicting the number of students in a school who like gym class because its a unbiased sample and we get accurate data out of it.

Question 5.
You ask 125 randomly chosen students to name their favorite beverage. There are 1500 students in the school. Predict the number of students in the school whose favorite beverage is a sports drink.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 7
Answer:
Number of students in the school whose favorite beverage is a sports drink = 696.

Explanation:
Number of students in the school whose favorite beverage is a sports drink = Favorite Beverage sport drink ÷ randomly chosen students × students in the school.
= 58 ÷ 125 ×1500
= 0.464 ×1500
= 696.

Question 6.
You want to know the number of students in your state who have summer jobs. Determine whether you should survey the population or a sample. Explain.
Answer:
You should survey the sample.

Explanation:
You should survey the sample because a sample is the representation of population and selected at random and is a large which gives you the accurate data.

8.2 Using Random Samples to Describe Populations (pp. 331–336)
Learning Target: Understand variability in samples of a population.

Question 7.
To pass a quality control inspection, the products at a factory must contain no critical defects, no more than 2.5% of products can contain major defects, and no more than 4% of products can contain minor defects. There are 40,000 products being shipped from a factory. Each inspector randomly samples 125 products. The table shows the results.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 8
a. Use each sample to make an estimate for the number of products with minor defects at the factory. Describe the center and the variation of the estimates.
b. Use the samples to make an estimate for the percent of products with minor defects, with major defects, and with critical defects at the factory. Does the factory pass inspection? Explain.

Answer:
a. The median of major defect is greater than the median of minor defect in the factory. The variation of major defects is greater than the measure of variation of minor defects in the factory.

b.  Yes, the factory pass inspection because not more than 2.5% of products can contain major defects, and not more than 4% of products can contain minor defects.

Explanation:
a. Number of products with minor defects at the factory = 5 6 3 6
Order: 3 5 6
Median of minor defects= 5
Mean of minor defects= 5+6+3+6 ÷ 4 = 20 ÷ 4 =5
Variation of minor defects= (5-5)^2 + (6-5)^2 + (3-5)^2 + (6-5)^2  ÷ 4
= (0)^2 + (1)^2 + (-2)^2 + (1)^2  ÷ 4
= 0 +  1 + 4 +1 ÷ 4
= 6÷ 4
= 1.5

Number of products with major defects at the factory = 2  1 3 5
Order: 1 2 3 5
Median of major defects= 2 + 3 ÷ 2 = 5 ÷ 2 = 2.5
Mean of major defects= 2 + 1+ 3 +5 ÷ 4 = 11 ÷ 4 = 2.75
Variation of major defects = (2-2.75)^2 + (1-2.75)^2 + (3-2.75)^2 + (5-2.75)^2  ÷ 4
= (-0.75)^2 + (-1.75)^2 + (0.25)^2 + (2.25)^2  ÷ 4
=  0.5625 + 3.0625 +0.625 + 5.0625 ÷ 4
=  9.3125 ÷ 4
= 2.33

Number of products with critical defects at the factory = 0 0 0 0
Median critical defects = 0
Mean critical defects = 0
Variation critical defects = 0

b. Percent of minor defects in the factory = 20 ÷ 125 = 0.16
Percent of major defects in the factory = 11 ÷125 = 0.088
Percent of critical defects in the factory = 0 ÷ 125 = 0

Question 8.
A scientist determines that 35% of packages of a food product contain a specific bacteria. Use technology to simulate choosing 100 random samples of 20 packages. How closely do the samples estimate the percent of all packages with the specific bacteria?

Answer:
Percent of bacteria in rice food product = 74 × 35 ÷ 100 = 2590 ÷ 100 = 25.9
Percent of bacteria in Wheat food product = 91 × 35 ÷ 100 = 3185 ÷ 100 = 31.85
Percent of bacteria in Milk food product = 78 × 35 ÷ 100 = 2730 ÷ 100 = 27.30
Percent of bacteria in Cereals food product = 57 × 35 ÷ 100 =  1995 ÷ 100 = 19.95

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-7th-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-8-Statistics-8.2-Using-Random-Samples-to-Describe-Populations-(pp. 331–336)8
Total number of Rice food product = 12 + 30 +32 = 74
Percent of bacteria in rice food product = 74 × 35 ÷ 100 = 2590 ÷ 100 = 25.9

Total number of Wheat food product = 34 + 29 + 28 = 91
Percent of bacteria in Wheat food product = 91 × 35 ÷ 100 = 3185 ÷ 100 = 31.85

Total number of Milk food product = 32 + 21 +25 = 78
Percent of bacteria in Milk food product = 78 × 35 ÷ 100 = 2730 ÷ 100 = 27.30

Total number of Cereals food product = 22 +20 +15 =
Percent of bacteria in Cereals food product = 57 × 35 ÷ 100 =  1995 ÷ 100 = 19.95

8.3 Comparing Populations (pp. 337–342)
Learning Target: Compare populations using measures of center and variation.

Question 9.
The double box-and-whisker plot represents the points scored per game by two football teams during the regular season.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 9
a. Compare the data sets using measures of center and variation.
b. Which team is more likely to score 28 points in a game?
Answer:
a. Team B has greater measures of center and both the team have same measures of variation.
b. Team A is most likely to score 28 points in a game.

Explanation:
a. Data of Team A =  0 6 14 22 28
Median of Team A =  14
IQR of Team A = 22 – 6 = 16
Data of Team B = 0  20  32  36  42
Median of Team B = 32
IQR of Team B = 36 – 20 = 16

b. In the data given, 28 points are given in team A not in Team B.

Question 10.
The dot plots show the ages of campers at two summer camps.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 10
a. Express the difference in the measures of center as a multiple of the measure of variation.
b. Are the ages of campers a tone camp significantly greater than at the other? Explain.

Answer:
a. Differences in medians ÷ IQR = 15 – 13 ÷ 2 = 2 ÷ 2 = 1
b. No, the ages of  campers are  significantly greater than at the other.

Explanation:
a. Data of Camp A =  13 13 13 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 17 17 17
Order: 13 14 15 16 17
Median of Camp A = 15
IQR of Camp A = 16 – 14 = 2
Data of Camp B = 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 13 14 14 14 14 15 15 15
Order: 11 12 13 14 15
Median of Camp B = 13
IQR of  Camp B = 14 – 12 = 2
Differences in medians ÷ IQR = 15 – 13 ÷ 2 = 2 ÷ 2 = 1

b. Because the quotient is less than 2, the difference in the medians is not significant.

8.4 Using Random Samples to Compare Populations (pp. 343–348)
Learning Target: Use random samples to compare populations.

Question 11.
The double dot plot shows the median gas mileages of 10 random samples of 50 vehicles for two car models. Compare the samples using measures of center and variation. Can you determine which car model has a better gas mileage? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 11
Answer:
The Variation of Model B measures are greater compared to the measures of  the Variation of Model A.
The measures of center of Model B is greater than the measures of Model A.
Model B cars has a better gas mileage than that of Model A cars.

Explanation:
Data of Model A =  18  19 19  20 20 20 21 21 22 27
Order: 18 19 20 21 22 27
Median of Model A =  20 + 21 ÷ 2 =41 ÷ 2 = 20.5
Mean of Model A = 18 + 19 + 19 + 20 + 20 + 20 + 21 + 21 +22 +27 ÷ 10
=  207 ÷ 10
= 20.7
Variation of Model A = (18-20.7)^2 + (19-20.7)^2 + (19-20.7)^2 + (20-20.7)^2 + (20-20.7)^2 + (20-20.7)^2 + (21-20.7)^2 + (21-20.7)^2 +(22-20.7)^2 + (27-20.7)^2  ÷ 10
= (-2.7)^2 + (-1.7)^2 + (-1.7)^2 + (-0.7)^2 + (-0.7)^2 + (-0.7)^2 + (0.3)^2 + (0.3)^2 +(1.3)^2 + (6.3)^2  ÷ 10
= 7.29 + 2.89 + 2.89 + 0.49 + 0.49 + 0.49 + 0.09 +0.09 + 1.69 + 39.69 ÷ 10
=  56.37  ÷ 10
= 5.637
Data of Model B = 20 21  27  29 29 29 30 30 31 32
Order: 20 21 27 29 30 31 32
Median of Model B = 29
Mean of Model B = 20 + 21 + 27 + 29 + 29 + 29 + 30 + 30 + 31 + 32 ÷ 10
=  278 ÷ 10
= 27.8
Variation of Model B = (20-27.8)^2 + (21-27.8)^2 + (27-27.8)^2 + (29-27.8)^2 + (29-27.8)^2 + (30-27.8)^2 + (30-27.8)^2 + (31-27.8)^2 +(31-27.8)^2 + (32-27.8)^2  ÷ 10
= (-7.8)^2 + (-6.8)^2 + (-0.8)^2 + (1.2)^2 + (1.2)^2 + (2.2)^2 + (2.2)^2 + (3.2)^2 +(3.2)^2 + (4.2)^2  ÷ 10
= 60.84 + 46.24 + 0.64  + 1.44 + 1.44 + 4.84 + 4.84 + 10.24 + 10.24 + 17.64 ÷ 10
= 158.4 ÷ 10
= 15.84

Question 12.
You compare the average amounts of time people in their twenties and thirties spend driving each week. The double box-and-whisker plot represents the medians of 100 random samples of 8 people from each age group. Can you determine whether one age group drives more than the other? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics cr 12
Answer:
Because the variables are same, you can determine the one age group drives more than the other visual overlap by expressing the differences in the medians as the multiples of IQR.

Explanation:
Data of Twenties = 0 5 10 15 25
Median of Twenties = 10
IQR of Twenties = 15 – 5 = 10
Data of Thirties = 0 10 15 20  40
Median of Thirties = 15
IQR of Thirties = 20 – 10 =10
Differences in medians ÷ IQR = 15- 10 ÷10 = 5 ÷10 =0.5
Because the quotient is less than 2, the difference is not significant.

Statistics Practice Test

Question 1.
You want to estimate the number of students in your school who prefer to bring a lunch from home rather than buy one at school. You survey five students who are standing in the lunch line. Determine whether the sample biased or unbiased. Explain.

Answer:
The sample is biased.

Explanation:
The sample taken is biased because it does not gives you the accurate information of the number of students in your school prefer to bring a lunch from home rather than buy one at school. The sample size chosen is incorrect as taking the students in the lunch line..

Question 2.
You want to predict which candidate will likely be voted Seventh Grade Class President. There are 560 students in the seventh grade class. You randomly sample 3 different groups of 50 seventh-grade students. The results are shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics pt 2
a. Use each sample to make an estimate for the number of students in seventh grade that vote for Candidate A.
b. Who do you expect to be voted Seventh Grade Class President? Explain.

Answer:
a. Estimation for the number of students who vote for Candidate A = 64.
b. Candidate B is to be expected to be voted Seventh Grade Class President.

Explanation:
a. Estimation for the number of students who vote for Candidate A = 27 + 22 +15 = 64.
Estimation for the number of students who vote for Candidate B = 23 + 28 + 35 = 86.
b. Candidate B is to be expected to be voted Seventh Grade Class President.

Question 3.
Of 60 randomly chosen students from a school surveyed, 16 chose the aquarium as their favorite field trip. There are 720 students in the school. Predict the number of students in the school who choose the aquarium as their favorite field trip.
Answer:
Number of students in the school who choose the aquarium as their favorite field trip = 192.

Explanation:
Number of students who chose the aquarium as their favorite field trip = 16
Number of students  chosen students from a school surveyed = 60
Total number of students in the school = 720
Number of students in the school who choose the aquarium as their favorite field trip = 720/60 × 16 = 192

Question 4.
The double box-and-whisker plot shows the ages of the viewers of two television shows in a small town.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics pt 4
a. Compare the data sets using measures of center and variation.
b. Which show is more likely to have a 44-year-old viewer?

Answer:
a. The Show A  center is likely to be greater than the measures of the center of Show B. Variation of show B is greater than Variation of show A.
b.  Show A  is more likely to have a 44-year-old viewer.

Explanation:
Data of Show A = 35   40   45    50   55
Median of Show A = 45
Mean of Show A = 35  + 40 +  45  +  50 +  55 ÷ 5 = 225 ÷ 5 = 45
Variation of Show A = (35-45)^2 + (40-45)^2 + (45-45)^2 + (50-45)^2 +  (55-45)^2 ÷ 5
= (-10)^2 + (-5)^2 + (0)^2 + (5)^2 +  (10)^2 ÷ 5
= 100 + 25 + 0 + 25 +100 ÷ 5
= 250 ÷ 5
= 50.

Data of Show B = 20   25    35    40   55
Median of Show B = 35
Mean of Show B = 20 + 25  +  35  +  40 +  55 ÷ 5 = 175 ÷ 5 = 35.
Variation of show B = (20-35)^2 + (25-35)^2 + (35-35)^2 + (40-35)^2 +  (55-35)^2 ÷ 5
= (-15)^2 + (-10)^2 + (0)^2 + (5)^2 +  (5)^2 ÷ 5
= 225 + 100 + 0 + 25 + 25   ÷ 5
= 375 ÷ 5
= 75.

Question 5.
The double box-and-whisker plot shows the test scores for two French classes taught by the same teacher.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics pt 5
a. Express the difference in the measures of center as a multiple of the measure of variation.
b. Are the scores for one class significantly greater than for the other? Explain.

Answer:
a. The difference of the Variation of Class A is similar to the Variation of Class A and the measures of the center of Class A  is comparably greater than the measures of the center of Class B.
b. Yes, the scores for one class significantly greater than for the other.

Explanation:
Data of Class A =  76  84  88  92  100                                          Data of Class B = 68  76  80   84   100
Median of Class A = 76 + 84 + 88 + 92 + 100 ÷ 5                     Median of Class B = 68 + 76 + 80 + 84  + 100 ÷ 5
=  440  ÷ 5 = 88                                                                                = 408  ÷ 5  = 81.6
IQR of Class A = 92 – 84 = 8                                                        IQR of Class B = 84 – 76 =  8

Question 6.
Two airplanes each hold about 400 pieces of luggage. The double dot plot shows a random sample of 8 pieces of luggage from each plane. Compare the samples using measures of center and variation. Can you determine which plane has heavier luggage? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics pt 6
Answer:
The measures of center of Plane A  is greater than the measure of center of Plane B.
Plane A is likely to have heavier luggage than Plane B. The Variation of Plane A is greater than Variation of Plane B.

Explanation:
Data of Plane A =  28  36  36  38  38  40  40  40                     Data of plane B = 32  32  34  34  34  36  38 50
Order = 28 36 38 40                                                                Order = 32  34  36  38 50
Median of Plane A = 36 + 38 ÷ 2 = 74 ÷ 2 = 37                Median of Plane B  = 36
Variation of Plane A =  (28-37)^2 + (36-37)^2 + (36-37)^2 + (38-37)^2 +  (38-37)^2 + (40-37)^2 + (40-37)^2 +  (40-37)^2 ÷ 8
=(-9)^2 + (-1)^2 +  (-1)^2  + (1)^2 + (1)^2 +  (3)^2  + (3)^2 + (3)^2  ÷ 8
= 81 + 1 +1 +1 +1 +9 +9 +9  ÷ 8
= 112 ÷ 8
= 14.
Variation of Plane B =  (32-36)^2 + (32-36)^2 +  (34-36)^2  + (34-36)^2 + (34-36)^2 +  (36-36)^2  + (38-36)^2 + (50-36)^2 ÷ 8
= (-4)^2 + (-4)^2 +  (-2)^2 + (-2)^2 + (-2)^2 +  (0)^2  + (2)^2 + (4)^2  ÷ 8
= 16 + 16 + 4+ 4+ 4+ 0 +4 + 16  ÷ 8
=  64  ÷ 8
= 8.

Statistics Cumulative Practice

Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 1
Question 1.
Which of the ratios form a proportion?
A. 5 to 2 and 4 to 10
B. 2 : 3 and 7 : 8
C. 3 to 2 and 15 to 10
D. 12 : 8 and 8 : 42.
Answer:
C. 3 to 2 and 15 to 10 is the  ratios form a proportion

Explanation:
A) 5 to 2 and 4 to 10
B) 2 : 3 and 7 : 8
C) 3 to 2 and 15 to 10
=> 3 : 2 and 15 : 10
=> Divide by 5 on both sides
=> 3 : 2 and  3 : 2
D) 12 : 8 and 8 : 42.
=> Divide by 2 on both sides
=> 6 : 4 and 4 : 21
=> Divide by 2 on both sides
=> 3 : 2 and  2 :21

Question 2.
A student scored 600 the first time. she took the mathematics portion of a college entrance exam. The next time she took the exam, she scored 660. Her second score represents what percent increase over her first score?
F. 9.1%
G. 10%
H. 39.6%
I. 60%
Answer:
F = 9.1 %  is the Percentage increase in her second score over her first score.

Explanation:
Number of marks she scored in first attempt in the exam = 600
Number of marks she scored in second attempt in the exam = 660
Difference in the score = 660 – 600 = 60
Percentage increase in her second score over her first score = 60 ÷ 660 × 100
= 0.9090 × 100 = 9.1%

Question 3.
You ask 100 randomly chosen students to name their favorite food. There are 1250 students in the school. Based on this sample, what is the number of students in the school whose favorite food is chicken?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 3
A. 100
B. 225
C. 450
D. 475
Answer:
Number of students in the school whose favorite food is chicken = 100.

Explanation:
Total number of students in the school = 1250
Number of students randomly chosen = 100
Number of students in the school whose favorite food is chicken = 8 ÷ 100 × 1250
= 0.08 × 1250 = 100.

Question 4.
Which value of makes the equation p + 6 = 5 true?
F. – 1
G. 1
H. 11
I. 30
Answer:
F. – 1
p = -1 makes the equation p + 6 = 5 true.

Explanation:
F) Substitute p = -1 in Equation:
p + 6 = 5 = -1 + 6 = 5
G) Substitute p = 1 in Equation:
p + 6 = 5 = 1 + 6 = 7
H ) Substitute p = 11 in Equation:
p + 6 = 5 = 11 + 6 = 17
I) Substitute p = 30 in Equation:
p + 6 = 5 = 30 + 6 = 36

Question 5.
The table shows the costs for four cans of tomato soup. Which can has the lowest cost per ounce?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 5
A. Can A
B. Can B
C. Can C
D. Can D
Answer:
The lowest cost per ounce has D. Can D.

Explanation:
Cost of Can A cost per ounce= 1.95 ÷ 26 = 0.075
Cost of Can B  cost per ounce= 0.72 ÷ 8 = 0.09
Cost of Can C  cost per ounce=0.86 ÷ 10.75 = 0.08
Cost of Can D  cost per ounce= 2.32 ÷ 23.2 = 0.1

Question 6.
What value of y makes the equation – 3y = – 18 true?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 6
Answer:
y = 6 makes the equation – 3y = – 18 true.

Explanation:
Equation – 3y = – 18
=> y = -18 ÷ -3
Divide by 3 both sides.
=> y = 6

Question 7.
The double dot plot shows the values in two data sets. Which sentence best represents the difference in the measures of center as a multiple of the measure of variation?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 7
F. The difference of the means is about 3.3 times the MAD.
G. The difference of the means is about 3.8 times the MAD.
H. The difference of the means is 36 times the MAD.
I. The difference of the means is 48.7 times the MAD.

Answer:
G. The difference of the means is about 3.8 times the MAD.

Explanation:
Data of set A = 42  43  46  48   48  51  51  51  52  55
Mean of set A = 42 + 43 + 46 + 48 + 48 + 51 + 51 + 51 + 52 + 55 ÷ 10
= 487 ÷ 10
= 48.7
MAD of set A = |42−48.7∣ + |43−48.7∣ +|46−48.7∣ +|48−48.7∣ + |48-48.7∣ + |51-48.7∣ + |51-48.7∣ +|51-48.7∣ +|52-48.7∣ + |55-48.7∣ ÷ 10
=  |-6.7∣ + |-5.7∣ +|-2.7∣ +|-0.7∣ + |-0.7∣ + |2.3∣ + |2.3∣ +|2.3∣ +|3.3∣ + |6.3 ∣ ÷ 10
= 33 ÷ 10
= 3.3
Data of set B = 30  31  33  34  36  36  38  40  41  41
Mean of set B = 30 + 31 + 33 + 34 + 36 + 36 + 38 + 40 + 41 + 41 ÷ 10
= 360÷ 10
= 36.0
MAD of set B = |30-36∣ + |31-36∣ +|33-36∣ +|34-36∣ + |36-36∣ + |36-36∣ + |38-36∣ +|40-36∣ +|41-36∣ + |41-36∣ ÷ 10
= |-6∣ + |-5∣ +|-3∣ +|-2∣ + |0∣ + |0∣ + |2∣ +|4∣ +|5∣ + |5∣ ÷ 10
=  32  ÷ 10
= 3.2
Difference in Means ÷ MAD of set A= 48.7 – 36 ÷ 3.3 = 12.7 ÷ 3.3= 3.85
Difference in Means ÷ MAD of set B= 48.7 – 36 ÷ 3.2 = 12.7 ÷ 3.2 =3.97

Question 8.
What is the missing value in the ratio table?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 8
Answer:
The missing value in the ratio table is 20.

Explanation:
a) 2/3  = 5
=> 2 = 5 × 3
=> 2 = 15

b) 8/3 = X
8 = 3 × =  60
=> 60 ÷ 3
=> 20

Question 9.
You are selling tomatoes. What is the minimum number of 4pounds of tomatoes you need to sell to earn at least $44?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 9
A. 11
B. 12
C. 40
D. 176
Answer:
A. 11 is the minimum number of  tomatoes needed to sell to earn at least $44.

Explanation:
Cost of the tomatoes = $44
cost of the tomatoes per pound = $4
The minimum number of  tomatoes needed to sell to earn at least $44 = 44 ÷ 4 = 11.

Question 10.
You and a group of friends want to know how many students in your school prefer science. There are 900 students in your school. Each person randomly surveys 20 students. The table shows the results. Which subject do students at your school prefer?
Big Ideas Math Answers 7th Grade Chapter 8 Statistics cp 10
Part A Use each sample to make an estimate for the number of students in your school who prefer science.
Part B Describe the variation of the estimates.
Part C Use the samples to make one estimate for the number of students who prefer science in your school.

Answer:
Number of students who prefer science = 28
Mean = 5.6
Variation of the estimate  = 4.24

Explanation:
Number of students who prefer science = 6 + 7 + 8 +5 + 2 = 28
Mean of number of students who prefer science = 6 + 7 + 8 +5 + 2 ÷ 5 = 28 ÷ 5 = 5.6
Variation of the estimate  = (6-5.6)^2 + (7-5.6)^2 + (8-5.6)^2 + (5-5.6)^2 +  (2-5.6)^2  ÷ 5
= (-0.4)^2 + (1.4)^2 + (2.4)^2 + (0.6)^2 + (-3.6)^2  ÷ 5
=  0.16 +1.96 + 5.76 + 0.36 +  12.96  ÷ 5
=  21.2 ÷ 5
= 4.24

Conclusion:

We hope that the information given about Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 7 Chapter 8 Statistics satisfies you. You can compare all the questions in real-time and can understand the concept easily. Stick to our website to get the solution key for all chapters of BIM Grade 7 Chapter 8. Clear all your doubts from the below-given comment section and share the article with your friends.